Home
Transactionware™ GM version 9.5
Contents
1. Preview Split View Hide Criteria Terminal s Not Reporting 1 Jurisdiction ID All Jurisdictions Tax ID All Taxes Period 12 01 2001 01 31 2002 Tax Amount Taxable Amount 434 94 434 94 2 Nontaxable Merch Sales 0 00 26 10 01 16 2002 02 29PM 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 The Sales Tax Report displays the following information e Tax ID the identification number of the applicable tax rate e Description a description of the tax e Jurisdiction the description of the applicable tax identification number e Tax Amount the amount of applicable tax e Taxable Amount the sales amount used to calculate the tax amount associated with the tax identification number e Non Taxable Merchandise Sales The dollar amount of all non taxable items sold Non merchandise Summary 310 The Non merchandise Summary Report provides totals for sales of non merchandise transactions and non merchandise items Once you have generated the Non merchandise Summary report you can generate the Non merchandise Detail report The detail report provides information about each non merchandise transaction The Store Manager compiles the Non merchandise Detail Report based on the same criteria you choose for the Non merchandise Summary report Using standard reports Non merchandise Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather
2. 2 Edit the information in the fields as appropriate 3 Click Save Item The new information for the item is saved Deleting a batch item Once you have selected and opened a batch you can delete items from it To delete an item 1 Click the item you want to delete and then click Remove A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 2 Click Yes The item is removed from the batch Auditing product price changes The Store Manager tracks the changes you make to prices through the PLU Maintenance window and the price batch management function You can review information about the price changes using the Retail Price Update Audit function The information is not editable The Store Manager tracks the following actions e Modifying a PLU s price in the PLU Maintenance window e Deleting a PLU e Applying price changes using batch management In addition price changes in pending batches are tracked 167 Managing Price Look Ups 168 For information about applying price changes using price batch management see Using price batch management functionality on page 162 To view PLU price changes 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Retail Price Update Audit 3 Click Display All The price change information is displayed in the window For information about the fields in the window see The Retail Price Update Audit window on page 168 Tip You can perform a q
3. E mailing a report 298 If a report is linked to the template designer you can send its data as an attachment to an email so it can be used by another application E mailing a report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 WARNING The email option must be configured for you during the installation of the Store Manager software You must have a compatible email system in your store If you do not have the email option the Send button is not visible on the report window When you email a report a message with a file attachment is sent to the reader The attachment can be one of the file types listed below The following are the types of files you can send e Internet Document htm e Power Soft report psr e Microsoft Excel comma separated values csv e dBase ll dbf e bBase lll dbf e Microsoft Excel Data Interchange dif e Microsoft Excel Work Sheet xls e SQL Syntax sql e Microsoft Multiplan Format xls e Text Tab separated values txt e WKS Lotus 123 wks e WKI Lotus 123 wk1 e Windows Meta File wmf e Clipboard Once you have compiled a report by selecting report criteria and generating the report you can email it To complete the following steps the compiled report must be visible on your screen in the report window To email the report data 1 In the report window click Send 2 Complete t
4. 4 Click Save and then Exit Maintaining extended customer fields You can use extended fields to record additional customer information that is not available in the Customer table by creating customized fields and applying the fields to customer records The customer information in the extended fields is stored in the database and can be extracted to an ASCII file for use by a third party application if required Your head office uses the Configurator to define Fields option types options and option details You can also define options and option details using the Store Manager For example your head office can define a Frequency field and you can define three options weekly biweekly monthly You can assign a frequency option to a customer Extended fields can have option types and options assigned to them or they can be defined to prompt you to type information into them Your head office defines extended fields and how you can complete them e Option types Created by your head office and assigned to extended fields Option types contain options for you to choose from to complete the field The same option type can be assigned to several fields 99 File Maintenance Features e Options Choices available to fill the extended field Options are assigned to option types and appear in drop down lists You can define options and assign them to option types using the Store Manager Option details are text that provide additi
5. 5 Click the Transaction Status All radio button to include all transactions in this report Click Selected and then click the specific transactions checkboxes of a particular status to include in this report 6 To select the pending transaction types by activity click the Transaction Activity drop down list and select an option from the list Your choices are Sale Payment Pickup Item Adjustment Cancel Write off Pymt Adjustment Reactivate Write off Statement and Change Admin Info 7 Click the Payment or Pickup radio button to search for active transactions with payments or pickups that are overdue by a specified number of days or that are due before a specified date 8 Click Overdue by and type the number of days that the next payment or expected pickup is overdue by After generating the report the number of delinquent days and the level of delinquency is displayed in the Overdue by days column 9 To include pending transactions with a next payment or expected pickup date prior to a specified date click Due before and type the date in the adjacent field 10 To print the report for all customers with the above criteria click All in the Customers section of the window 11 If you want the report to show the pending transactions for a specific customer click the Reference field and type the customer s reference number in the adjacent field 347 Reporting 348 12 Click the Phone field and t
6. No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you complete the balance 119 Tender Management 120 10 11 12 13 14 To define the cashier or register that the tender is being balanced for type a cashier or register number in the Register field Your head office uses the Configurator to define whether balances are performed by the cashier or register Note that the field name reflects the setting The Txn Status field indicates the balance transaction s status pending completed or voided No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Operator field displays the employee number of the person that processes the balance transaction No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the employee number of the person who logged into the Store Manager The Txn Date field contains the date on which the balance transaction is created No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system date of the computer it is running on The Business Date field contains the current business date Note that this date can be different than the system date This field defaults to the current business day however a balance can also be done for previous business days Select the reason that you ate performing the balance from safe transaction from the Reason drop down list You define the sele
7. You can define the selections that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window but 2 default display methods are defined for you Display by Decimal and Display by Hrs Mins Action Click the drop down list and select a display style from the list Configuring payroll parameters Field Description Display Worked Hours as This field defines the text string that appears after the hour portion of the time in the Total Worked fields in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window and on printed payroll reports For example assume the employee worked 2 hours and 15 minutes If you enter H into this field the time is displayed in the Total Worked field as 2H 15 mins Action Type a short alphanumeric string into the field Display Worked Minutes This field defines the text string that appears after the minute portion of the time as in the Total Worked fields in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window and on printed payroll reports For example assume the employee worked 2 hours and 15 minutes If you enter M into this field the time is displayed in the Total Worked field as 2 hrs 15M Action Type a short alphanumeric string into the field Fiscal Week End This field defines the last day of the store s fiscal week All the Start of Week and End of Week dates in the payroll windows are determine
8. You can modify the document number if you click Modify PO Doc Number in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Type a number into the field Status This field indicates the current status of the transfer Pending The transfer has not been completed and can be modified Complete The transfer is complete and cannot be modified Void The transfer has been completed and then voided No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 230 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Origin Transfer Date Ship Via Carton Count Vendor To From Store Hash Qty Reason Code Note Case Number Quantity This field indicates if the transfer is based on an electronic document from your head office or if it is manual No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the date the inventory transaction is created The transaction date does not need to be the same as the order date No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the system date of the computer the Store Manager is running on This field defines how the items are shipped to or from yout store You can define the selection of ship via types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window If you click Ship Vi
9. Click OK The new option ID and description are displayed in the Options fields Click the option to which you want to add details In Options Details type text Click Save Details and then click Exit Modifying extended options You can modify the descriptions for options that you create in the Store Manager or that your head office created in the Configurator To modify an option 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Extended Field Options Click the option you want to modify and then click Modify The Extended Field Option window displays a Description field Extended Field Option Option Type 5000 Interest Groups Option Id 3 Description Candles OK Cancel Type the new option description in the Description field Click OK The new option description is displayed in the Options field Click Exit Tip Once you select the option that you want to modify you can change the option description by editing the text in Option Details and clicking Save Details 155 Managing Price Look Ups Deleting extended options 156 You should not delete an extended option if you have applied it to a PLU To delete an option 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Extended Field Options Click the option that you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The optio
10. Click Save and then click Exit Modifying a user flag option You can modify the code names and descriptions of existing user flag options To modify a user flag option 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click User Flags Click the UserFlag No drop down list and select the user flag that contains the option you want to modify The existing options for the user flag are displayed in the lower part of the window Click the option that you want to modify Setting up the product hierarchy 5 Click the Code Name field or the Description field and type the new information The code name can be up to 10 characters long and the description can be up to 20 characters long 6 Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a user flag option You cannot delete a user flag but you can delete the options you have created for it If you have assigned an option to a PLU or promotion you should not delete it To delete a user flag option 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click User Flags 3 Click the UserFlag No drop down list and select the user flag that contains the option you want to delete The existing options for the user flag are displayed in the lower part of the window ja User Flags Maintenance ioj x UserFlag No fi UserFlag Name Description J 1 Spring Spring items J 2 Summer JSummer items J 3 Fai JFall Autumn items Winter items New Dele
11. Entering a new pickup A new pickup has a pending status until you complete it You can modify the amounts in a pending pickup transaction Pending pickup amounts are not applied to the cashier s or register s actual tender totals during balancing or added to the safe s contents For information about completing a pickup see Completing a pickup on page 112 Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Reason Code drop down list if the Reason parameter is set to mandatory In the following steps you are required to enter information into the POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window on page 114 To enter a new pickup 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe with the pickup 3 Click POS Pickup a 1 Safel POS Pickup Selection Window O Pending 4 Click New 5 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit 111 Tender Management Completing a pickup A pickup has a pending status until you complete it Completed pickup amounts are subtracted from the cashier s or register s actual amounts during balancing and added to the safe s contents You cannot modify a completed pickup but you can void it If you find an error in a completed pickup you must void the pickup and create a new one For information about
12. Mix Matches Qty Desc Qty Pricing D Sale M af 0 Sell Qty 0 Link Item I Exchange aj of 0 Limitedy 0 Couponttem Returns a 7 Scaleltem D RinwioRept K Auto Disc ID j 1 Use Dept Pend Trans M eRe rer oe Commision ID 0 Match Mfg m Discount Mi Sere reneh Pe Measurement Fixed gt Gen Coupon 7 Empl Discount M New Ordering Pkg Qty 0 Size J 0 000 Allow PLU Upd M Tare Weight 0 Size Unit Allow Price Upd M Local Price Chg M eens UsedByDays Allow Dept Upd M Local Dept Chg l Delete Exit eli Generate Unique PLU Extended Fields M Inventory Control Inventory Information 143 Managing Price Look Ups 144 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Note Some options that you can define in the PLU Maintenance window are also defined on a department basis on the Department Maintenance window WARNING Use Department is also setup in the Configurator If you click the Use Dept checkbox in this window the tax itemizer discount return and scale item options you define in the Department Maintenance window are used for the item If you leave the Use Dept checkbox clear the options you define in this window are used To define an item s unique PLU number type a number in the PLU field Your head office must define the configuration that the PLU must conform to in the Configurator application Type a description up to 40 characters in lengt
13. To define the department that contains the items you want included in the report click Department the drop down list and select a department from the list You can also use the PLU To Category Group Userflag 1 6 and Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria The UserFlag 1 6 fields define the user flag option that is assigned to the items you want included in the report Click the UserFlag drop down lists and select a user flag option from each list You can also use the PLU To Category Group Department and Vendor fields to define items to be 341 Reporting included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria 7 To define a vendor that supplies the items you want to include in the report click the Vendor drop down list and select a vendor from the list You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria 8 To group the report data by category group department and vendor click the checkboxes in the Group By section of the window and then click the drop down lists and select an option from each list 9 To clear the information from the criteria window click Reset 10 To generate the Gross Profit Report based on the criteria in the window click Generate Report Tip To find a PLU click in the PLU field and press F12
14. pi Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit 89 File Maintenance Features Deleting a tare weight If you delete a tare weight that is assigned to a PLU the item s weight is not deducted before the price is calculated To delete a tare weight 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Tare Weight 3 Click Display All The existing tare weights are displayed in the window 9 Tare Weight Selection Window OF x Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the tare weight you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The tare weight is deleted The Tare Weight Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for creating a tare weight Tare Weight 1 Of x Tare Id 1 Weight 010 New Description fT are Weight 1 Save Delete Exit ddd 90 Entering another store s information Entering To set the parameters in theTare Weight Maintenance window 1 To identify the tare weight type an identification number in the Tare ID field 2 To define the weight of the packaging type a number in the Weight field The unit of measurement that is used to interpret the number entered in this field is determined by your scale 3 To describe the tare weight type text that describes the tare wei
15. 30 2 On the Parameters Setup Menu click Worksheets Security TTT ___________ _qe____________ _ ia Worksheets Security Setup lof x Update Level View Level 3rd Party Programs Men lection w 0 ba 0 Loy 3rd Party Programs Setup 0 Lowest 0 Lowest 3rd Party Software Menu 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Administration Menu 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Authorization Report Criteria 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Balance Report Criteria 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Window Description Clock InfClock Out Report Criteria 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Clock In Out Detail 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Clock In Out Summary 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Code Table Maintenance 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Configurator Parameters 0 Lowest 0 Lowest Customer Maintenance 0 Lowest 0 Lowest lt Number of windows added gt Add New Windows Save Ex rf Ifa list of the Store Manager windows is not visible in the window click Add New Windows You only need to do this the first time you access this window after installing a new version of the Store Manager software Note The Window Description describes the window name no action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To assign the minimum authority level that an employee needs in order to edit information in the corresponding window click the Update Level drop down list and choose an authority level from the list To assign the minimum authority level that an employee needs in or
16. You can also click Current Business Date and the Period To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button This field defines a range of dates for the report period You can also click Current Business Date and Previous Business Date to select the report period Action Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar Click a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field These fields determine the days included on the report The days you select that fall during the report period are included Action Click V the checkboxes for the days you want included in the report This field defines a range of times for the report period Action Click the drop down list and select a time from the list This field defines the time increments hour 1 2 hour the Store Manager uses to accumulate and report sales information Action Click the drop down list and select an increment from the list This field clears the information from the criteria window so you can make new selections Action Click the button 327 Reporting 328 Field Description Summary This field generates the Hourly Sales Summary report Action Click the button Average This field generates the Average Houtly Sales report Action Click the button Hourly Sales Summary report The following is a sample Hourly Sales Summary report You can use the report template design
17. 1 Select criteria and generate the Sales report The Sales report is displayed in the report window 2 Click Sales Analysis The Sales Analysis report is displayed in the report window The following table contains descriptions of the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns Column Formula Net Sales Total gross sales total taxes total reductions to gross Net Merch Sales Total gross merch sales reductions to gross Note The reductions to gross are the reductions made to merchandise sales Net Non Merch Sales Total gross non merch sales reductions to gross Note The reductions to gross are the reductions made to non merchandise sales Sales Tax Report 308 The Sales Tax Report summarizes all of the sales tax totals that are generated for a specified range of business dates The report is sorted according to the business date jurisdiction ID and the tax ID The taxable amounts tax amounts non taxable sales and the number of rows printed on the report are totaled and printed at the end of the report as the report total For information on setting up taxes see Setting up taxes on page 80 Sales Tax Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Sales tax Report Using standard reports a Sales Tax Report Criteria l To complete the Sales Tax Report Criteria window 1 To select
18. 2 3 4 S4 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click Link Items Click Display All All of the link item schemes are displayed Click the scheme you want to modify and then click Open The Link Item Maintenance window displays the information Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a linked item You can delete an item from a package If you delete all the items from a package the package is also deleted The PLU that represents the package is still valid 1 2 178 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click Link Items Reviewing mix match pricing schemes 3 Click Display All All of the link item schemes are displayed 4 Click the scheme you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The link item scheme is deleted Reviewing mix match pricing schemes A mix match pricing scheme defines different prices when certain combinations of items are sold Your head office uses the Configurator to create mix match pricing schemes You can review the information in the schemes and apply them to PLUs You cannot edit the fields on the Mix Match Maintenance window they are for information purposes only You apply mix match pricing schemes to PLUs using the Mix Match 1 4 fields in the PLU Page 1 tab in the PLU Maintenance window Some examples of mix match pricing scheme
19. 212 555 1212 SSN SIN f23456789 Employee Type f none v Salesperson Num iit Commission 0 Employee Disc 0 Price Level Man Force Preset Empl Discount M Save Delete X Exit 1 To identify the employee type a unique number up to 13 characters long into the Employee ID field Note The Store Number is automatically displayed 2 Type the employee s first name into the First Name field The first name is limited to 17 characters Type the employee s last name into the Last Name field The last name is limited to 17 characters 4 Type the employee s street and unit address in the Address field This field is limited to 30 characters 5 Type the city in which the employee lives in the City field This field is limited to 20 characters 6 Select the state or province in which the employee lives from the State Province drop down list The states and provinces that appear in this drop down list are defined in the Code Table Maintenance window 7 Type the employee s zip postal code in the Zip Postal Code field 8 Type the employee s phone number minus the hypens and brackets in the Phone Number field 9 Type the employee s Social Security or Social Insurance number in the SSN SIN field 10 To set the percentage discount amount that the employee receives during an employee sale type the percentage in the Employee Discount field Leave this field empty if the default discount is to be
20. Completing a receiving transaction ss ssssssssssessssessrsresssresessreesssreesss 223 Printing a Receiving repOrt eepeeecnne nnii n i 223 Voiding a receiving transaction s sssessssssesssreesssesssssrsessriesssseesssressssee 224 Transfering VENTOLA A EA EER 224 Transferring inventory using PLUS s ssssssssssssssssssssreessrresssresssseressee 225 Store Transfer by PLU window s ssssssesesersseesreeseessrtesreesreesserereesneess 226 Transferring inventory in and out by the Case veces 229 Store Transfer by Case Window s sse sssesseessseessiessessstessresseesseenresseres 230 Completing a transfer sisin a A ATE EE 232 Printing a transter PEpOrt r E EARE 232 Molding a transfer ya ticcirev save cieiindisiee catinasabavatacsaddrs 233 Viewing inventory information wees 234 About the Inventory Information Window occ 234 Inventory History information Window uc ccc 236 Table of Contents Uploading inventory information to the corporate office wets 237 Performing a physical inventory count wees Printing a count Sheet cscs Maintaining inventory shelf location codes ues Adjusting on hand inventory Quantities sssssssssssssssessssseessrsesssresssreesssseesrseee Adjusting the on hand quantities after a count Creating an inventory count PLU list woo seeeeseeeeesseneeseens 244 Entering new on hand quantities ssss sssssesssssesssstesssstesssseessneesssseesss 244 Physical Inventory Maintenance window ucts 245 Adjusting the on
21. For information about closing a POS terminal see Opening or closing all POS terminals on page 45 To clean up the system 1 Perform the End of Day function Manager Code 250 on a POS terminal Refer to the POS XPress User Manual for more information about using manager codes to perform functions on a POS terminal and for more information about Manager Code 250 2 Perform the New Store Reset function Manager Code 418 on every POS terminal Refer to the POS Xpress User Manual for more information about using manager codes to perform functions on a POS terminal and for more information about Manager Code 418 53 Managing the POS Terminals 3 Click Clean Up on the Administration Menu window of the Store Manager A warning dialog box appears notifying you that totals are deleted with this function and that the New Store Reset function must be performed I Clean Up Transaction History OF x E Server Message 4 Click OK 5 Click Go A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the clean up 6 Click OK 54 Rebuilding local files Rebuilding local files A file containing the exact content of each of the following tables is created by selecting them in the Local File Rebuild maintenance window PLU PLU Cross Reference Qty Level Pricing Link Items Promotions Departments Regularly scheduled rebuilds are configured in the Configurator consult the Configurator User Guide for mor
22. Gene tating Teports pora ARR RRE wate E E hehe 297 PHANG ATEPOLE airi ria r E A EE REEERE R E 297 Exporune a TepOrt sirena nenn e RE R auc 298 E mailing A tepOrt mirn i E EAE E A 298 Using the report template designer sses sssssessssessssseessssesssstssnssesnsreeesssrenssseesssee 300 Designing a new report template wees 300 Template design Options nein rE 301 Template Designer fields sic scniiscicscsssatacdesaciivanicanseniies 302 PrEVIE WING ALEPOTE die At Loi E aE scabies AE EEES 303 Using standard reportaron a a E ARA 303 ltem Movement 02 085 tehib e aaa eaa e T e iai 303 Item Movement Report Criteria Window ssssssssssssssrsssssresssrsesssreesss 304 Item Moveimenit Report icsscccssccsccsaccsccssssvecusnsedesassotintcsontectetateateorss 305 AMES erases ee E E grees E E T 306 Sales Report Criteria Window ss sssesssssssssssseessrsesssrtessnresnsrreesnreesnerenns 306 Sales Report irra ER AAA EO ANAA RN 307 PANTEI AS EE EE E E ETET 308 Sales Pax Report Aran anA E EE R 308 Sales Tax Report Criteria Window sssssssssssssssssssssessssrsesssreessneessnseesss 308 Sales Pax Report nans E A N EA E R O NEA e 310 Non merchandise Summary ssssesssssessssesiessesesesseisssessaseseressessreesseseaessnseseess 310 Non merchandise Report Criteria Window oo 311 Non merchandise Summary Report ss sssssssssssssssesssssesssrrsssrrssssrreessee 311 Non merchandise Detail Report occ 311 Non merchandise Detail Report wcities 312
23. If the Open Terminal function cannot be completed for any reason the following Terminal Admin Exception Handler window appears providing a reason for the failure 43 Managing the POS Terminals ja Terminal dmin Exception Handler Terminal ID fi CASHIER SIGNED ON C Retry Signoff M ake sure cashier signoff at register Bypass C Abort Exit To solve the problem click a radio button in the Action box or you can click Exit to close the window and abort the Open Terminal function 5 Click Exit when the Open Terminal process is complete To close a POS terminal 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Store Administration 9 Terminal Administration OF x Terminal ID B 7 OT CASHIER 5555 Store Status Store is opened Terminal Administration f Monitor Terminal s Open Terminal s Open All Terminals Close Terminals Close All Terminals PS Server Message Exit Go 3 Click the checkbox beside each POS terminal you want to close Monitoring and controlling the POS terminals 4 Click Close Terminal s The Close Terminal function begins You can monitor the process in the XPS Server Message Box When the function is complete the POS status is closed Note If the Close Terminal function cannot be completed for any reason the following Terminal Admin Exception Handler window appears providing a r
24. McCallum Larry Store 1 e To show or hide the criteria used to generate this report click the Show Hide Criteria toggle button The following is an example Current Inventory Compact Report In this example there are 10 items in stock but only 8 are available for sale because the Not For Sale Bucket contains 2 items possibly because they have been put aside for charity or the items may be damaged 339 Reporting ia Current Inventory Report Current Inventory Compact Report SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 10 000 8 000 0 000 2 000 Total Quantity 10 000 8 000 0 000 2 000 1111 McCallum Larry Gross Profit The Gross Profit Report provides information about the number of items sold quantity on hand retail price cost and profit Gross Profit Report Selection Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Gross Profit Report 340 Using inventory reports g Basic Sheet Of x Query Criteria Period 12 01 2001 PLU Category PPAREL Group LADIES APPAREL Department BLOUSES User Flag 1 JREGULAR User Flag 2 BLACK User Flag 3 User Flag 4 User Flag 5 User Flag 6 Vendor Group By iV Category 3 Department 2 Group 4 v vendor Reset Generate Report Exit To complete the Gross Profit criteria window 1 To select a range of dates for the report period click the Perio
25. No action is required 4 To define the description of the promotion type an alphanumeric description up to 40 characters in length in the Desc field 5 To set the date on which the promotion becomes effective click the button beside the Effective Date Time field to open a pop up calendar Select a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field 6 To define the last date on which the promotion is effective click the button beside the Expiry Date Time field to open a pop up calendar Select a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field 7 Inthe Promo Detail field type an 8 digit number that identifies the promotion detail record 186 Setting up promotional pricing 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 To set the date on which the promotion is to end click the button beside the Expiry Date field to open a pop up calendar Select a date and click OK Alternatively type a date in to the field For promotional prices that are defined for individual PLUs click the By PLU radio button If you click this radio button use the PLU field to identify the PLUs You can click By Merch Type if you want to define a promotional price for a broader range of PLUs such as all PLUs in a department or all PLUs supplied by a specific vendor To define the PLU for which you ate setting a promotional price type a PLU number in the PLU field You can only use this fie
26. Once you define a queue of shelf labels you can print it immediately or save it and print it later For information about printing the shelf labels see Printing a shelf label queue on page 266 In the following steps you must enter information into the Print Queue Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Print Queue Maintenance window on page 267 To create a queue of shelf labels 1 On the Main Menu window click Labels Maintenance Printing shelf labels 2 Click Shelf Labels jes Print Queue Selection Window efel Eg Queue ID i3 J 0 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 3 Click New 4 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click New to add blank entry lines 5 Click Save Tip You can also add items to a queue by clicking Shelf Label on the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window Modifying a shelf label queue You can modify the information for shelf labels in a queue You can add or remove PLUs change the quantities of labels to print and change the formats used to print the labels In the following steps you must enter information into the Print Queue Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Print Queue Maintenance window on page 267 To modify a queue of shelf labels 1 On the Main Menu window click Labels Maintenance The Labels Menu window appears Click Shelf Labels Click D
27. Order Type order type 1 Over Min Order Yes Phone Min Order Amt Fax Note Item PLU XREF Description Required Package Extended Cost Quantity Qty Units Retail 25 000 25 000 SILK TIE 1 000 10 000 10 000 B D OXFORD WHITE 16 34 1 000 2 2222 03 15 02 11 38 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 Click Print A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the printing Click OK The Store Manager prints the report on the printer defined as the default printer and the report remains displayed on your screen in the report window Voiding a purchase order You can void a purchase order if it has a status of issued A voided purchase order remains visible in the Purchase Order Selection window and you can open it to see the information in it but you cannot modify it You can duplicate a voided purchase order For information about duplicating a purchase order see Duplicating a purchase order on page 206 To void a purchase order l 2 3 4 r On the Main Menu window click Inventory Click Purchase Orders Click Display All The existing purchase orders are displayed in the selection window Click the purchase order you want to void and then click Open A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU Click a radio button in the dialog box The dialog box closes Click Void A dialog box appears pro
28. Printing a report below e Exporting a report on page 298 e E mailing a report on page 298 Printing a report You can print a report from the report window after you have compiled it The printed report has the same layout and appearance as the report displayed on your screen in the report window Automatically the report is printed on the printer that has been assigned as the default To print a report 1 In the report window click Print A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the printing 2 Click OK The Store Manager prints the report and the report remains displayed in the report window Tip You can change the appearance of some reports using the report template designer For information about using the designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 If you need to you can change the printer setup so you can use another printer to print reports The option to change the printer is accessible from different places on the report windows e A Printer button on the report window e A Setup button on the dialog box that appears to confirm the printing 297 Reporting Exporting a report If the report is linked to the template designer you can export its data to a file so it can be used by another application For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 The following are the types of files to which you can expor
29. Qty Desc To define the prompt sequence that is automatically initiated when the item is entered into a transaction type an ID number in the Prompt Id field Your head office uses the Configurator to define profile prompts Obtain the prompt s ID number from your head office To define the discount that is automatically applied to the item when it is entered into a transaction type a discount ID number in the Auto Disc ID field Your head office uses the Configurator to define discounts Obtain the discount s ID number from your head office To specify the number of items that are packed together per shipment type a number in the Ordering Pkg Qty field This field is used to round up the quantity required when preparing a purchase order To define the tare weight that is used when this item is entered in the transaction type an ID number in the Tare Weight field Tare weight is the weight of a container or any packaging that must be deducted from the total weight of the item To require the item to be weighed you must click Scale Item in this window The unit of measurement used to interpret the tare weight is determined by your scale For example if your scale is set up to use grams the tare weight is measuted in grams For information about defining tare weights see Setting up tare weights on page 88 To define the mix match pricing schemes for which this item is eligible type a mix match ID number in each Mix Match 1 4 fiel
30. Tender vot ile ee ira ee Si eee eRe ee ee 312 Tender Report Criteria Window sssssssssssessssessssssessreessnrtessrressssreessne 312 Tender Report inanon a E A NNE 313 Tender Detal Report p rea R I RE 314 Payroll Clock In Out Summary Report ssssssssssssssssssssssssssrrtrrrriererssssssseses 314 Payroll Clock In Out Report Criteria window s s s 315 Payroll Clock In Out Summary report ssssssssssssrsesriireessssssssssrrereee 316 Payroll Clock In Out Detail ieunes iira a A ASAR 316 Payroll Clock In Out Detail report sssssssssssssssrererreresessssssssssrrreerree 316 Departmento idisse a arai ai 317 Department Report Criteria WINdOW ssssssssssssssseesssressssreessreessssreess 317 Department Report ssri iririrnr iioii a arn ERE ER aes Eaa 318 Department Report Detail ssssssssssssssssesssssessrsesssseesssrtesssreesnnerssnseesss 318 Group Tepott aniatra hinia E O n 320 Table of Contents Category report ao n ee N A EE 321 L ss Prevention SUMMALY hesineccrsiuevsessuevdeasverdesratidescasaivsentd lacs coatvesousedtaense 321 Loss Prevention Report Criteria WIndOW uence 321 Loss Prevention Summary report sssssssssssssssesssssssssseessrresssntessneressree 324 Loss Prevention Detail orani in i n nAn AE A EERE 324 Loss Prevention Detail report sss sssssessssssssssesssreesssreessrstsssneesssreesssee 325 SAES PESON hie AARE ANAE R EE A AAEE 325 Salesperson Report Criteria Window wicca 325 Salespetson report Arean n N A
31. Terminal Admin Exception Handler 43 45 46 48 50 51 Terminal Administration 42 43 44 46 47 Transaction List setting parameters 137 Transfer Report 233 Translate Text 28 Translation 26 User Flags Maintenance 78 79 Vendor Maintenance 85 87 setting parameters 87 Vendor Selection 85 86 Vendor SKU Maintenance 195 setting parameters 195 Worksheets Security Setup 29 X Reference 170 Inventory Control parameters 171 XREF parameters 170 X Reference Selection 170 172 windows See also window access 29 authority levels 29 fields 20 maintenance 14 relationship to tables 14 selection 14 withdrawals verification 127 Worksheets Security Setup window 29 X XREF parameters X Reference window 170 X Reference Selection window 170 172 X Reference window 170 Inventory Control parameters 171 XREF parameters 170 386
32. The next time you generate and print the report the Store Manager uses the default paper orientation Tip You can print the report directly from the Report Preview window by clicking Print Using standard reports You can compile several different types of reports from the Store Manager that provide information about store merchandise and non merchandise sales payroll and cashier balancing Once you have compiled a report and it is displayed in the report window you can print it For information about printing reports see Printing a report on page 297 You can change the appearance of some reports using the report template designer For information about the designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 Item Movement The Item Movement Report allows you to analyze item movement and sales trends because it provides details about item movement in and out of the store You can generate the report using criteria to define the item and a range of dates 303 Reporting 304 Item Movement Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Item Movement report jg ltem Movement Report Criteria APPAREL ADIES APPAREL festegoy O OOOO apeme OOOO O To complete the fields in the Item Movement Report Criteria window 1 To select a range of dates for the report period click Business Date Range and ty
33. appropriate journal files For information about the fields in the Electronic Journal Setup window see Complete the fields in the Electronic Journal Setup window as required on page 284 In addition you must update the Electronic Journal Viewer each time a new journal file is added to the search window For information about updating the viewer see Updating the Electronic Journal Viewer on page 285 To select and open a journal file 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Electronic Journal The search window contains entries for each of the journal files in the folder you defined in the Current Day Dir field in the Electronic Journal Setup window alo Drive Space Used 0 Drive Space Left 2343907328 Register 1 record found Setup Process Open Display an Query Sort Close 3 Click the journal you want to open and then click Open The Journal Search window closes and the journal file s first transaction is displayed in the Electronic Journal Viewer Tip The Line n of nnn message in the top right corner of the Electronic Journal Viewer s window tells you the approximate location of the visible transaction in the journal file For example Line 1 of 599 indicates that the transaction is at the beginning of the journal file Searching for transactions in a journal Once you have opened a journal file you can view and print the transactions in it You can scroll
34. click the Period fields and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK Note that the default date range in the Period fields is based on the previous inventory control period 2 To define a range of vendors that supply the items you want to include in the report click the Vendor drop down lists and select a vendor from each list 3 To define a range of departments that contain the items you want to include in the report click the Department drop down lists and select a department from each list 4 To clear the information from the criteria window click Reset 5 To generate the Performance Detail Report based on the criteria in the window click Generate Detail Report For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 6 To generate the Performance Summary Report based on the criteria in the window click Generate Summary Repott To find a PLU click in the PLU To field and press F12 The PLU Search window appears Using inventory reports Performance Summary report The following is a sample Performance Summary Report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Performance Summary Report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template ig Performance Summary Report o
35. completed deleted and voided withdrawals deposits are splayed in the window lick the one you want to void and then click Open lick Void The status changes to voided C lick Exit Safe transfers and balances Viewing details of a safe withdrawal bank deposit You can review the information you entered into a safe withdrawal bank deposit transaction regardless of its current status Voided withdrawals deposits remain visible To view the details of a withdrawal deposit 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate safe 3 Click Safe Withdrawal 4 Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided deposits are displayed in the window 5 Click the one you want to review and then click Open The Maintenance window appears containing the withdrawal deposit information Safe transfers and balances Cash management transactions such as safe deposits and withdrawals to and from one safe can be performed while at the same time performing other types of cash management transactions on another safe Note You must have an authority level of 5 to perform any operations on multiple safes Depending on the safe configuration cash management security setup and your authority level you can access the Safe Management menu directly from the Main menu or if you are authorized to interact with multiple safes you must first select the safe from the Safe menu Transf
36. files in the polling directory so that it can process them in the Process Timer field You define the polling directory in the Polling Directory field in this window If you do not want the system to automatically look for journal files type a zero 0 in this field Note The Min space req field is not activated in the Store Manager Reading the journal files 10 Click Save and then click Close Selecting a journal You must update the Electronic Journal Viewer and open a journal file before you can view the transactions in it Updating the Electronic Journal Viewer Updating the viewer makes new journal files visible in the Journal Search window so you can select them One journal file for each occurrence of the Open Terminal function is located in the folder you specified in the Current Day Dir field in the Electronic Journal Setup window You must update the viewer every time a new journal is added to the Journal Search window The update process requires you to run an external application ejp exe from Microsoft Windows Explorer You cannot run the program from within the Store Manager unless you set it up as a third party application Tip Your head office should automate the ejp exe to run automatically every night thereby rendering this procedure obsolete For information about setting up and running third party applications see Adding third party application buttons to windows on page 34 You do no
37. on page 255 Creating a price sticker queue Once you define a queue of price stickers you can print it immediately or save it and print it later For information about printing the price stickers see Printing a price sticker queue on page 263 In the following steps you must enter information into the Print Queue Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Print Queue Maintenance window on page 267 To create a queue of price stickers 1 On the Main Menu window click Labels Maintenance 2 Click Price Stickers The Print Queue Selection window appears e Print Queue Selection Window OF x 0 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 3 Click New The Print Queue Maintenance window appears 4 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click New to add blank entry lines 5 Click Save 261 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Tip You can also add items to a queue by clicking Price Label on the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window Modifying a price sticker queue You can modify the information for price stickers in a queue You can add or remove PLUs change the quantities of stickers to print and change the formats used to print the stickers In the following steps you must enter information into the Print Queue Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Print Queue Maintenance window on page 267 T
38. 1 a customer cannot pay for it with food stamps You can use the Itemizer Taxes 1 4 checkboxes on this window to assign taxes to the item based on the itemizer applied to it Your head office uses the Configurator to assign itemizers to tenders To define the taxes that are applied to the item f when you use itemizers to restrict the tenders that a customer can use to purchase the item click the Itemizer Taxes 1 4 checkboxes to assign taxes to the itemizers applied to the item For example assume PLU 456953545 is assigned itemizers 1 and 3 and itemizer 1 is assigned taxes 1 and 2 and itemizer 3 is assigned tax 2 The tender cash has itemizer 1 and food stamps has itemizer 3 If the customer pays for the item with cash tax 1 and 2 is applied If the customer pays for the item with food stamps only tax 2 is applied If you want to assign taxes to items in the department based on the tender the customer uses to pay for them you can use these fields If you want to apply the same taxes to the items regardless of the tender used to pay for them you can click Tax 1 4 in the PLU maintenance window For Maintaining PLUs information about defining taxes see Setting up taxes on page 80 For information about itemizers see the description for the Itemizer group of fields above The PLU Maintenance window Vendor SKU tab This tab contains the fields used for defining a PLU s vendor information The PLU PLU Desc Inventory Control an
39. 171 Current Inventory report 338 example 339 customer assigning extended field option 104 customer display 52 changing 52 select message 52 Customer Display Maintenance window 52 customer files 63 customer information database 99 maintaining 99 prompts for cashier 95 records 95 Customer Maintenance window 96 104 Demographic parameters 98 Loyalty Points parameters 99 customer receipt messages customizing 53 customer records 95 accessing 95 creating 95 96 database 99 deleting 97 extended fields 99 maintaining 96 modifying 96 Customer Selection window 96 97 customers setting up 95 customizing customer receipt messages 53 fields 95 POS terminals 41 Store Manager 21 39 D data calculation formulas Sales report 307 data calculations Average Houtly Sales Report 329 Balance report 331 Hourly Sales report 328 Non Merchandise Summary report 311 Sales Analysis report 308 Sales report 307 Tender report 314 database customer information 99 defining categories 63 65 customer files 63 departments 63 69 drop down lists 63 exception to a promotion 189 fields to be changed 161 367 groups 63 67 PLU cross reference 169 PLUs to be changed 160 product vendors 63 promotion exception 189 report macros 291 sticker and label parameters 259 printing 253 store managet s system parameters 22 tax rates 63 user flags 63 77 deleting batch item 167 categoty 67 custom design sticker or label 276 customer
40. 259 General parameters Department New window 71 Tax Maintenance window 80 General Parameters Setup window 22 Cash Safe Management parameters 24 General Information patameters 22 Server Communication parameters 23 Unique PLU Generation parameters 23 Generate Export Files window 159 generating export file 158 reports 297 Global PLU Change window 160 Change Criteria parameters 160 Change Fields parameters 161 Gross Profit report 340 370 altering appearance 343 example 343 parameters 341 Gross Profit Report Selection Criteria window 340 parameters 341 Group report 320 example 320 groups 63 adding 67 assigning departments to 70 defining 67 deleting 69 modifying 68 H header and trailer information on receipts 53 Hourly Sales Report Criteria window 327 patameters 327 Hourly Sales Summary and Average report 293 Hourly Sales Summary report 327 altering appearance 328 data calculation formulas 328 example 328 parameters 327 I Inactive PLU report 335 altering appearance 337 example 337 parameters 336 Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria window 336 parameters 336 information processing 353 inventory 211 223 234 See also inventory control adjustment 332 count PLU list 244 count sheets 240 printing 240 entering on hand quantities after a count 244 Inventory Adjustment report 332 inventory control functions performing 191 on hand inventory adjustments at any time 248 physical inventory maintenance 243 quantiti
41. 9 10 11 If you are adding a new customer to the order guide click New The Customer Maintenance window appears Otherwise if you need to make a change to an existing customer record you can simply open that record 8 Customer Maintenance Enter contact information for the customer as required The Type field specifies the user defined customer type Select the required type Customer types ate maintained in the Code Table Maintenance window for Licensee types The Status field specifies the customer status The options ate active or inactive Select the required status type Customer status types are maintained in the Code Table Maintenance window for Licensee status You can create a custom reference number for the customer by entering an identifying number in either Reference 1 or 2 Click the Loyalty Points tab Set the Price Level value to 1 Click Save and then click Exit Once you have set up a customer you can begin to create an order guide for them 207 Performing Inventory Control Functions To set up an order guide for a customer 1 In the Customer Menu click Order Guides The Order Guide Selection window appears g Order Guide Selection Window i O x Query Results Secrch Criteria Query For Order Guide Licensee Business Name Phone Number Guide ID DOCK STREET LANDING PREGA Poodle Dog New Delete
42. Allow Price Label This field determines if you can design your own price stickers and shelf labels using Design in Back Office the Store Manager If you enable this option you can design your own custom shelf labels For information about designing shelf labels see Designing a new sticker or label on page 274 Action Click V the checkbox to allow shelf labels to be designed Allow Price Sticker This field determines if you can print price stickers using the Store Manager Label Creation Action Click O the checkbox to allow price stickers to be printed 259 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers 260 Field Description Allow Shelf Label This field determines if you can print shelf labels using the Store Manager Creation Create Different Queue for Each Format ID Default format ID for price sticker Default format ID for shelf label UPC By Cross Ref Num Action Click o the checkbox to allow shelf labels to be printed This field determines if the stickers and labels using different formats are each placed in a different print queue Action Click O the checkbox to place stickers and labels with different format IDs into different print queues This field defines the default format for price stickers For information about defining format IDs see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 Action Click the drop down list and select a format from the list This field defines the d
43. By Department C By Group C By Category Ent Generate Report To complete the fields in the Department Report Criteria window 1 To select a date for the report period click Current Business Date or Previous Business Date to select the report period 2 To select a range of dates for the report period click the Period fields and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK Note that the default date range in the Period fields is based on the previous inventory control period 3 To define the report period as a week ending on the day you select click Week Ending and type the date of the end of the week or click the button beside the field and select a date from the pop up calendar The weeks are based on your fiscal week end not the calendar week end Your head office uses the Configurator to define your fiscal weekend 4 To select the department with the items you want included in the report click the By Department drop down list and select a department from this 317 Reporting 318 5 To select the category to which the items belong that you want included in the report click the By Category drop down list and select a category from the list 6 To select the group with items you want included in the report click the By Group drop down list and select a group from the list 7 To generate the report based on the above
44. Configuring sticker and label parameters Before you can begin printing price stickers and shelf labels from the Store Manager you must configure the sticker and label options Options include the default sticker and label format whether custom stickers and labels are allowed and the path for the print files and printing program Defining system parameters Before you can print price stickers and shelf labels you must define the printer to be used and the path to the print files and print programs In the following steps you must enter information into the Label Parameter Details Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Label Parameter Details Maintenance window on page 254 To define system parameters 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Labels Maintenance Click either Price Stickers or Shelf Labels Click Label Parameter Details Complete the fields in the Label Parameter Details Maintenance window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit 253 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Label Parameter Details Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for configuring the print options for stickers and labels Label Parameters Maintenance OF Xx Allow Price Label Design in Back Office v Allow Price Sticker Label Creation Vv Allow Shelf Label Creation v N Create Different Queue for Each Format ID Ej Default
45. Contact 1 field Type the phone number without hyphens or brackets of the store s first contact in the Phone Contact 1 field 87 File Maintenance Features 11 Type the fax number without hyphens or brackets of the store s first contact in the Fax Contact 1 field 12 To define the name of the store s second contact person in the vendor company type the contact name in the Contact 2 field 13 Type the phone number without hyphens or brackets of the store s second contact in the Phone Contact 2 field 14 Type the fax number without hyphens or brackets of the store s second contact in thefts Contact 2 field 15 To define the store s account number with the vendor type an alphanumeric string up to 20 characters long in the Account Number field 16 Type the vendor s electronic mail address in the Email Address field 17 To define the number of days that elapse between the time you place an order with the vendor and the time you receive the order type the number of days in the Order Lag Days field 18 To set the minimum amount the order must reach before the store places an order from the vendor type a currency amount including decimal place in the Min Order field 19 To record information about vendor discounts for which the store is eligible type a description up to 30 characters long in the Vendor Discount field 20 To record information about payment terms the store must fo
46. Definition window Field Description Label Number Description Width Height Sheet Columns This field defines the unique number that identifies the sticker or label type Action Type a number into the field This field defines the description of the sticker or label type Action Type an alphanumeric description up to 40 characters long into the field This field defines the width of the sticker or label in inches Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field defines the height of the sticker or label in inches Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field determines if the sticker or label paper is in sheets or if it is continuous feed paper Action Click o the checkbox to sheet feed the sticker or label paper This field defines how many columns of stickers or labels are on a sheet Use the Column Space field in this window to define how far apart columns are Action Type a number into the field 272 Designing and printing stickers and labels Field Description Column Space Top Down Rows Row Space Shape Top Margin Bottom Margin Left Margin Right Margin This field defines how far apart in inches the columns of stickers or labels are on a sheet Use the Columns field in this window to define how many columns are on a sheet Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the fie
47. Design Label Definition window on page 272 To modify a sticker or label type 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Label Parameters Click Designed Labels Layout Definition Click Display All All of the sticker and label types are displayed Click the sticker or label type you want to modify and then click Open Change the fields in the window as appropriate SAT DO aR ey a Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a sticker or label type You can delete a sticker or label type you define Designing and printing stickers and labels To delete a sticker or label type 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Label Maintenance 3 Click Designed Label Definitions ley Design Labels Selection Window New Delete 2 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click Display All 5 Click the sticker or label type you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 6 Click OK The sticker or label type is deleted 271 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Design Label Definition window This window contains the fields used for defining the size and page position of a custom price sticker ot shelf label The field descriptions follow i w Design Label Definition Sticky Label Round Rectangle a E rt Iv as The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Design Label
48. Inventory Control Functions This section provides information about the inventory control functions available in the Store Manager Inventory control includes ordering receiving transferring inventory preparing a sheet for inventory counts and adjusting inventory levels after the counts You can identify items using an item s PLU or the SKU number assigned by the vendor If you click Inventory Control in the PLU Maintenance window when you add or modify a PLU record the Store Manager tracks the on hand quantity of the item Tracking accounts for sales receiving transfers and any adjustments you make manually You can see current inventory information about the item in the Inventory Information window This section covers the following topics e Configuring the inventory parameters on page 191 e Linking a vendor s SKU to a PLU on page 194 e Ordering receiving and transferring inventory on page 196 e Viewing inventory information on page 234 e Performing a physical inventory count on page 240 e Adjusting on hand inventory quantities on page 243 e About controlled inventory transport permits on page 251 port p pag Configuring the inventory parameters You must define the Store Manager s inventory options before you perform other inventory control functions In the following steps you are required to enter information into the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window For inf
49. Line Items checkbox To automatically generate a receiving transaction when a purchase order is issued click the Generate Receiving Trans for Issued P O checkbox To restrict the number of decimal positions that are allowed when a Quantity Received value is entered type a number between 0 and 3 in the Received Quantity Decimals field The default setting is 3 decimal places To require a reason from the Reason drop down list in the Receiving window when there is a discrepancy between the expected and actual quantities of an item received click the Receive Reason Required checkbox If you click this checkbox you cannot complete the receiving transaction until you select a reason If entering a discrepancy number into the Discrepancy No field in the Receiving window is required whenever there is a discrepancy during receiving click the Receive Discrepancy Number Required checkbox If you click this checkbox you cannot complete the receiving transaction until you enter a discrepancy number To require a receiving type from the Receiving Type drop down list in the Receiving window click the Receiving Type Required checkbox If you click this checkbox you cannot complete the receiving transaction until you select a type To require a ship type selection from the Ship Type drop down list in the Receiving window click the Shipping Type Required checkbox If you click this checkbox you cannot complete the receiving transaction until you s
50. Main Menu window click Administration Click Employee Maintenance The Employee Selection window appears This selection window displays all the employees who have this store set as their home store ot who may be borrowed from other stores Note The Home Borrowed parameter can be set in the Employee Maintenance parameters section of the Administration settings in the Configurator application Additionally in order to display only employees affiliated with this store in the Employee Selection window you will need to set the Show Only Employees For This Store parameter to Yes in the Backoffice parameters section of the Code Maintenance settings in the Configurator g Employee Selection Window 15 xl Emp ID First Name Last Name Cashier Slsperson Type Larry Smith 44440 4 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit Maintaining employee files 3 4 5 Click New gEmployee 1111 40 Brodie Blvd Orario Mm 212 555 1212 123456789 hm ooo jt po On the Employee Maintenance window complete the fields in the window as required Click Save and then click Close Modifying an employee s record If an employee already has a record you can modify it whenever necessary To modify an employee record 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Administration Click Employee Maintenance Click Display All This displays al
51. Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the transaction You can modify the document number if you click Modify PO Doc Number in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Type a number into the field Inv Bucket This field shows the bucket in which the inventory item is assigned to No action required The Store Manager completes this field Reason This field defines the reason the inventory count is being performed You must complete this drop down list if you click Physical Inventory Reason Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window You can define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a reason from the list Department This field defines the department to which the items in the list belong This department field is not related to the Department table that you define as part of the product hierarchy Type an alphanumeric string up to 14 characters long into the field Location This field defines the location of the items in the store You can define the selection of locations that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a location from the list Inv Date This field defines the inventory count date The Store Manager automatically complete
52. Physical Inventory Maintenance window 63 File Maintenance Features Order Type Purchase Order Maintenance window Physical Inventory Locations Physical Inventory Maintenance window Physical Inventory Reasons Physical Inventory Maintenance window Receiving Type Receiving window Ship Type Receiving window Short Over Reasons Receiving window Transfer Reasons Store Transfer by PLU window Store Transfer by Case window WARNING Your head office can also define selections and send the files to your store As a result you can not only create new selections and modify or delete them you can also modify and delete the ones sent from your head office To add selections to a drop down list 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click ID Codes On the Code Table Maintenance window click the Code Table drop down list and select the list that you want to populate The existing selections for the drop down list you select are displayed in the lower part of the window Wy Code Table Maintenance Iof Xx Code Table Adjustment Reasons Search Code Description Adjustment Reason 1 djustment Reason 2 Save Delete Exit __Delete_ t Click New A blank line is added to the list of selections In the Code field type a number The number should follow sequentially the ID number of the selection above this one Type 1 if this is the first selection for t
53. Safe window 112 POS Pickup window 114 POS terminals close terminal function 43 44 45 47 48 closing 42 44 all terminals 45 47 single terminal 43 controlling 42 customer display 52 customer information gathering 95 customizing 41 journal files 283 See journal files managing 41 monitoring 42 new store reset function 53 open terminal function 43 opening 42 43 45 all terminals 45 new store 53 single terminal 43 select customer display message 52 terminal admin exception handler 43 45 46 48 transactions 283 POS Xpress 12 previewing reports 303 Price Batch New window 164 parameters 164 price batch management 162 batch applying 163 creating 163 editing 165 selecting 165 batch items adding 166 deleting 167 modifying 166 using functionality 162 Price Batch Management window 164 parameters 164 Price Batches Selection window 163 Price Look Ups See PLUs price sticker queue creating 261 deleting 262 modifying 262 price stickers 253 custom design 272 creating 274 modifying 275 printing 277 customizing 269 designing 269 375 formats 255 256 deleting 256 modifying 256 parameters configuring 253 defining 259 print queue 261 creating 261 deleting 262 modifying 262 printing 253 261 263 269 setting parameters 253 type adding 269 creating new 269 deleting 270 designing new 274 modifying 270 Price Tags Selection window 275 276 277 pricing promotion 185 defining exceptions 189 deleting 189 m
54. Store Manager automatically completes the Description field To define the price level scheme setup type a number in the Level field You can define multiple schemes for the same PLU as long as you enter different numbers in this field You cannot define a level pricing scheme for a PLU unless you have checked the Price Lev Flag checkbox in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window To use the level scheme you must enter this number in the Price Level field on the Employee Maintenance window or the Customer Maintenance window To define the quantity of the item that must be purchased to qualify for this quantity pricing scheme type a number in the Quantity field If you are defining a level pricing scheme type 0 into the field You cannot define a quantity pricing scheme for a PLU unless you have checked the Qty Pricing checkbox in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window To define the price for the items under this quantity or level pricing scheme type a currency amount including decimal places in the Price field To assign a description of the quantity or level pricing scheme type an alphanumeric description up to 40 characters long in the Description field To define the taxes that are only applied to the item when it is purchased under this level or quantity pricing scheme click the Tax 1 16 checkboxes for the taxes that you want to apply to the item When the item does not qualify for the quantity or level pricing s
55. Store Manager automatically completes this checkbox but you can change the entry Click the checkbox to change the entry in the checkbox When the checkbox is checked o the item is back ordered This field indicates the total quantity of the item received No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the number of the item that is shipped in each case For example if the number 4 is in this field the item is shipped in cases of 4 No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with either the number in the Pack Factor field in the Vendor s SKU Maintenance window If you don t enter a number into the Pack Factor field the Store Manager enters the number 1 into this field This field defines the retail price for the item You define the retail price in the Retail Price field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the retail price for the number of the item you receive The total price is based on the values in the Act Qty and the Retail Price fields in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the cost to the store of the item you are receiving The item s cost is defined in the Cost field in the Vendor s SKU Maintenance window or the PLU Maintenance window The total cost for
56. Summary and Detail Loss Prevention Date Type Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Business date Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Report Type By store By store All register All cashier By store By store By store All register All cashier By store By department By group By category By store All register All cashier Defining report macros Salesperson Business date By store Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Hourly Sales Summary and Business date By store Average Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Balancing Short Over Business date By Store Previous business date Inventory Adjustment Business date By Store Previous business date Weekly Monthly Period Note At the time of publication the Pending Transactions Report can not be assigned to a macro After you create a new report macro the Store Manager assigns it to a button on the Report Macro List Menu window To create a macro you must select the reports to be printed their criteria and the order
57. The PLU Search window appears 342 Using inventory reports Gross Profit Report The following is a sample Gross Profit Report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Gross Profit Report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template 1a Gross Profit Report iof x BLOUSES PLU Number PLU Description SILK TIE SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 413 19 01 15 2002 02 41 PM 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 e To show or hide the criteria used to generate this report click the Show Hide Criteria toggle button 343 Reporting Performance Summary 344 The Performance Summary Report provides information about item sales quantity on hand and costs The Performance Summary report and the Performance Detail report use the same criteria window Performance Report Selection Criteria window This window contains the fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Performance Summary Report and the Performance Detail report ia Performance Report Selection Criteria iol x Period 140201 12 31 2001 Vendor p Department SKIING z SKIING Exit Reset Generate Detail Report Generate Summary Report To complete the Performance Report Selection Criteria window 1 To select a range of dates for the report period
58. Transaction List window you cannot edit the information directly in the window it is for information only 136 To access the Transaction List window 1 2 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the safe that you want to list the transactions for Viewing detailed safe transactions 3 Click Transaction List The Transaction List window has five tabs each listing transactions of a different status ia H Safel Transaction List 30 100 00 1111 06 POS Loan POS Pickup 06 07 01 14 25 100 00 1111 06 07 20 0 3 5 POS Balance 06 08 01 11 32 100 00 1117 06 07 20 Out Safe Transfer 06 11 01 16 36 510 00 1111 06 07 20 Tip You can review and edit an individual transaction by clicking the transaction and then clicking Open The transaction appears in the appropriate tender maintenance window for example Safe Deposit Maintenance window You can use fields in the maintenance window to modify complete or void the transaction Performing a query on safe transactions You can perform a query in the Transaction List window to search for the transaction or transaction type you want to review To perform a query in the Transaction List window 1 2 3 Click Query The fields at the top of the transactions window are activated Type your search criteria into the fields at the top of the window Click Search The tender management transactions that match your criteria ar
59. Type a description of the tax in the Description field This description is printed on the customer s receipt 7 You can define the character that is printed beside each taxable item on the customer s receipt Type a single character in the Print Chr field 8 To determine the tax rate that is used to calculate the amount in a basic flat tax type a percentage up to 3 decimal places in the Tax Rate field 80 Setting up taxes 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 You can set the third decimal place threshold above which the tax amount is rounded up For example if the tax amount is calculated at 1 543 and the round digit is 3 the tax amount is rounded up to 1 55 If the round digit is 5 the tax amount is rounded down to 1 54 Click the Round Digit drop down list and select a digit from the list Select All if you want the tax amount to always round up To determine how the tax is applied relative to other taxes click the Tax Class drop down list and select a class from the list To set the minimum amount that a transaction subtotal must reach before the tax is applied type an amount including decimal places in the Min Tax field For example if a transaction subtotal is 10 99 and the minimum tax amount is 12 00 the tax is not charged If the tax is calculated based on the transaction subtotal plus the other tax amounts click the Tax On Tax checkbox If you have several taxes a
60. a range of dates for the report period click Business Date Range and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK You can also use the Previous Business Date and Current Business Date radio buttons to select the report period 2 To compile the report for all jurisdictions click All Jurisdictions 3 Ifthe report is for a specific jurisdiction click Jurisdiction ID and select an option from the drop down list 4 To generate the report to include all types of taxes click All Taxes 5 To compile the report to show a specific type of tax for example Federal Tax click Tax ID and select a tax type from the drop down list 6 To generate the Sales Tax Report click Generate Report 309 Reporting Sales Tax Report For layaway transactions a tax total is generated at the time of sale if the Revenue parameter in the Configurator is set to Recognized at Time of Sale When a pickup is performed on the layaway a tax total has already been created at the time of sale and therefore is not created again during pickup If the Revenue parameter in the Configurator is set to Recognized at Time of Pickup a tax total is not generated at the time of sale but is generated when a pickup is performed on the layaway g Sales Tax Summary Report ioj x Design On Design Made Off On File No Seve Vetipl ete peetemenmpiite Sales Tax Repor
61. a specific item e Double click the item line for example silk blouse or click on the item line and then click Item Transactions This generates a regular Pending Transaction Report listing the pending transactions that deal with a selected item To generate a Pending Transactions Details Report for an item 1 On the Pending Transactions by Item Report click the transaction and then click Item Transactions 2 Click Transaction Details on the Pending Transactions Report 350 Using inventory reports l Pending Transaction Details Report Of x Pending Transaction Details Report LAYAWAY PDT Number 5 Status Active SellDate 11 02 2001 Customer 126 GATES BILL Phone 416 988 9890 Bins 456 Total 95 38 Last Payment Date 11 02 2001 Total Payments 20 00 Last Payment 20 00 Balance Due 75 38 Service Charge 0 00 Payment Schedule 1 12 02 2001 28 00 Pickup 01 01 2002 47 38 Txn Type Rgr Txn TxnDate Time Cashier Txn Amount Payment Cancel Fee End Ba Sale 1 13 1102 01 04 10 PM 1111 148 37 20 00 04 SILK BLOUSE 0 12345000005 COTTON SLACKS SIZE 12 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 01 11 2002 03 04 PM_ 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 351 Reporting 352 Processing The Payroll This section provides information about payroll functions available in the Store Manager including the ability to review and edit employee s clock in out times confirm the times as accurate and
62. adding or removing reports from the sequence or by redefining report criteria In the following steps you must enter information into the Report Macro Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Report Macro Maintenance window on page 295 To modify a macro 1 mi 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Report Macro Definition O lick Display All The existing report macros are displayed in the window Click the macro you want to modify and then click Open The Report Macro Maintenance window appears displaying the macro s information Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a report macro 294 You can delete an entire macro The Store Manager removes the macro s button from the Report Macro List Menu window To delete a macro 1 2 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Report Macro Definition Defining report macros Click Display All The existing report macros are displayed in the window Report Macro Selection Window Description New Delete 1 rowfs found Display All Query Sort Exit Click the macro you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK Tip You can delete a single report from the report macto by clicking Delete in the Report Macro Maintenance w
63. alphanumeric string up to 40 characters in length in the Notes field The Tender field contains the tenders that you can include in the loan A tender is actually included in the loan if you enter a value in the corresponding Amount field on this window Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are available for loan This field contains a list of the tenders that are eligible No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the tenders that are eligible for loan To enter a loan amount for a tender click the tender and complete the fields on the right side of this window The Amount field indicates the amounts of the tenders included in the loan To enter a loan amount for a tender click the tender in the Tender field and complete the fields in the right side of this window No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the total of the amounts you enter in the fields on the right side of the window The Total Tenders field displays the totals of the amounts in the Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Lump Sum Denomination button allows you to switch between entering the lump sum amounts or denominations If you are entering the loan amount by denomination the tender denominations are listed in this field Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no den
64. also be accessed from the Cash Management Balance window This report will only appear if the system has been configured to be balanced by a cashier with blind balancing disabled To view a detailed tender report e For each tender type double click the tender to view a detailed report showing all transactions related to that tender Note The totals on the detail and summary report should match Payroll Clock In Out Summary Report The Payroll Clock In Out Summary Report contains information about store employees total hours worked To access the Clock In Out Report and create the Summary Report 1 On the Main Menu window click Payroll 2 Click Clock In Out Report 3 Complete the Report Criteria and click Generate Report Once you have generated the Payroll Clock In Out Summary report you can generate the Payroll Clock In Out Detail report The detail report includes the employee s clock in and clock out times total hours worked and the reason worked The Store Manager compiles the Payroll Clock In Out Detail report based on the same criteria you choose for the Payroll Clock In Out Summary report 314 Using standard reports Payroll Clock In Out Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Payroll Clock In Out Summary and Payroll Clock In Out Detail reports The following table contains descriptions of the fiel
65. cashier is balanced over or short Balance Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Balance report The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Balance Report Criteria window Field Description Detail This field determines if you want the report to include over short information about specific tenders Action Click the radio button Summary This field determines if you want the report to include total over short figure for all tenders combined Action Click the radio button Variance This field determines if you want the report to include total over short amounts Current Business Date Previous Business Date Period From To By Store All Registers for each day in the week Action Click the radio button This field determines if the report period is the current business date You can also click Previous Business Date and the Period From To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button This field determines if the report period is the previous business date You can also click Current Business Date and the Period From To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button This field defines a range of dates for the report period You can also click Current Business Date and Previous Business Date to select the report period Action Click the button beside
66. checkbox to print the detailed version of the report This field applies to the Sales Payroll Department Non Merchandise and Hourly Sales reports 295 Reporting 8 To set the number of copies of the report to print click the Copies field and type the desired number of printed copies 9 To add a blank row to the bottom of the window and add another report to the macro click New 10 To delete a report from the macro click the report you want to delete and then click Delete Compiling a report Compiling a report requires you to choose report criteria such as a date range or department number that the Store Manager uses to gather information and generate the report The compiled report is displayed on your screen and can be printed at any time You can also export some reports to be used by another application or e mail them to another person Choosing report criteria There are two general types of report criteria date type and report type The report criteria you choose determines the information that the report contains You choose report criteria using each report s search criteria window The criteria windows each provide you with choices that are appropriate for their reports For example below is the Item Movement Reports Criteria window g ltem Movement Report Criteria LADIES APPAREL BLOUSES P faeo P peremen OOO O opoe ooo The criteria for each report is discussed in more detail in Using sta
67. complete the store s status is opened 49 Managing the POS Terminals Note If the Open Store function cannot be completed for any reason a Terminal Admin Exception Handler window appears providing a reason for the failure JEt Terminal Admin Exception Handler Od x Terminal ID ee ee fi CASHIER SIGNED ON C Retry Signoff Make sure cashier signoff at register Bypass Abort Exit To solve the problem click a radio button in the Action box or click Exit to close the window and terminate the Open Store function 4 Click Exit when the Open Store process is complete Tip You can ptint a hard copy of the messages that appear in the XPS Server Message Box by clicking Print Log The log is printed on the default printer 50 Opening and closing the store Closing the store All POS terminals must be closed before you initiate the End of Day function to close the store If your store is open 24 hours POS terminals can be running but they must be closed for the current business date and re opened under the next business date To close the store 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Store Administration jen Store Administration OF Xx Terminal ID JficasHeRssss Store Status f tore is opened m Store Administration C Open Store f End OF Day XPS Server Message Exit L Pr On the St
68. criteria click Generate Report For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Department Report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Department Report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 LI ioii Design On Design Mode Off On File No Save Template pelete Tetniplate Preview Full View By Department Store 1 Terminal s Not Reporting 1 McCallum Larry Operator Period 01 09 2002 01 15 2002 Department Net Sales 284 94 284 94 68 96 68 96 128 25 128 25 413 19 413 19 01 16 2002 01 58 PM The following table contains the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns Column Formula of Total Units Number of units sold in department number of total units sold of Total Net Sales Net sales of items in department total net sales of Total Discounts Amount of discounts on items in department total amount of discounts of Total Returns Amount of total returns of items in department total amount of returns e To generate the Department Report Detail double click on a line item in the report Department Report Detail The following is a sample Department Report Detail For information about how the data in some of the columns is calculated see Department Report on page 318 Using stan
69. defining 160 defining fields 161 Inactive PLU report 335 inventory adjusting on hand quantities 243 control 191 count list 243 244 counts 243 244 on hand quantities 244 inventory information 234 linked item adding 176 deleting 178 modifying 178 linking 142 175 adding item 176 deleting item 178 items 175 modifying item 178 maintaining 142 making global changes 160 managing 139 139 190 manual purchase orders 196 mix match pricing 181 mix match pricing schemes 179 modifying 146 option types 153 options 153 price batch management 162 price stickers 151 printing 261 263 pricing promotion adding 185 defining exceptions 189 deleting 189 modifying 189 printing price stickers 261 modifying print queue 262 product hierarchies 65 142 promotional pricing 142 185 receiving inventory 211 receiving inventory by 211 reports Inactive PLU 335 retail price update audit function 168 seatch window 140 shelf labels 151 formats 256 store transfers 226 tare weights 88 third party applications 154 transfers 226 vendor information 149 vendor s SKU 194 viewing price changes 168 populating drop down lists 63 POS Balance Maintenance window 116 118 119 parameters 119 POS Balance Selection window 117 119 POS Loan New window 107 POS Loan Safe Maintenance window 109 parameters 107 POS Loan Selection window 109 POS Manager 11 POS Pickup Selection window 111 POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window parameters 114 POS Pickup to
70. ef sooo a sood af sooo S sooof a o od a sooo ef sooo 80 00 10 80 00 1 00 aa 0 00 aa 0 00 14 0 00 15 80 00 16 80 00 17 0 00 18 0 00 aof 0 00 20 0 00 en 0 00 2 0 00 23 0 00 eaj 0 00 esf 0 00 26 0 00 27 sooj 26 soooja sooo sof 0 00 af 0 00 32 0 00 sa 0 00 340 00 35 0 00 sef 0 0 0 00 38 0 00 39 0 00 40 0 00 41 0 00 42 0 00 New 43 0 00 44 0 00 45 0 00 46 30 00 47 9 0 00 48 0 00 a sooo sof 0 00 sif 0 00 saf 0 00 sme Delete Break Paint 0 00 i Exit Tax steps are the tax amounts charged for items or transactions priced lower than or equal to the amounts in the step fields For example if you enter the following into fields 1 3 1 225 2 30 3 35 the following taxes are applied 01 is charged on purchases between 01 and 25 02 is charged on purchases between 26 and 30 03 is charged on purchases between 31 and 35 83 File Maintenance Features 1 Type a currency amount including decimal places into each step box Steps 1 to 52 define tax amounts that correspond to the 52 tax steps You do not need to define amounts for all 52 steps 2 The Break Point field defines the amount where the tax step fields repeat Type a currency amount including decimal places in the Break Point field The pattern you define in the Steps 1 52 fields is used to calculate the taxes for higher a
71. enter the percentage rate into the field in this window To calculate the promotional price of the item by deducting a flat amount from the regular retail ptice click the Markdown radio button to calculate the promotional price by a flat amount discount If you click this radio button you must enter the flat discount amount into the field To define the promotional price as a new price click the New Price radio button If you click this radio button you must enter the new price into the field To define the discount amount or the new price of the item on promotion type a number or a currency amount including decimal places in the field If the item is an exception to a promotion do not type anything in this field The name of the field is when you click Percent Off and when you click Markdown To determine if the method of pricing is printed on the sales receipt click the Printing Method drop down list and select an option To indicate whether all or some defined promotions are available to a defined customer group in the Pricing Target Type drop down list select the required option e All This option indicates that the defined target group is entitled to receive all defined promotions and mixmatch pricing schemes e Defined promotion scheme Specifies the specific mixmatch or promotional pricing scheme the defined target group is entitled to receive Customers who do not belong to the defined target group do not
72. export files see Generating an export file on page 158 You can assign several options to one PLU To assign an option to a PLU 1 Open a PLU record so the PLU Maintenance window appears with the PLU s information displayed For information about opening a PLU record see Modifying a record in a table on page 17 157 Managing Price Look Ups 2 Click Extended Fields jag Extended PLU Fields PLU 8888 tem Color if applicable Click a field listed under Extended Field 4 Click the Value field beside the extended field and type the information in the field For example for color you could type Blue 5 Click Save and then click Exit Generating an export file 158 Export files contain extended field and PLU information that is required by a third party application in a format the application can use The exported extended field information contains the option you select and other characteristics of the field that your head office defined in the Configurator Each third party application requires a different export file type Your head office uses the Configurator to define export file types The export file s definition includes the file name path and layout It also defines the PLU fields and extended field information that is included Before the extended field and PLU information can be exported you must assign the appropriate export file type to the PLU You can assign export file ty
73. export the times to a file for further payroll processing This section covers the following topics e Configuring payroll parameters e Preparing clock in out information for export Configuring payroll parameters Before you review clock in out information and send it to your head office you must configure the Store Manager s payroll options The options you choose affect how time is displayed and if you must confirm the time entries as accurate before you export the file to your head office In the following steps you must enter information into the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Payroll Parameters Maintenance window on page 354 To configure payroll parameters 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Payroll Parameters 3 Complete the fields in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window as appropriate 4 Click Save and then click Exit 353 Processing The Payroll 354 Payroll Parameters Maintenance window This window contains the fields for configuring the payroll function in the Store Manager p Payroll Parameters Maintenance iof x Allow Export of Unconfirmed Clock Time Entires C Allow Confirm All for Clock Time Entries J Round Clock Time to Po g Display Total Worked Hours Style Display by Decimal Ix New Display Worked Hours as hs o Save Display Worked Minutes as hins o Delete Fiscal Week End js u
74. files The ditection of the search is determined by the Up and Down radio buttons Click the Up radio button to search from the current transaction to the first transaction Click the Down radio button to search from the current transaction to the last transaction You can refine the search further by including or excluding spaces in the text that is being searched To include spaces click the Include Spaces radio button The Electronic Journal Viewer searches for the text the exactly matches the spacing of the text you type in the Search for Text field To exclude spaces click the Exclude Spaces radio button To determine the transaction print method 1 To print the entire journal file that contains the transaction that is currently displayed in the viewer click the Whole Journal File radio button To print only the transaction that is currently displayed in the viewer click the Current Transaction radio button To print a transaction click Print on the File menu To define the search criteria l The electronic journal will search for transactions matching the date you specify To specify a date click the Date checkbox Click the adjacent drop down list and select an option from the list Click the field adjacent to the drop down list and choose a date from the calendar pop up window The electronic journal viewer searches for transactions that occurred at the time you specify Click the Time checkbox Click the ad
75. following steps you are required to enter information and make selections in the Electronic Journal Setup window For information about the fields in this window see Complete the fields in the Electronic Journal Setup window as required on page 284 283 Journals and Journal Files 284 To set up the electronic journal On the Main Menu window click Administration Click Electronic Journal g Journal Search Store Register Seq Date Time Size POS File Click Setup on the Journal Search window Complete the fields in the Electronic Journal Setup window as required a Electronic Journal Setup PROGRA ISALE SJ archive CAXPS sdata CAPROGRA1 SALESJ 1 polling SIGNATURE AVAILABLE OPEN TERMINAL BUSINESS DATE ES Type the name and path of the compressed archived journals files in the Journal Dir field Type the name and path of the current day s journal files in the Current Day Dir field To define the location of the previous day s journal files type the name and path of the polling directory in the Polling Dir field To define the text that replaces a signature in the transactions stored in the journal files type an alphanumeric string up to 60 characters long into the Sigstring field Signatures are captured using signature capture devices at the POS terminal Type the number of minutes that represents the frequency with which the system looks for journal
76. format ID for price sticker Default format ID for shelf label UPC By Cross Ref Num Ey Save KIKI ltk Delete UL Exit The table contains descriptions of the fields in the Label Parameter Details Maintenance window Field Description Printer Name Working directory Program Path Label Type This field defines the path and the name of the printer where the stickers or labels are printed You can use the Label Type drop down list to define whether you are configuring options for labels or stickers Action Type the printer s path and name up to 30 characters long into the field This field defines the path where the print program you define in the Program Path field in this window looks for the print file as it prepares to print the stickers or labels You can define whether you are configuring options for labels or stickers using the Label Type drop down list in this window Action Type the path for the print file up to 30 characters long into the field This field defines the path and executable name of the print program Note that the print application is not supplied by Triversity Inc You can define whether you are configuring options for labels or stickers using the Label Type drop down list in this window Action Type the path and name of the print program up to 30 characters long into the field This field defines the type of label price sticker or shelf label that
77. from the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window To confirm an employee s clock in out times 1 On the Main Menu window click Payroll 2 Click Clock In Out Adjustment ja Payroll Clock In Out Summary Ioi x Week Start of Week 02 15 99 End of Week 02 21 99 Confirm All Export Date of Export 00 00 00 Export Segt Not Exported Export Total Worked 5555 Gary Green jo hrs IN N pe Store s Total Worked Hours Jo hrs Click Start of Week or End of Week to locate the appropriate week s information 4 Click the employee whose time you want to confirm and then click Open The Payroll Clock In Out Detail window displays the employee s information 5 Click Confirm Time The clock in out time entries for the week are confirmed After you confirm the clock in out information you can export it to a file for your head office Preparing clock in out information for export Exporting clock in out files to head office When you export the clock in out information for a fiscal week you export it to a file for your head office You may have to confirm the clock in out information before you export it For information on how to confirm the information and on determining if you have to confirm it see Confirming clock in out times on page 360 To export the clock in out information 1 On the Main Menu window click Payroll 2 Click Clock In Out Adjustment a Payro
78. hand inventory quantities wc 248 Inventory Adjustment Window wicca 249 Controlling inventory packages sssssssssssssssesssressssrsesssrressnsessnsrssssrressssees 250 About controlled inventory transport permits oo eee 251 Chapter 9 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Configuring sticker and label parameters ccccsccsseessessesessessesessesssesseseeseees 253 Defining system parameters Label Parameter Details Maintenance window Creating label and sticker formats wc Modifying a label and sticker format Deleting a label and sticker format ssssssssssssssssssssssssssresssreesssreessnressnerssssee Standard Labels Format Maintenance Window cccccccseseseseeees PHMENG pice stekers nnno e E EAE Creating a price sticker Queue pirne aon aN EER N Modifying a price sticker gueue ssissoreinrisininiina ea Deleting a price sticker queue weiss eeesteseeseseeseeessesseseseeensseeseneeees Printing a price Sucker quete ananena EE Printing shelt la bes eiaa n E E E vote eter auc Nane Creating a shelf label queue Modifying a shelf label queue Deleting a shelf label queue Printing a shelf label queue oo Print Queue Maintenance window Designing and printing stickers and labels Creating new types of stickers and labels cies Adding a new type of sticker or label wesc ecseesesesseeeeseeseeseees 269 Modifying a sticker or label type ss sssssssssssssssssssssssssssresssresessreessssessss 2
79. in the Lump Sum Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Viewing the contents of the safe 16 17 18 19 Note If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount The Total Denominations field displays the total of the amounts that you enter in the Amount field when you enter amounts by denomination Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations are defined for the tender the denomination fields are not available Click the Denomination button in this window to enter amounts by denomination No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To change the status to complete click Complete To change the status to void click Void This button is only enabled if the status is complete Click Save and then click Exit Viewing the contents of the safe Tenders that are picked up deposited loaned and transferred affect the total amount of tenders in the store s safe The Store Manager updates the system amounts for the store s safe whenever you complete a tender management transaction You can review these figures and print a report from the Safe Contents
80. in them For information about editing the information in the files see Editing a batch on page 165 You can apply the batch of changes in a file using the Price Batches Selection window or the Price Batch Maintenance window This section describes how to apply a batch using the selection window If you try to apply batches out of order according to their effective date and time a warning dialog box appears For example if you try to apply batch 52003 effective March 15 1999 before batch 52002 effective March 1 1999 a warning dialog box appears WARNING The PLU changes contained in a batch take effect immediately after you apply the batch regardless of the date in the Effective Date field in the Price Batch Maintenance window To apply a batch 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click Price Batch Management 3 Click Display All The list of pending files is displayed ig Price Batches Selection Window iol x Batch ID Status Effective Date Last Changed Printed On 00010000001 03 28 01 10 27 03 28 01 10 27 o Pending 03 28 01 10 28 03 28 01 10 28 Cancel Apply Open New Display All Query Sort Exit 2 row s found 4 Click the batch you want to apply and then click Apply The batch of changes in the file are applied The batch s status changes to applied 5 Click Exit Creating a new batch You can create a new batch Before you can apply the batch that y
81. information for the Non merchandise Summary and Non merchandise Detail reports To complete the Non Merchandise Report Criteria window 1 Ifyou want the report period to be for today s date click the Current Business Date radio button 2 Ifyou want the report period to be for yesterday s date click the Previous Business Date radio button 3 To select a range of dates for the report period click Period and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK 4 To generate the Non Merchandise Report click Generate Report Non merchandise Summary Report The following is a sample Non merchandise Summary Report MTE Design On Design Made Off On File No Save Template Delete Template Preview Non Merchandise Repor m Summary Report Split View Store 4 Operator Business Date Range 05 01 2006 05 15 2006 Non Merch Type Quantity Sales Returns Voids Net Sales Net Fees 27 00 0 00 27 00 0 00 Send 2 YEAR PACKAGE 2 VOICE MAIL 3 37 00 0 00 37 00 0 00 CO BRAND 4 80 00 0 00 80 00 4 00 Print PROMO 2 35 00 0 00 35 00 0 00 Export CORPORATE 2 45 00 0 00 45 00 0 0 PERSONAL 2 40 00 0 00 40 00 0 00 LESLIE S CARD 3 60 00 0 00 60 00 0 00 Non branded Gift Car 2 30 00 0 00 30 00 0 00 06 1 5 2006 04 00 PM Exit Generate Detail Report The following is the formula used to calculate t
82. into a Pending Transaction Sale the status of the order will change to Completed At this point a completed order can no longer be altered nor a picking list printed but you will see an option to print a Pending Transaction Report This report contains final pricing for the transaction including taxes and mix match discounts The option to print an Order Guide will still be available 210 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory 7 Click Exit to exit the Order Entry Maintenance window Receiving inventory You can receive inventory into your store by recording the items and quantities in a receiving transaction You can also create and complete receiving transactions using PLUs The receiving transaction compares the actual quantity of items you receive to the quantity you ordered and indicates discrepancies Partial shipments of items can also be received from the same order at different times Converting purchase orders into receiving orders Once you issue a purchase order it becomes available to be used as a receiving transaction For information about issuing a purchase order see Issuing a purchase order on page 204 A purchase order is converted into a receiving transaction the first time you open it in the Receiving Selection window Before it has been converted it is only visible in the P O s to be Received tab After it is converted it is visible in the Receiving Transactions tab only To convert a purchase
83. is printed using the options you are defining Action Click the drop down list and select a label type from the list 254 Configuring sticker and label parameters Creating label and sticker formats When you design a format for a price sticker or shelf label you define the information that is included on it You cannot define where the information is printed on the sticker or label as part of the format You can define several formats and you can choose the format you want to use when you print stickers ot labels To add or modify a label or sticker format record you must enter information into the Format ID Maintenance window In the following steps you ate requited to enter information into the Format ID Maintenance window For more information about choosing formats when you print stickers or labels see Creating a price sticker queue on page 261 and Creating a shelf label queue on page 264 To create a format 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Label Parameters 3 Click Standard Labels Formats 9 Format ID Selection Window Format ID Description None Format 1 Delete 2 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click New 5 Complete the fields in the Standard Labels Format window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit 255 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Modifying a label and sticker format You can
84. label type see Creating new types of stickers and labels on page 269 To add or modify a record containing a custom sticker or label design you must enter information into the Designed Label Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Designed Label Maintenance window on page 278 Once you have created a design you can save the stickers or labels for printing later or you can print them immediately For information about printing the stickers or labels see The Designed Label Maintenance window on page 278 Creating a new design for a sticker or label You can create price stickers or shelf labels for items with custom layouts The stickers and labels you design ate printed on a standard printer Tip If you only want to change the range of PLU numbers that a sticker or label prints it is more efficient to modify an existing saved sticker or label design than to create a new one Once you have created a design you can save the stickers or labels for printing later or you can print them immediately For information about printing the stickers or labels see The Designed Label Maintenance window on page 278 In the following steps you must enter information into the Designed Label Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Designed Label Maintenance window on page 278 To design a sticker or label 1 On the Main Menu window click Par
85. list and select the pricing method that you want applied to the promotion Promotions can be setup such that the items original price is used to calculate the price instead of its Retail Price 187 Managing Price Look Ups 188 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 If the merchandise type has an exception to the promotion click the Exception checkbox to mark this item as having an exception to the promotional pricing For example ladies accessories merchandise type are on promotion except for 1 type of glove exception If you check this field you must also complete the Exception ID field in this window For information about defining exceptions to promotions see Defining an exception to a promotion on page 189 To define a unique number that identifies a promotion that you created containing items that are exceptions to the promotion type a promotion ID number in the Exception ID field Obtain the ID number of the exception promotion in the Promotions Selection window If you enter an ID in this field you must also click Exception For more information about defining exceptions to promotions see Defining an exception to a promotion on page 189 To calculate the promotional price of the item by discounting a percentage off the regular retail ptice click the Percent Off radio button to calculate the price by a percentage discount If you click this radio button you must
86. modify a format for a price sticker or shelf label To modify a format 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup The Parameters Menu window appears Click Label Parameters Click Display All The existing formats are displayed in the window 2 3 4 Click the format you want to modify and then click Open 5 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a label and sticker format 256 You should not delete a format if it is assigned to a PLU To delete a format 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Label Parameters 3 Click Standards Labels Format 4 Click Display All Wey Format ID Selection Window Format ID Open New Delete 2 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 5 Click the format you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the deletion 6 Click OK Configuring sticker and label parameters Standard Labels Format Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for defining what information is entered into the file that is used by the application to print the labels E3 Format ID Mi Es Format ID fi Label Type Price J PLU Number IV Date Code M Vendor ID Store Name Description Format 1 Price Shelf I PLU Description JV Price M Vendor SKU Vendor Name Dept Name JV Dept Number Save V Sto
87. nna n A NARR n 117 Modifying a balan ee vc caie ta natn niiicalcwdnsedindleathasdieaianics 118 Voiding a balance tities hn MB Lai a ise Aha a 118 Viewing a balance s detalls rriren a conver R 119 POS Balance Maintenance window oo 119 Depositing tenders into the safe sensissemreinori neirinne 121 Entering a new deposit into the safe wc 121 Completing a deposit into the safe ssssssssssssssresssressssreesssreessrsrsssrresssreess 122 Modifying a deposit into the safe wesc 122 Voiding a deposit into the safe voces 123 Viewing details of a deposit into the safe wesc 123 The Safe Deposit Maintenance Window oceans 124 Processing a safe withdrawal bank deposit wees 126 Entering a new safe withdrawal bank deposit wees 126 Modifying a safe withdrawal bank deposit wees 128 Voiding a safe withdrawal bank deposit ss ssssssssssssssssssssressssreessssesssseee 128 Viewing details of a safe withdrawal bank deposit ss sssssssssresssssessseees 129 Safe transfers and balances renane a a 129 Transferring tenders between safes s sssssssssssssssesssssessssesssrresssreeessseessrene 129 Table of Contents Chapter 7 Balancing the Safer rara aa Avena REE EN EE Entering a new safe balance Completing a safe balance ee Modifying a sate balance sae i ae ai discs cedasdd ARAE VEERE Voiding a sate balhe no n An EA E Viewing the details of a safe balance sss sssssssssssssssresssseessssessssresssreessssees 133 The Safe Ba
88. or more of Vendor User Flag 1 Department Dept Group or Category This field identifies the vendor in the mix match scheme If more than one classification is entered an item is considered for mix match pricing when all specified classifications are matched This field identifies the department in the mix match scheme This field further identifies the department by group in the mix match This field identifies the category to which the merchandise belongs in the mix match This field indicates the quantity of the item that must be purchased to qualify for the special price The price for the quantity of the item is defined in the Sell Price Off or Off fields in this window For example in a mix match pricing scheme that sells 3 candy bars for 1 00 you would see 1 in the Alt 1 buy quantity field price 34 1 in the Alt 2 buy quantity field price 33 1 in the Alt 3 buy quantity field price 33 Total 3 1 00 If the mix match pricing scheme requires the customer to purchase several different items quantities must be entered for each For example if you want to set up a mix match pricing scheme for selling 1 soda and 2 candy bars for 2 00 you would see 1 in the Alt 1 buy quantity field price 75 2 in the Alt 2 buy quantity field price 1 25 This field indicates how the price of the items purchased must compare to the price in the Match Price field in this window This field contains the regular ret
89. order into a receiving order 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Receiving 3 Click the appropriate tab 4 Click Display All The issued purchase orders are displayed in the window 5 Click the purchase order you want to convert into a receiving transaction and then click Open The Receiving Maintenance window appears containing the information you entered when you created the purchase ordet Once you open a purchase order as a receiving order you can immediately enter receiving information into the Receiving window or you can save it and close it For information about the fields in the Receiving window see Receiving window on page 213 Receiving inventory by PLU or vendor s SKU When you create a new receiving transaction it has a status of pending The items received are not added to your on hand inventory quantities until you complete the receiving transaction For information about completing a receiving transaction see Completing a receiving transaction on page 223 In the following steps you ate required to enter information into the Receiving window For information about the fields in the window see Receiving window on page 213 To create a receiving transaction 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 211 Performing Inventory Control Functions 2 Click Receiving g Receiving Documents Selection Window a 00010000013 Super Vendor 03 14 2002 lssue
90. promotion is active and click Ok or click the All Promotions radio button to display a list of all of the promotions 7 Click Query Adding a promotion You can add new promotions that are effective for the period you choose You can select the items on promotion by PLU or by merchandise types such as department vendor or user flag option To create a promotion 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 185 Managing Price Look Ups 2 Click Promotions and then click Promotion Maintenance a Promotions Selection Window 1Back to 11 11 11 00 00 PPANTSEROMO OYZISG TS IONSOTEST 3fTowel Promo 0 01 9915 20 12 31 9916 20 4FISHINGPROMO 0901 991754 10 31 9917 54_ 5 Prescription Group Promo 09 01 99 19 02 09 30 99 19 02 6 Phone Accessories Promo 09 01 99 09 29 10 01 99 09 29 7IHAT MARKDOWN 08 31 99 11 34 10 31 99 11 34 8 SHIRT MARKDOWN 08 31 99 11 54 10 31 99 11 54 9ITIE PROMO BLACK 09 07 99 17 02 10 07 99 17 02 Open 10TIE GREEN CLEARANCE 50 Of 09 07 99 17 06 10 07 99 17 06 11 TIMED SALE FOR 15 MINS 09 16 99 10 30 09 16 99 10 45 S ee 5 3 Click New The Promotion Maintenance window appears g Promotion New fe Def SS PoseaneT20raM E fosen sP E oaen AM E oaen sam E 0 00 Note The Store Manager automatically completes the Promo field with the next available unique number that identifies the promotion
91. purchase order date The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field Exp Delivery This field defines the expected delivery date The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a date calculated using the value you enter into the Order Lag Days field in the Vendor Maintenance window but you can edit it Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field Cancel Date This field defines the date after which the purchase order should be cancelled The Store Manager does not automatically cancel any inventory transactions the date in this field is for your information only Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Status This field indicates the current status of the purchase order Pending The order has not been issued and can be modified Issued The order is complete and cannot be modified Void The order has been issued and then voided No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Origin This field indicates whether the purchase order is based on an electronic document suggested order or manual order Action No action required The Store Manager automaticall
92. receive the defined promotional price To display the information for the next item in the promotion click Next To display the information for the previous item in the promotion click Previous To clear the screen so you can enter information for an item that you want to add to the promotion click Add To delete the item from the promotion click Remove To add PLUs to the promotion click Add Click Save and then click Exit Setting up promotional pricing Modifying a promotion You can modify a promotion If you modify a promotion while it is effective the change you make is immediately reflected in how the promotion is applied To modify a promotion 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management The PLU Management Menu window appears Click Promotion Click Display All The existing promotions are displayed in the window Click the promotion that you want to modify and then click Open The Promotion Maintenance window displays the promotion s information Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Tip To scroll through the items in the promotion click Previous and Next Deleting a promotion You should not delete a promotion during its effective period unless you want stop applying the promotional pricing To delete a promotion 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click Promotion Click Display All The existing pro
93. recipe ingredients and instructions option details When you choose the Recipes field the Caesar salad and Green beans options appeat in a drop down list After you assign an extended option to a PLU you can export the information to a file for use by the third party application using the file export function For information about the file export function see Generating an export file on page 158 Adding extended options You can create extended options and option details for the options that your head office created in the Configurator To create extended field options and option details 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Extended Field Options Wey Extended Field Options Maintenance OR x Option Types Options New Modify Delete if Description r E port Files 5000 Interest Groups Description 1 Beanie Babies P Plush Toys Candles O C APicture Frames G Greeting Cards Option Details O line s Save Details a ex 3 On the Extended Field Options Maintenance window click the Option Type to which you want to add the option 154 Maintaining PLU extended fields 4 SOO ESN IDs HN Click New The Extended Field Option window displays the fields for option ID and description Extended Field Option Option Type fi Export Files Option Id J Description OK Cancel Type an option ID number and a description in the fields
94. records in a table The records are displayed in the order in which they are created You can perform a query to quickly find the record you want Before you begin the steps below you must open a selection window To perform a query 1 Click Query The button s name changes to Search 2 Cli ck the column in the selection window that contains the information that you want to use as the base for the search The query drop down list appears 9 Department DRESSES Department ltemizer fi 01 Description fi 00 Group Desc Dept Number Group Number Add nl Amount Preset Amount Force Preset Menu No Prompt ID Auth Level Qty Desc Auto Disc ID Tare Weight J 0 00 J 0 00 Pr jo jo Lowest m m P Add nl Amt Desc Max Price Min Price Positive Dept PLU Required Allow Zero Price Allow Quantity Qty Required Allow Decimal Oty Cost Required Scale Item Gen Coupon Loyal ID 1 jo Loyal ID 2 jo x wo MENS Tarl V a J 0 00 Tax3 7 0 00 Tax4 7 IV Allow Returms Vv Print Reg Retai J P AllowRtnw oRept V Print SAP Bl Allow Sell Print Slip i V AllowExchange V Slip Buffered i P AlowLayaways V Slip Advance 0 T Allow Discount M SlipTotalLine 0 T AllowEmpl Dis ofValidations 0 r r Loyal ID 3 jo Loyal ID 4 jo Click the first column of the drop down list A list of operators appears 4 Select an operator from the lis
95. see Printing a Receiving report on page 223 Click the button This field is not available in the Receiving by Case window of the Store Manager This field completes the receiving by case transaction You cannot modify a receiving transaction after you complete it The transaction s status becomes complete For information about completing a receiving transaction see Completing a receiving transaction on page 223 Click the button This field voids the completed receiving transaction You cannot void a transaction until you have completed it For information about voiding a receiving transaction order see Voiding a receiving transaction on page 224 Click the button This field is not available in the Receiving by Case window of the Store Manager This field accepts the items you have added to the receiving by case transaction but does not complete the transaction You can open the receiving transaction again and add additional items to it For information about receiving a partial shipment see Receiving a partial order below Click the button Receiving a partial order You can receive a portion of your shipment with the rest to arrive later record the items you do receive in a receiving transaction and mark the transaction as a partial order The items you receive are added to your on hand inventory quantities You can open a receiving transaction with a status of partial and add items to i
96. soda a 6 pack of soda and a case of soda have different prices For information about defining special quantity pricing see Setting up a quantity ot level pricing scheme on page 172 If this item has multiple price levels defined for it click the Price Lev Flg checkbox For example a book has one price for regular customers and another price for book club members For information about defining level pricing schemes see Setting up a quantity or level pricing scheme on page 172 If this item must be weighed when the cashier enters it into a transaction click the Scale Item checkbox To ensure that the item uses the options defined for the department in which it belongs click the Use Dept checkbox Leave the checkbox empty if the item should use the options defined in this window for taxes itemizers discounts returns and scale item Note The Match Mfg and Gen Coupon checkboxes are not configurable in the Store Manager To define the number of the item sold in a package type a number in the Sell Qty field To set the maximum number of this item that can be sold in 1 transaction type a number in the Limited Qty field Leave the checkbox empty if there is no limit on the number that can be sold in 1 transaction To set the description of the unit of measurement that prints on a receipt when a cashier sells this item for example grams liters pounds type a description up to 15 characters in length in the
97. tax 82 uset flag option 78 vendor s information 85 monitoring POS terminals 42 N navigation system 14 menu buttons 14 performing a query selection window 19 relationship between tables and windows 14 tables adding records 15 deleting records 17 modifying records 17 using windows 14 third party software menu 14 windows completing fields 20 maintenance 14 selection 14 new balance cash drawer 116 completing pending 117 entering 116 safe 131 completing pending 131 entering 131 new store adding 92 preparing to open 53 records creating 92 new store reset function 53 non merchandise data calculations 311 Non Merchandise Detail report 310 311 compiling 311 example 312 parameters 311 Non Merchandise report 292 Non Merchandise Report Criteria window 311 Non Merchandise Summary report 310 data calculation formulas 311 example 311 parameters 311 non safe options 105 O on hand inventory adjusting quantities 243 after a count 243 at any time 248 adjustments reports 332 quantities adjusting 243 entering 244 entering after a count 244 inventory count lists 244 PLU list 244 open store function 49 opening new store preparations 53 POS terminals 43 45 store 49 store record 92 opening or closing all POS terminals 45 single POS terminal 43 store 49 order guide 206 ordering inventory 196 other stores creating records for 91 viewing records 92 P packaging weights See tare weights paramete
98. the Exp Qty field is not zero and does not match the quantity you actually receive then you must type a number into the Discrepancy No field in this window Type a number into the field This field defines the difference between the actual quantity of the item the store receives and the expected quantity If the number in this field is not 0 and if you click Receive Discrepancy Number Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window you must type a number into the Discrepancy No field in this window If you click Receive Reason Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window you must select a reason in the Reason drop down list in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 215 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description Reason B O Received T D Pkg Qty Retail Price Ext Retail Cost Ext Cost This field defines the reason the quantity of the item the store receives is different from the expected amount If you click Receive Reason Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window you must complete this field whenever the values in the Exp Qty and Act Qty fields do not match You can define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a reason from the list This field indicates whether the item is back ordered The
99. the Inventory Parameters Maintenance Window Type a number into the field This field contains the item s description No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the number of the item the receiving store expects to receive in the transfer If you are creating a transfer in you cannot edit the information in this field If you are creating a transfer out type the number of items the receiving store expects into the field This field defines the actual quantity of the item you receive Type a number into the field This field indicates the amount of discrepancy between the quantity of the item you expect to send or receive and the quantity of the item that is actually sent or received No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field determines the default number that the Store Manager enters into the Quantity Received field in this window You can change the value from the default entry made by the Store Manager This field is only available if you click Allow Receive All for Receiving and Transfers in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Click All to automatically enter the expected quantity into the Quantity Received field Click None to automatically enter 0 into the Quantity Received field This field generates a Transfer report and displays it in the report window on your screen For more information about the Transfer repo
100. the clock in out times for this employee are not accurate you can edit the entry in the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window For information about the fields in the window see Payroll Clock In Out Detail window on page 357 You can edit the employee s clock in date and time clock out date and time and the reason the employee worked Every employee must have clock in and clock out times for each day in the week If an employee clocks in but does not clock out the hours worked for that day is calculated to be 0 To edit a clock in out entry 1 Click the fields you want to edit and change the information they contain 2 Click Save Tip You can add a new clock in out entry for an employee by selecting an employee in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window and clicking New Once you have reviewed and edited the clock in out times you have to export the information to a file for your head office You may have to confirm the information before exporting it You can print the Payroll Clock In Out Summary and Detail reports from the Store Managet s Reports Menu window The clock in out entries you edit are marked on the printed report with an asterisk For information about printing these reports see Payroll Clock In Out Detail window on page 357 Payroll Clock In Out Detail window This window contains the fields for editing employee s clock in out times Tip The information in any of the fields you edit is d
101. the document number if you click Modify PO Doc Number in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Type a number into the field This field defines the vendor that supplies the items you are receiving You must complete this drop down list before you can add items to the receiving transaction Click the drop down list and select a vendor from the list This field defines the date the items are received into your store The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field This field defines the unique number that identifies the purchase order this receiving transaction is based on For information about converting an issued purchase order into a receiving transaction see Converting purchase orders into receiving orders on page 211 No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines how the items are shipped to your store You must complete this drop down list if you click Shipping Type Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window You can define the selection of ship types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For information about populating drop down lists se
102. the window 4 Click the mix match pricing scheme you want to review and then click Open The Mix Match Maintenance window displays the mix match s information 5 Click Exit The Mix Match Maintenance window This window displays information about the mix match pricing schemes S Mix Match 4 70 00 0000 Ul 180 Reviewing mix match pricing schemes The following table contains a description of the fields in the Mix Match Maintenance window Field Description MM ID This field contains the unique number that identifies the mix match pricing scheme You type this number in the Mix Match 1 4 fields in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window to link eligible PLUs to the pricing scheme For information about the Mix Match 1 4 field see the field description on page 148 MM Desc This field contains the description of the mix match and is used for searching for mix matches in the Store Manager Start Date This field contains the date the mix match pricing scheme becomes effective Stop Date This field contains the last date the mix match pricing scheme is effective Discount Desc Report Group Qty Apply Discount To Alt Complete MM Match PLU Recalc Promos and Discounts Unique PLU Match User Flag 1 Unique User Flag 1 This field contains the description that is printed on the receipt If there is no descriptio
103. through all the transactions in the file one at a time or enter search criteria and search for specific transactions Before you complete the following steps you must display a journal file in the Electronic Journal Viewer For information about the fields in the window see The Electronic Journal Viewer on page 288 287 Journals and Journal Files To search for transactions 1 Click and drag the scrolling bar in the middle of the Electronic Journal Viewer to the top of the window to display the first transaction in the journal The first transaction in the journal file is displayed 2 Use the Search fields on the right side of the viewer s window to define the criteria for the search 3 Click Search The viewer begins searching for transactions that meet the criteria When the search is complete the first matching transaction is displayed Note The viewer searches the journal file up to the beginning of the file or down to the end of the file from the transaction currently displayed in the viewer and stops If the viewer searches down from a transaction in the middle of the file to the end it will not automatically resume searching from the beginning of the file to the middle 4 Click the arrow buttons on the scroll bar to scroll from transaction to transaction Tip You can narrow down your seatch by selecting more than one search criteria The viewer searches for transactions that match all of the crite
104. to enable the corresponding option Changing the text in the Store Manager You can change the text of all the headers labels and messages in the Store Manager from the default english text into another language or into alternate english text Whenever you enter new text for an object the original text is saved so you can recall it later You can translate text by e Opening the Translation window e Pressing the Ctrl key and right clicking over a window item to open the Single text Translation window Both methods use categories and object groups to organize the original text and make it easier for you to find the text that you want to change Categories contain the types of items containing the text for example command buttons menu windows messages Object groups ate specific windows or buttons for example Administration Menu window You can choose to change a single text within an object group all the text in a category or all the text in the Store Manager For example if you want to change the text of the Display All button that appears on the selection windows you can find it in the Command Button category and the Display All object group If you want to change the text of the message Do you really want to CLOSE ALL terminals you can find it in the Messages category Messages object group Changing a text for a single object 24 You can change the text for a single object Changing the text in the Store Mana
105. transaction total The tax is applied to the entire transaction if the transaction amount is higher than the threshold amount To apply tax to items with prices exceeding the threshold amount that you define in the Tax Threshold Amount field click the Use On Item Amount checkbox To apply tax to the difference between the threshold amount and the item s price click the Use On Differential checkbox Click Save and then click Exit 81 File Maintenance Features Modifying a tax You can modify an existing tax To modify a tax 1 2 3 4 n Deleting a tax On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Taxes Click Display All The existing taxes are displayed in the window Click the tax you want to modify and then click Open The Tax Maintenance window displays the tax s information Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Unless you want to stop the tax from being charged you should only delete a tax if it is not assigned to any items or departments To delete a tax 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Taxes On the Tax Selection window click Display All The existing taxes are displayed in the window Click the tax you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click Yes The tax is deleted Tax Maintenance Print Options tab This window contains t
106. transaction types 32 update 30 viewing 30 windows 29 average hourly sales data calculations 329 Average Hourly Sales report 329 altering appearance 329 data calculation formulas 329 example 329 Average Hourly Sales Report Criteria window 327 329 parameters 327 B balance details 133 Balance report 330 altering appearance 331 data calculation formulas 331 example 331 parameters 330 Balance Report Criteria window 330 parameters 330 balances completing 117 entering 116 modifying 118 365 reports 116 safe details 133 modifying 132 voiding 132 viewing details 119 voiding 118 voiding for safe 132 balancing cash drawer 116 safe 131 Balancing Short Over report 293 bank deposit completing 128 entering 126 modifying 128 processing 126 viewing details 129 voiding 128 batch applying 163 creating 163 editing 165 selecting 165 batch item adding 166 deleting 167 modifying information 166 C calculating average hourly sales report data 329 balance report data 331 department report data 318 non merchandise data 311 sales analysis report data 308 sales data 307 Tender report data 314 cash drawer balancing 116 completing balancing 117 modifying pending balance 118 new balance 116 pending balance transaction 116 viewing balance details 119 voiding balance 118 cash management authority levels 31 updating 32 viewing level 32 query safe transactions 137 safe balance completing 131 modifying 132 view
107. until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount To change the pickup status to complete click Complete To change the pickup status to void click Void This button is only enabled if the pickup status is complete 115 Tender Management Note A pickup can be voided on the same business day only 19 Click Save and then click Exit Tip The Amount boxes on the left side of the window only display the amounts you enter for the pickup You cannot edit these fields directly To enter an amount click the tender row on the left side of the window and enter the amount in the fields on the right side of the window Balancing a cash drawer Balancing ensures the amount of tender in a cash drawer matches the tender that should be there based on the sales and other transactions at the POS terminal including completed loans and completed pickups Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are eligible to be balanced and if balance transactions are processed by the cashier or by the register The Store Manager calculates the system amount of a tender You enter the actual amount The Store Manager compares the two figures and determines if the cashier or register are balanced You can define a maximum amount that the system and actual amounts can differ by in the POS Balance Threshold field on the General Parameters Setup window You can print a Bala
108. used 61 Managing Personnel 62 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 To assign a number that identifies the employee as a salesperson type an identification number in the Sales Person Num field You can generate sales reports and calculate commissions using this identification number This field is limited to 13 characters If the employee is not a salesperson leave this field blank If the employee is a cashier type a number in the Cashier Number field This is the number that they will use to log on to a POS terminal This field is limited to 13 characters If the employee is not a cashier leave this field blank To set the rate of commission as a percentage that the employee receives type the percentage amount in the Commission field Leave this field blank if the employee does not receive commission Each PLU can have price levels defined To determine which price level the employee pays during employee sales type the number that corresponds to the assigned price level in the Price Level field If price levels are used a regular customer may pay one dollar for an item while the employee pays seventy cents You can define price levels for each PLU in the Quantity Level Pricing window To select the type of employment for example full time or part time click the Employee Type drop down list and select an option The selection of employee types is defined in the Code Table Mai
109. used for performing a safe balance transaction 2 Safe2 Safe Balance Txn 8 m 06 12 01 10 51 06 07 2001 SompiEte To complete the Safe Balance Maintenance window 1 The Txn Num field defines a unique number that identifies the safe balance transaction This number is a counter that reflects the number of tender management transactions for example pickups and balances that have been performed This is not the transaction number that is recorded on the TLog The number in the T Log Num field in this window is recorded as the transaction number in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number when you save the transaction The T Log Num field defines the unique number that identifies the safe balance transaction in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you complete the balance 133 Tender Management 134 10 11 12 13 14 15 The Txn Status field indicates the safe balance transaction s status pending completed or voided No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Operator field displays the employee number of the person that processes the safe balance transaction No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the employee number of the person who logged into the Store Manage
110. voiding a pickup see Voiding a pickup on page 113 To complete a pickup 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe with the pickup 3 Click POS Pickup The pending completed deleted and voided pickups are displayed in the window V POS Pickup to Safe POS SAFE 1 Cash Trans Num Cashier Num Trans Status Trans Date Method O Pending 2 17 73 Register New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the pickup you want to complete and then click Open The POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window displays the pickup information 5 Click Complete The pickup s status changes to completed 6 Click Exit Modifying a pickup 112 You can only modify a pending pickup Once you have entered the final information for a pickup you can complete it For information about completing a pickup see Completing a pickup on page 112 You cannot modify a completed pickup If you need to make a change to a completed pickup you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a pickup see Voiding a pickup on page 113 In the following steps you are required to enter information into the POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window on page 114 Performing a pickup To modify a pending pickup 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Cash M
111. window You cannot edit the information in the window it is for information only To access the Safe Contents window 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the safe that you want to view Click Safe Content jg 1 Safel Safe Content ioj x Tender ID Tender Description Report Total Amount 0 00 Exit 135 Tender Management To print the Safe Content report 1 2 3 Click Report Click Print Click OK The Store Manager prints the report The report remains displayed in the report window ig Safe Content Report ol x Design On Design Mode Off On File No Save empate Delete Template Safe Content Report Preview il Split View Store 1 Operator 1111 Date 06 12 2001 Tender Amount Send Total Safe Amount rint Export ike Page 1 of 1 e 06 12 01 11 30 Tip The report is linked to the report template designer so you can customize its appearance or export its data to a file for use by another application Viewing detailed safe transactions The Store Manager maintains a master record of the completed voided and pending tender maintenance transactions you enter into the Store Manager The list includes detailed information about every tender management transaction including the type of transaction the person who processed it the amount and the date You can review the master record in the
112. window see Purchase Order Maintenance window on page 199 To create a purchase order 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory The Inventory Menu window appears 2 Click Purchase Orders The Purchase Order Selection window appears ia Purchase Orders Selection Window Esprrit 1 Z 0 2 i 2 2002 Pe 00010000009 03 19 2002 Super Vendor 2 03 12 2002 2 00010000010 03 31 2002 Super Vendor 3 03 01 2002 Pe 3 Click New A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU 196 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Tip To skip this step and avoid displaying the dialog box below ensure that the Maintain Vendor SKU parameter is disabled in the Inventory Parameters section of Parameters Setup Select Display Type By PLU X Ref C By Vendor SkKU Cancel 4 Click either By PLU X Ref or By Vendor SKU 5 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Tip You can view inventory information about each item you add to the purchase order by clicking Details on the Purchase Order Maintenance window The item entry portion of the maintenance window is replaced with a detail window Modifying a purchase order You can only modify a purchase order before it is issued when it has a status of pending If you need to change a purchase order after you have issued it you must void i
113. you want them to print in You can define up to 10 macros and you can include the same report in several macros To add or modify a report macro record you must enter information into the Report Macro Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Report Macro Maintenance window on page 295 Creating a new report macro After you create a new report macro the Store Manager assigns it to a button on the Report Macro List Menu window To create a macro you must select the reports to be printed their criteria and the order you want them to print in You can define up to 10 macros and you can include the same report in several macros For a list of the reports and the criteria from which you can choose see Defining report macros on page 291 In the following steps you must enter information into the Report Macro Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Report Macro Maintenance window on page 295 To define a macro sequence 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Report Macro Definition 3 Click New 293 Reporting In the Description field type a description for the macro The description can be up to 40 characters long Click Add A blank line appears for you to enter information Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Modifying a report macro You can modify a report macro by
114. 0 02 03 11 02 1 LISA LISA LAYAWAY 2 Active 01 10 02 03 11 02 12341E JACKIE JAI LAYAWAY 1 Active 01 10 02 03 11 02 1234 DOE JOHN Transaction Count 4 Send Print Export 01 10 02 13 54 1111 McCallum Lary Store 1 4 Exit Transaction Details To sort the transactions by the number of delinquent days e Click the Overdue by days heading The transactions are displayed by their original sell date by default with the most recent transactions appearing first To generate a Pending Transactions Details Report e Double click a single transaction or click Transaction Details Using inventory reports The Pending Transaction Details Report The Pending Transaction Details Report displays the bins location service charge amount and information on payments such as the total payment amount payment schedule of up to 12 payments the last payment amount and the payment date The PLU number product description quantity unit price and extended price are displayed for all merchandise items For non merchandise items a description and extended price are displayed Also a cross reference number is shown if the sale was performed by a cross reference LAYAWAY Bins a z Total 74 18 Total Payments 5 00 Balance Due 69 18 Payment Schedule 1 02 09 2002 33 00 Sale 1 12345000004 01 10 02 13 58 Store 1 4 Status Active Phone 222 222 2222 Last Payment Date 01 10 2002 Last Payme
115. 1 Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the queue you want to print and then click Open 5 Click Print A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm printing 6 Click OK Print Queue Maintenance window This window contains the fields for creating price sticker and shelf label print queues and for printing the queues Wes Print Queue Iof x Queue ID fi Label Type Price Description Price Sticker 1 001C23 Delete Dette 5 Exit 267 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Print Queue Maintenance window Field Description Queue ID Label Type Description Default of Each PLU Current Format ID Item Quantity Current Format ID Print This field defines the unique number that identifies the sticker or label queue Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available numbet This field indicates whether you are defining a price sticker or a shelf label queue Action None required If you click Price Stickers in the Label Menu window the Store Manager enters Price into this field If you click Shelf Labels in the Label Menu window the Store Manager enters Shelf into this field This field defines the description of the queue Auction Type an alphanumeric description up to 40 char
116. 1 000 25 25 000 B D OXFORD WHITE 10 000f 1 000 10 10 000 __Repot_ _Inventory Ifermaton The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Purchase Order Maintenance window Field Description Txn Number P O Number Vendor Txn Date This field defines the unique number that identifies the inventory transaction The inventory transaction number sequence is used for purchase orders receiving transactions transfers and inventory count PLU lists No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a number after you save the purchase order This field defines the unique number that identifies the purchase order You can modify the purchase order number if you have clicked Modify PO Doc Number in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager completes this field This field defines the vendor that supplies the items you are ordering You must complete this drop down list before you can add items to the purchase order Click the drop down list and select a vendor from the list This field defines the date the inventory transaction is created The transaction date can differ from the order date No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the system date of the computer the Store Manager is running on 199 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description Order Date This field defines the
117. 103 156 extended fields 95 applying options to PLUs 157 applying to customers 103 customer adding option details 100 applying options 103 details 100 option details 100 option types 99 options 99 100 customer records 95 defining 153 export files creating updates 159 for third party applications 158 maintaining 99 maintaining PLUs 153 option details 100 153 154 156 adding 154 customer 100 option types 153 options 153 See also extended field options 154 adding 154 applying to PLUs 157 assigning to a customer 104 creating 100 deleting 102 156 modifying 101 155 369 modifying descriptions 101 extended options See extended field options and extended fields options Extended PLU Fields window 158 F fields 14 17 20 completing 20 customizing 95 definitions 20 extended 95 154 See also extended fields adding options 154 applying options to PLUs 157 applying to PLUs 157 creating 154 deleting options 156 modifying options 155 option details 153 156 option types 153 options 153 156 using 20 file maintenance 63 104 final clean up function for opening new store 53 finding PLU 141 records 17 float 106 See also loan foreign tender Tender Detail report 314 Format ID Maintenance window 255 patameters for price shelf labels 257 Format ID Selection window 255 256 Futute Prices parameters 153 G General Information parameters General Parameters Setup window 22 General Label Parameters Maintenance window
118. 12345000003 123450000038 3333 123450000045 12345000004 4444 12345000005 123450000052 12345000005 5555 12345000006 123450000069 io 12345000006 6666 70 row s found Display All Query Sor Exit Click New jg X Reference New 5 x XREF x Reference fi 2 12345000011 PLU fi 2345000011 DUNLOP TENNIS BALLS Capture PLU M New Package Quantity 12 000 Package Type Sea sme T Inventory Control To define a cross reference number that represents the PLU type a number into the X Reference field The number in this field is the number that can be used in place of the PLU To define the PLU to which the cross reference number represents type a PLU number in the PLU field The Store Manager automatically completes the description field To capture and print the PLU s information on the receipt click the Capture PLU checkbox to capture the PLU s information and print the PLU on the receipt Leave the checkbox unchecked to capture the cross reference number s information and print the cross reference number on the receipt To set the number of items that make up a package type the number in the Package Quantity field For more information on configuring inventory as packages see Controlling inventory packages on page 250 Defining a PLU cross reference 9 The type of package can be anything you want for example a case package or bundl
119. 291 Report Management Security Setup window 31 Report Preview window 303 report template designer 300 designing templates 300 report template design options 301 302 hiding columns 301 repositioning columns 301 repositioning fields 301 truncating columns 301 saving templates 300 template designer fields 302 using 300 reports 291 See also report assignable to macros 292 authority levels for viewing 31 compiling 296 criteria 296 Sales Analysis 308 criteria report date 296 report type 296 selection 296 data emailing 299 type criteria 296 defining mactos 291 emailing as attachment 298 299 with template designer 298 exporting 298 as email attachment 299 data 298 data to a file 298 file types 298 template designer 298 third party applications 298 generating 297 See report macros inventory See report inventory reports launching and printing macros 332 Macro List Menu 331 macros 331 See also report macros creating 293 defining 291 deleting 294 launch and print report 332 modifying 294 previewing 303 printing 291 297 report template designer 300 designing templates 300 report template design options 301 302 saving templates 300 template designer fields 302 report type criteria 296 standard 303 using 303 restricting access to selected POS Manager windows 29 retail price update audit function 168 Retail Price Update Audit window 168 field descriptions 168 reviewing a mix match pricing scheme 179 S safe balan
120. 3 Click the Receiving Transactions tab 4 Click New A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU Select Display Type 5 Click either By PLU X REF or By Vendor SKU in the dialog box 6 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 7 Click Save and then click Exit Tip You can view inventory information about each item you add to the receiving transaction by clicking Details on the Receiving window The item entry portion of the window is replaced with a detail window 212 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Receiving window This window contains the fields used for creating receiving transactions lolx Txn Number ee eE Status Pending Txn Date 05 26 2005 Document Num 0000001 Vendor i i Receive Date o5 26 2005 P O Number OoOo O i Ship Type Do o o Receiving Type DO o y O Discrepancy Num o Number of Cases 0 Total Inv Cost p Note DO O Hash Qty 0 Reference Num Delivery Date foo co 0000 E Origin Manua PLU XREF Description Expected Actual Qty Short Over Reason B O Received D Complete a a a ie o O Totals 0 0 0 0 0 Details Partial N lt Pkg Qty Retail Price Ext Retail Cost Ext Cost Seq Labels Count Ordering Num Save Delete rk Receive Report Jel DesignedLabel_ Price Sticker ShelfLabel p eal None Inventory Information The following table cont
121. 4 List of Orders 236 Loss Prevention 292 Loss Prevention Detail 324 altering appearance 325 compiling 324 example 325 Loss Prevention Summary 321 parameters 321 Non Merchandise 292 Non Merchandise Detail 310 311 compiling 311 example 312 parameters 311 Non Merchandise Summary 310 example 311 parameters 311 Payroll Clock In Out Detail 314 316 altering appearance 316 compiling 316 Payroll Clock In Out Summary 314 315 altering appearance 316 example 316 parameters 315 Payroll Summaty and Payroll Detail 292 Pending Transactions 346 Performance Detail 344 345 altering appearance 345 parameters 344 Performance Summary 344 example 345 parameters 344 Purchase Order 204 Quantity on Hand altering appearance 339 parameters 338 Receiving 223 example 224 Safe Content 136 Sales 306 data calculation formulas 307 example 307 Sales Analysis compiling 308 data calculation formulas 308 parameters 308 Sales and Sales Analysis 292 306 Sales Tax 292 308 Salesperson 293 325 example 326 parameters 325 Tender 292 312 example 313 Tender Detail 314 foreign tender 314 Transfer 233 Report Macro Definition Selection window 293 Report Macro List Menu window 293 Report Macro Maintenance window 294 295 parameters 295 Report Macro Menu window 291 Report Macro Selection window 294 report macros 331 creating 293 date types 292 defining 291 defining macto sequences 293 deleting 294 modifying 294 report types 292 reporting
122. 5 row s found Pe Display All Criteria 2 Ifyou are opening an existing order guide select it from the displayed list and click Open or click New to create a new order guide for a customer Order Guide Maintenance Window 999 999 9999 i T s 2 SS A 3 You must assign the order guide to the customer by entering their identifying number in the Customer field If you do not know the customer number you can look it up by clicking the question mark icon Note You may create an order guide for licensees with several locations ordering the same group of products by creating a copy of an existing order guide for one licensee and then assigning a new customer number to it 4 Inthe Guide ID field enter an identifier to uniquely identify the order guide 5 Enter each item to appear in the order guide by clicking the Item field and entering the PLU Number and PLU Description for the item 208 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Current Price Future Price displays the item s prices based on the current date Future price represents the price that is effective on the earliest configured date after the current date If an item does not appear in the customer price list the current retail price from the PLU database is displayed in both the current price and futute price 6 When you have entered all the items for the order click Save to save the order guide 7 If required you ca
123. 53 stickers and labels 253 T table records sorting 36 tables displaying all records 17 maintenance windows 14 records 12 adding 15 deleting 17 displaying 17 modifying 17 query 19 searching 17 sorting options 36 37 sorting order 17 updating 12 relationship to windows 14 selection window 14 Tare Weight Maintenance window 89 setting parameters 90 Tare Weight Selection window 89 tare weights 72 88 adding 89 assigning to PLUs 88 deleting 90 modifying 89 setting up 88 Tax Maintenance window 80 82 General parameters 80 Print Options parameters 82 Tax Steps parameters 83 tax rates 63 Tax Selection window 82 tax steps 83 Tax Steps parameters Tax Maintenance window 83 taxes adding 80 defining 80 deleting 82 department 73 382 modifying 82 setting up 80 step tates 80 tax steps 83 Taxes parameters Department New window 73 template design options See also report template designer repositioning column 301 repositioning fields 301 truncating columns 301 templates See also report template designer report template design options 301 report template designer fields 302 tender balancing cash drawer 116 117 cash management balance 116 117 118 119 cash drawer See cash drawer float see loan pickup See pickup from cash drawer safe balance See safe balance and safes balances safe transfers 129 Configurator verification for withdrawal 126 deposits into safe 121 float see loan foreign tender Tender Detail
124. 5648762243 PLU X Ret E666 PLU Description BIKE Cost 620 00 Note Pack Factor New Save Delete ad Exit To complete the Vendor s SKU Maintenance window 1 To define the ID number of the item s vendor click the Vendor ID drop down list and select a vendor from the list For information about defining vendors see Setting up product vendors on page 84 The Store Manager automatically completes the Vendor Name field with the description of the vendor you select in the Vendor ID drop down list To define the vendor s unique identification number for the item click the Vendor SKU field and type a number up to 18 characters in length To define the item s PLU type a number into the PLU X Ref field The PLU Description field defines the description of the item The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the description of the PLU you enter into the PLU X Ref field To define the store s cost for the item from the vendor click the Cost field and type an amount into the field Type an alphanumeric string up to 100 characters long into the Note field This string is related to the vendor s SKU that you are defining To define the number of the item in each shipping case click the Pack Factor field and type a number into the field that represent the number of the items in each shipping case If you complete this field this number is used as the package size in purchase orders a
125. 70 Deleting a sticker or label type sssssssssssssssssssssssssreessssresssrresssrensssressss 270 Design Label Definition Window ssssssssssssssssessssessssresssrreessrenssseeesss 272 Designing a new sticker Of label ssnanissniosnii anneni 274 Creating a new design for a sticker or label occ 274 Modifying a sticker or label you defined s ssssssssssssssrssssssssssssesssseesss 275 Deleting a sticker or label you defined occ 276 Printing the stickers or labels you defined oo 277 The Designed Label Maintenance window oo 278 Chapter 10 Journals and Journal Files Reading the jourtial tiles cris taen EA A AEEA AEA ENESTIS ET 283 Setting up the electronic journal Selecitig ayjourtial sandea anera Erni E EEE E EN E EE EA Chapter 11 Updating the Electronic Journal Viewer w ccccccccsssesesseseeeseeseens 285 Opening atjournal tile 8 ici citi ddl laa elevate te E chad andy 287 Searching for transactions in a journal wesc 287 The Electronic Journal Viewer oceans 288 Viewing logfiles nna E ES scons EA AT ORAT 290 Reporting De fining report Macros ynan n a a a ii 291 Cr ating a New TepOLrt MACIO ernier shn nE R R 293 Modifying a repoti MaACro scccccecsccecssssavsestseccssactdotesetsetuscscsbssctectgecetetuetaresesee 294 Deletitig areport mact smorennn inniinn nn a Ra 294 Report Macro Maintenance window cscs 295 Gompiling areport i400 hie ancient AEN R E T NRE 296 Choosing teportcritetia nianna a aa 296
126. AL PHONE MODEL D 1000 12345000008 LEATHER PHONE CASE Exit 12345000009 IN CAR CHARGER 12345000010 HEAD TENNIS RACKET 12345000011 DUNLOP TENNIS BALLS 12345000012 21 SPEED IRONHORSE BIKE 12345000013 HEAD SKI PACKAGE 12345000014 HEAD RADIAL SKIS 12345000015 TYROLIA 590 BINDINGS 12345000016 SOLOMON SKI BOOT 12345000017 ANTIBIOTICS 12345000018 SUDAFED 12345000019 REVLON BLUSH 12345000020 REVLON LIPSTICK 12345000021 CLINIQUE FASIAL SCRUB 12345000022 MARLBOROUGH MILDS xl 3 Enter the required shelf location codes for each PLU item Location codes can have a maximum of six digits 4 Click Save and then click Exit Adjusting on hand inventory quantities You can perform manual adjustments of the on hand quantities of items to correct discrepancies found as the result of inventory counts or to account for items shipped or received into the store by the case The Store Manager has two windows where you can adjust inventory quantities e Physical Inventory Maintenance Used after you perform an inventory count e Inventory Adjustment Used to adjust inventory quantities at any time Adjusting the on hand quantities after a count After you generate a count sheet and use it to perform an inventory count you can use the Physical Inventory Maintenance window to check the actual counts against the Store Manager s on hand quantities You can adjust the on hand quantities in the Store Manager to match the actual quantities in you
127. All The list of batches is displayed Click the batch you want to edit and then click Open The Price Batch Maintenance window displays the information in the batch 165 Managing Price Look Ups 166 Adding an item to a batch Once you have selected and opened a batch you can add items to it To add an item 1 Click Insert Choose PLU and Operation Type Operation Modify Press lt F12 gt to search for PLU PLU Reedy OK Cancel Delete 2 Inthe PLU field type the PLU You can use the PLU Search window to find the PLU For information about the search window see Using the PLU Search window on page 140 Make sure the Modify radio button is enabled 4 Click OK The fields for the PLU are displayed at the bottom of the Price Batch Maintenance window 5 Enter information into the fields as appropriate 6 Click Save Item The information for the item is saved Modifying a batch item s information Once you have selected and opened a batch you can modify the information that is already entered for an item Auditing product price changes To modify an item s information 1 Click the item you want to modify and then click Modify The fields for the item are displayed at the bottom of the Price Batch Maintenance window jg Price Batch New poor 000001 06 18 02 1054PM E 06 18 02 T054 PM o 06 18 02 10 54 PM 0 00 COS BO e 1115 Po SSS 82588 Madii Meem
128. All of the tender management functions you perform affect the amount of the tenders in the safes For example if you perform a pickup of 500 00 from a cashier s drawer the 500 00 is added to the amount in the safe When you perform a deposit to the bank the 500 00 is removed from the amount in the safe Tip Remember that the store must be open to handle transactions otherwise the view only mode is enforced 105 Tender Management The example below is the Safe Management Menu window a 2 Safe2 Safe Management Menu Performing a loan float A loan is the amount of a tender that is removed from the store s safe and placed in a cash drawer during the day or shift so that the cashier can make change A loan is often referred to as a float Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are eligible to be loaned and which accounts ate affected For example if loan transactions are performed on behalf of the cashier or the register When you complete a loan transaction the loaned amount is automatically added to the cashier or register system amount and is removed from the safe s contents Entering a new loan 106 A new loan has a pending status until you complete it You can modify the amounts in a pending loan transaction Pending loan amounts are not applied to the cashier s or register s system tender totals during balancing and are not subtracted from the safe s contents For
129. Cash Mngmt Security ia Cash Management Security Setup O x Transaction Option uto Balance Pickup POS Balance POS Loan POS Pickup Safe Balance Safe Deposit Safe Transfer Safe Withdrawal 0 Lowest Safe Content 0 Lowest ransaction List 0 Lowest To choose the safe that you want to set authority levels for click the Safe drop down list and choose a safe from the list Note The Transaction Option column describes the name of the transaction or option No action is required the Store Manager automatically completes this field To assign the minimum authority level that an employee needs in order to perform the transactions shown in the Transaction Option column click the Update Level drop down list and choose an authority level from the list To assign the minimum authority level that an employee needs in order to view information in the corresponding window click the View Level drop down list and choose an authority level from the list Click Save and then click Exit Using security features Changing a user s authority level There are six authority levels that you can assign to an employee Zero is the lowest level five is the highest level You assign an employee an authority level when you set them up in the Employee Maintenance window and you can change the authority level later in the same window WARNING By default all of the Store Manager s windows are restri
130. For example what was in the safe once a transaction was completed and verified Managing Price Look Ups This section provides information about managing the prices of the items that you sell in your store The items in the store are identified by unique codes called PLUs Price Look Ups You can use the Store Manager to define PLUs and set up different pricing schemes involving linked items and promotions This section covers the following topics e Using the PLU Search window e Maintaining PLUs e Maintaining PLU extended fields e Making global changes to PLUs e Using price batch management functionality e Auditing product price changes e Defining a PLU cross reference e Setting up a quantity or level pricing scheme e Setting up linked items e Reviewing mix match pricing schemes e Setting up promotional pricing e Exporting local PLU database information WARNING Your head office can complete most PLU management functions and download the files to your store As a result you can create new PLU management records modify or delete them and you can also modify and delete the ones sent from your head office 139 Managing Price Look Ups Using the PLU Search window The PLU Search window is linked to the PLU Number fields in several of the Store Managet s windows The window allows you to browse through the PLU list and select a PLU so that you do not have to remember it The PLU Search window is link
131. For information about previewing reports see Previewing a report on page 303 Action Click the button This field turns the template designer on or off The current status of the designer is displayed in the Template Design Mode box Auction Click the button This button acts as a toggle to turn the template designer on or off This field indicates the status on or off of the report template designer Only users with the appropriate authority level can use the Export button You must have a user authority level of 5 the highest in order to view the Export button otherwise it will be greyed out and disabled Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you click Design On Off This field indicates whether you are currently viewing the report in the default template or a template you designed If the box displays No you are seeing the report in the default template If the box displays Yes you are seeing the report in a template you designed Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you click Save Template or Delete Template This field saves the template you are designing writing over the default template The Template on File box displays Yes indicating that you are seeing the report in a template you designed Action Click the button 302 Using standard reports Field Description Delete Tem
132. Information about each of the fields in the maintenance windows is provided in this manual in the appropriate sections To modify an employee record 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 On the Administration Menu window click Employee Maintenance a On the Employee Selection window click Display All to display a list of all of the records in the table or click Query to initiate a search for a specific record Click the employee record that you want to modify Click Open Change the information in the fields as appropriate esl CON ONS 3 Click Save and then click Close The changes take effect immediately Deleting a record from a table You can delete records in a table from the table s selection window When a table contains many records it can be difficult to locate the record you want to delete There are two functions you can use in the Store Manager to help you locate the record you want e You can change the order in which the records are displayed in the selection window For information about changing the sort order of records Sorting table records in selection windows on page 36 e You can perform a query to search for a specific record For information about searching for records in a table See Performing a query in a selection window on page 19 Alternatively you can display all the records in the table and choose the record you want to delete The following procedure desc
133. Information on any of the following windows e PLU Maintenance window e Purchase Order Maintenance window e Receiving window e Store Transfer by PLU window e Inventory Adjustment window e Physical Inventory Maintenance window To open the Inventory History window e Click History on the Inventory Information window About the Inventory Information window This window displays inventory information ig Inventory Information 12345000004 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 The following list describes the fields used to set the inventory information in the Inventory Information window 234 Viewing inventory information PLU This field contains the item s PLU number The adjacent field describes the item associated with the PLU number You can define the item s description when you define its PLU Ordering Number This field contains a unique number that is used to track the item during inventory transactions You define the order number in the Ordering No field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window No action requited The Store Manager completes this field Department This field contains the ID number of the department to which the item belongs The adjacent field describes the group in which the item belongs You can define the item s department in the Dept Number drop down list in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window Retail Price This field contains the item s retail pric
134. Inventory Maintenance window displays the expected on hand quantities of each item in the PLU list You can compare these amounts to the actual amount you count in your store The on hand quantities in the Store Manager are not updated until you complete the adjustment transaction To enter new on hand quantities 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Physical Inventory 3 Click Display All All of the count PLU lists are displayed 244 Adjusting on hand inventory quantities 4 Click the list you want to open and then click Open The Physical Inventory Maintenance window appears with the PLU list displayed 5 Complete the fields in the top portion of the Physical Inventory Maintenance window 6 Inthe Quantity field type the actual quantity of the items 7 Click Complete The on hand inventory amounts in the Store Manager are changed Tip You can add items to the PLU list after it has been generated by clicking New in the Physical Inventory Maintenance window Physical Inventory Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for adjusting on hand inventory quantities after a count g Physical Inventory Maintenance o x Txn Number Status Pending Txn Date 06 03 2002 Doc Number Ein Reason Department Inv Bucket Quantity on Hand Inv Date 06 03 2002 Required by 00 00 0000 Location Origin Manual Note PLU XREF Description Retail Price yaa ee mo a _Complete SIL
135. K TIE 45 00 E 12345000002 B D OXFORD WHITE 16 34 39 99 12345000003 COTTON PANT 38 34 19 99 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 49 99 0 12345000005 COTTON SLACKS SIZE 12 39 99 12345000006 LONG COTTON SKIRT SIZE 8 35 99 New 12345000007 PCS DIGITAL PHONE MODEL 24 99 12345000008 LEATHER PHONE CASE 24 99 Save 12345000009 IN CAR CHARGER 35 99 Delete 12345000010 HEAD TENNIS RACKET 169 99 12345000011 DUNLOP TENNIS BALLS 5 99 Exit 12345000012 21 SPEED IRONHORSE BIKE 296 99 E 4 gt Report Inventory Information The following table contains descriptions of fields in the Physical Inventory Maintenance window Field Description Txn Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the inventory transaction The inventory transaction number sequence is also used for purchase orders receiving transactions and transfets No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a number when you click Save Status This field indicates the current status of the transaction No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Txn Date This field defines the date the inventory transaction is created The transaction date can differ from the inventory date No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the computet s system date on which the Store Manager is running 245 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description Doc
136. Management Click Qty Level Pricing Pe N Click Display All All of the quantity or level pricing schemes are displayed je Quantity Level Pricing Selection Window E E E Description 1 2 8 50 Multiple satchel 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the scheme you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The quantity level pricing scheme is deleted Setting up linked items A linking scheme allows several PLUs to be grouped and sold as a package using one PLU To use the package that you create you must click the Link Item checkbox in the PLU Maintenance window for the package PLU and for each PLU included in the package If you do not the Link Item table is not checked when a cashier enters the package s PLU in a transaction at the POS terminal 175 Managing Price Look Ups WARNING If you type check the Use Parent field in the Link Item Maintenance window the Store Manager uses the price and description of the package PLU when the package is sold If you do not check the Use Parent field the Store Manager uses the prices and descriptions that you enter in the Price and Description fields on the Link Item Maintenance window for each of the items in the package Adding a new linked item 176 You can add an item to a package The PLU that is used to identify the package must be set up in the PLU Maintenance wind
137. Merch Sales 0 0 00 Net Merch Sales 2 26 29 Net Non Merch Sales 0 0 00 Returns 0 0 00 Discounts 0 0 00 Customer Count 2 Item Count 2 TRA Average Customer 13 15 Average ltem 13 15 Next Average ltem Customer 1 00 Bree 2 19 99 11 57 02 Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario Print ABC Company Exit 326 Using standard reports Hourly Sales Summary The Hourly Sales Summary report contains sales totals for hour or half hour increments You can specify a range of dates for the report and specify days of the week You can also specify the time period The Hourly Sales Summary report and the Average Hourly Sales report use the same criteria window Hourly Sales Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Hourly Sales Summary report and the Average Hourly Sales report The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Hourly Sales Report Criteria window Field Current Business Date Previous Business Date Period To Date Sun Sat Period To Time Time Increment Clear Criteria Description This field determines if the report period is the current business date You can also click Previous Business Date and the Period To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button This field determines if the report period is the previous business date
138. OK Alternatively type a date into the field 2 Click in the field after the date and type a new time 24 hour clock using the following format HH MM SS Preparing clock in out information for export Field Description Clock Out This field defines the date and time the employee clocked out There is one entry in this field for each time the employee clocks out Auction The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it To edit the information in the box 1 Click the button beside the field to open the popup calendar window Select a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field 2 Click in the field after the date and type a new time 24 hour clock using the following format HH MM SS Total Worked This field contains the total hours worked for the day and for the fiscal week Reason Code Confirm Time You can use the Round Clock Time To field in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window to define how partial hours worked are interpreted in the calculation of hours worked For information about the fields in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window see Payroll Parameters Maintenance window on page 354 Auction No action required The Store Manager calculates the total hours worked and completes this field This field defines the reason the employee worked You define the selection or work reasons that appear in this drop down list in the Code Tab
139. OR 344 Performance Report Selection Criteria Window ou 344 Performance Summary teport esarri iieri 345 Performance Detail surenin E RE R RENREN 345 Pettormance Detal tep ttiaasosenassaannsnnmonoin nis 345 Pending TransachonS miini i EAA EE 346 Pending Transactions Report Criteria window ssssssssssssssssssssreeesse 347 Pending Transactions Report wesc The Pending Transaction Details Report Pending Transactions By Item Report Chapter 12 Processing The Payroll Configuring payroll parameters niski 353 Payroll Parameters Maintenance Window wo 354 Configuring payroll periods serae e aN A 355 Preparing clock in out information for ExPOft wc ceeseesesees essences 356 Editing clock in out times iehida a A 356 Payroll Clock In Out Detail window cececsseseeeseeseeneensentenees 357 Confirming clock in out times ursainrc kerai eases 360 Exporting clock in out files to head office weeeseteseseesseeeeeeenteseentens 361 Chapter 13 Viewing the Server State ACCESSING server information sunscreen iinan inini Table of Contents 10 Getting Started This section provides general information about the Store Manager application and its relationship to other Triversity products In addition it describes how to use fields drop down lists and buttons in the Store Manager windows This section covers the following topics e About the Store Manager e Store Manager menu windows e Relationship between tables and w
140. On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the safe with the pickup Click POS Pickup The pending completed deleted and voided pickups are displayed in the window Click the pickup you want to review and then click Open The POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window displays the pickup information 113 Tender Management POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window This window contains the fields for performing pickup transactions 06 07 01 14 25 06 07 2001 IDEN Eme Delete Reen e To complete the fields in the POS Pickup Safe Maintenance window 1 The Txn Num field defines a unique number that identifies the pickup transaction This number is a counter that reflects the number of tender management transactions for example pickups and balances that have been performed This is not the transaction number that is recorded on the TLog The number in the T Log Num field in this window is recorded as the transaction number in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number when you save the pickup transaction 2 The T Log Num field defines the unique number that identifies the pickup transaction in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you complete the pickup 3 To define the cashier or register that the tender is being picked up from type a cashier or register number in the
141. RNING Your head office can also create tare weights and send the files to your store As a result you can create new tare weights modify or delete them and you can also modify and delete the ones sent from your head office Setting up tare weights Adding a tare weight You can add new tare weights In the following steps you ate required to enter information into the Tare Weight Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Tare Weight Maintenance window on page 90 To add a tare weight 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Tare Weight lle Tare Weight Selection Window Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 3 Click New 4 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 5 Click Save and then click Exit Modifying a tare weight You can modify the weight and description in a tare weight In the following steps you ate required to enter information into the Tare Weight Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Tare Weight Maintenance window on page 90 To add a tare weight 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Tare Weight 3 Click Display All The existing tare weights are displayed in the window 4 Click the tare weight you want to modify and then click Open The Tare Weight Maintenance window appears displaying the weight s information
142. Register field Your head office uses the Configurator to define whether pickups are performed by the cashier or register Note that the field name reflects the setting 4 The Txn Status field indicates the pickup transaction s status pending completed deleted or voided No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 5 The Operator field displays the employee number of the person that processes the pickup transaction No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the employee number of the person who last dealt with the transaction 6 The Txn Date field contains the date on which the pickup transaction is created No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system date of the computer it is running on 7 The Business Date field contains the current business date Note that this date can be different than the system date 114 Performing a pickup 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Select the reason that you are performing the pickup from safe transaction from the Reason drop down list You define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list on the Code Table Maintenance window You can define any notes that you want to record about the pickup transaction Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters in length in the Notes field The Tender field contains the tenders that you ca
143. Safe 112 POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance setting parameters 114 Price Batch New 164 setting parameters 164 Price Batch Management 164 setting parameters 164 Price Batches Selection 163 Price Tags Selection 275 276 277 Print Queue Maintenance 261 262 264 265 267 setting parameters 267 268 Print Queue Selection 262 265 267 Print Queue Selection window 261 Promotion New setting parameters 186 Promotion Maintenance 185 setting parameters 186 Promotions Selection 185 186 Purchase Order Maintenance 199 setting parameters 199 Purchase Order Report 205 Purchase Order Selection 196 Purchase Orders Selection 197 Manual PO parameters 196 Quantity Level Pricing New setting parameters 173 Quantity Level Pricing Maintenance 173 setting parameters 174 Quantity Level Pricing Selection 173 175 Quantity On Hand Report Selection Criteria 338 setting parameters 338 Receipt Logo Maintenance 53 Receiving 213 219 setting parameters 213 Receiving New setting parameters 220 Receiving by Case 219 setting parameters 220 Receiving Report 224 Receiving Selection 211 Receiving by Case parameters 219 Receiving Transactions parameters 212 Report Macro Definition Selection 293 Report Macro List Menu 293 Report Macro Maintenance 294 295 setting parameters 295 Report Macto Menu 291 Report Macto Selection 294 Report Management Security Setup 31 Report Preview 303 Retail Price Update Audit 168 field descriptions 168 Safe Balance Maintenanc
144. Tender Report By Store Store s 1 Operator G Green Period 2 17 99 To 2 18 99 Refunded Tenderdesc Received Reissued Amount Subtotal CASH 58 28 2 40 63 1 0 0 00 E 8 28 j VISA 72 94 17 72 94 Oo 07 0 00 17 72 94 CHEQUE 71 99 17 71 99 Of 0 00 0 0 00 V 71 99 CREDIT NOTE REDEEMED 0 00 C 0 00 Of 0 00 0 0 00 C 0 00 MASTERCARD 0 00 C 0 00 Of 0 00 of 0 00 ei 0 00 AMEX 0 00 C 0 00 Of 0 00 0 0 00 C 0 00 DISCOYER 0 00 C 0 00 Of 0 00 0 0 00 C 0 00 GIFT CERTIFICATE 0 00 C 0 00 of 0 00 of 0 00 Ce 0 00 US CASH 0 00 Cf 0 00 Of 0 00 of 0 00 Cf 0 00 FOOD STAMPS 0 00 C 0 00 Of 0 00 of 0 00 Cf 0 00 Totals 153 21 4 185 56 17 32 35 0 0 00 ee 153 21 Printer 2 18 99 16 33 56 Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario Print Exit ABC Company 313 Reporting The following table contains the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns Column Formula Reissued Total of tender given back to customer when original tender given as payment was different Note This is usually a negative value Refunded Total of tender given back to customer in return or exchange transaction Note This is usually a negative value Subtotal Received refunded reissued Tender Detail Report The Tender Detail Report is an extension of the Tender report Foreign tenders are also listed in the Tender Detail Report The Tender Detail Report can
145. Transactionware GM version 9 5 store Manager User Guide SAPA Store Manager User Guide Copyright Copyright 2006 SAP AG All rights reserved SAP Library document classification PUBLIC No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express P P y P y y putp p permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors Microsoft Windows Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database OS 2 Parallel Sysplex MVS ESA ATX S 390 AS 400 OS 390 OS 400 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries z OS AFP Intelligent Miner WebSphere Netfinity Tivoli and Informix are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation in the United States and or other countries Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation UNIX X Open OSF 1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group Citrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc JavaScript is a re
146. Vendor SKU Vendor Name Vendor ID Dept Name Dept Number Store Name Store Number This field determines if the vendor s SKU is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format For information about setting up vendor s SKUs see Setting up product vendors on page 84 Action Click O the checkbox to include the vendor s SKU in the format This field determines if the vendor s name is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the vendor s name in the format This field determines if the vendor s unique ID number is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the vendor s ID number in the format This field determines if the name of the department the item belongs to is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the department s name in the format This field determines if the unique number that identifies the department to which the item belongs is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the departments number in the format This field determines if your store s name is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the store s name in the format This field determines if your store s number is printed on the sticker or l
147. a PLU see Maintaining PLUs on page 142 5 To define the item that is in the package and linked to the package PLU type a PLU number in the Link PLU field 6 To assign a description of the linked item in the package type an alphanumeric description up to 40 characters long in the Description field The description is printed on the customer receipt if the Use Parent checkbox is checked in this window 7 To determine the quantity of the linked item in the package type a number in the Quantity field 177 Managing Price Look Ups 10 11 12 13 To assign a price to the linked item in the package type a currency amount including decimal places in the Price field The price of each linked item in the package is added to make the total package price if you check the Use Parent checkbox in this window If the price of each item in the package is added to make the total package price click the Use Parent checkbox to use the package PLU s description and price Leave the Use Parent checkbox unchecked to use the individual items price and description The description of each item is printed on the receipt and the taxes assigned to each item are applied If the individual item details are not used the price of the package PLU is used and only the package description is printed If the item s price and description are used prices are taken from the Price and Description fields and the Tax 1 16 checkboxes on t
148. a Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window you must complete this drop down list Click the drop down list and select a ship via type from the list This field defines the number of cases included in this transfer Type a number into the field This field defines the vendor of the items included in the transfer You must complete this drop down list before you can add items to the transfer Click the drop down list and select a vendor from the list This field defines the store from to which the items are being transferred You must complete this drop down list before you can save or complete the transfer The selection of stores that appears in this drop down list comes from the Stores table Click the drop down list and select a store from the list This field defines the total number of cases that the store expects to ship or receive in this transfer Type a number into the field This field defines the reason the transfer of items is being performed You can define the selection of reasons that appears in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a reason from the list This field defines any notes regarding the transfer Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters long into the field This field defines the unique number that identifies the case of items being transferred Type a number into the field This field defines the number of cases that ha
149. a calculation formulas 308 parameters 308 Sales and Sales Analysis report 292 306 Sales report 306 data calculation formulas 307 example 307 Sales Tax report 292 Salesperson report 293 325 example 326 parameters 325 Salesperson Report Criteria window 325 parameters 325 searching electronic journal files 287 electronic journal transactions 287 380 security functions access 29 adding new setup windows 30 authority levels 29 30 33 assigning 29 changing 33 cash management 31 reports 31 Store Manager 12 using 28 viewing authority level 30 windows 29 security setup windows adding new 30 viewing authority level 30 Select Display Type window 212 Select Display Type window Purchase Orders Selection 196 Select PLU window 141 Select Suggested Order Type window 198 selecting batch 165 electronic journal 285 selection window 19 description 14 example 15 query 15 Server Communication parameters General Parameters Setup window 23 server information accessing 363 Server Log window 364 Server Message Log window 364 server state viewing information 363 Server State Information window 363 servers accessing information 363 information window 363 server message log 364 viewing server log 364 viewing status 363 Set Sort Order window 38 setting parameters labels 259 setting up customers 95 electronic journal 283 level or quantity pricing scheme 172 linked items 175 product hierarchies 65 product vendors 84 promotiona
150. a pending balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate safe 3 Click POS Balance The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window 4 Click the balance you want to modify and then click Open The POS Balance Maintenance window displays the balance information 5 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Voiding a balance 118 You can only void a completed balance and it must be performed on the same Business Date Voided balances are visible in the POS Balance Selection window but they cannot be modified For information about completing a balance see Completing a balance on page 117 To void a balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate safe 3 Click POS Balance The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window 4 Click the balance you want to void and then click Open The POS Balance Maintenance window displays the balance information 5 Click Void The balance s status changes to voided 6 Click Exit Tip If you clicked EOD Pickup on the POS Balance Maintenance window when you completed the balance a Pickup transaction was automatically created and completed If you void the balance a dialog box appears giving you the option to void the corresponding pickup transaction Balancing a cash drawer Vie
151. a single register click the Register radio button To include sales information for a group of registers click the Register Group radio button To include sales information for all registers click the All registers radio button SOF GO a GN To generate the report click Generate Report 306 Using standard reports Sales Report The following is a sample Sales Report Et Sales Report By Store Store s 1 Operator G Green Category T e Nontaxable Total Gross Merch Sales Taxes PST 8 GST 7 Total Taxes Reductions to Gross Returns 2 18 99 16 27 36 ABC Company 200 46 3 0 61 1 0 09 Sane eee ts See oe ee So Soe eee Rees 0 70 __ 201 16 1 29 95 Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario P Bm x Sales Repor Period 2 17 99 To 2 18 99 Counter Amount 3 162 93 Printer Print View Sales Analysis Report Exit The following table contains the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns Column Formula Total Gross Non Merch Sales Total Reductions to Gross Net Sales Total Other Non Merch Sales Total Other Receipts Total Other Reductions to Gross Total sales of non merchandise items Note Your head office uses the Configurator to define non merchandise items Only non merchandise items with the Add to Gross checkbox selected in the Configurator are included in this total Total of returns and discounts not inclu
152. a tab ia Global PLU Change ware E es E 4 To define the date range within which the PLUs were created click the box beside each of the Date Added To fields to open a popup calendar and select a date Click OK Alternatively type dates into the fields 5 To define a range of PLUs type numbers in the PLU To fields 6 To define the category to which the PLUs belong click the Category drop down list and select a category 7 To define the group to which the PLUs belong click the Group drop down list and select a group 8 To define the department to which the PLUs belong click the Department drop down list and select a department 160 Making global changes to PLUs 9 To define the user flag options that are assigned to the PLUs click the User Flag 1 6 drop down lists and select user flag options from the lists 10 To define the vendor who supplies the items click the Vendor drop down list and select a vendor 11 To clear all existing entries from the tab click Clear Criteria Defining the fields to be changed Once you have defined the PLUs that you want to be affected by the change you must define the changes The fields that appear on the Change Fields tab are the same as those in the PLU Maintenance window and you enter information into them the same way For example the Allow Empl Disc field is a checkbox on both the Change Fields tab and the PLU Maintenance window If you click the check
153. abel that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the store s number in the format Configuring sticker and label parameters Defining sticker and label parameters You must define the label parameters before you can print stickers or labels Before you can define label parameters you must have defined the sticker and label formats you want to use as the defaults In the following steps you must enter information into the Label Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see General Label Parameters Maintenance window on page 259 To define sticker and label parameters 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Sar shi 02 StS Click Label Maintenance Click Label Parameters Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit General Label Parameters Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for configuring price sticker and shelf label parameters IE Label Parameters Maintenance OF x Allow Price Label Design in Back Office v Allow Price Sticker Label Creation v Allow Shelf Label Creation M io Create Different Queue for Each Format ID E Default format ID for price sticker M sme Default format ID for shelf label z Delete UPC By Cross Ref Num E Exit i The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Label Parameters window Field Description
154. aborted Ensure that the interval is no longer than the time required for communication during the End of Day function or for the function that requires the longest communication Type the number of minutes in the Update Term Interval field To define how often the Store Manager searches for new electronic documents sent from your head office type the number of minutes between searches in the Elec Doc Search Interval minutes field To determine how often the server requests each POS terminal status type the number of seconds between requests in the Status Refresh Time seconds field Type the maximum number of records that can be retrieved from a table and displayed in a selection window in the Maximum Retrieve Threshold field To configure the Generation of Unique PLUs 1 Click the Unique PLU Generation checkbox to generate a unique PLU The Store Manager generates a unique PLU when you click Generate Unique PLU on the PLU Maintenance window You can define the number that the Store Manager always uses as the first character of a PLU when it generates a unique PLU Type the number that you want to be the first character in the Leading Digit field To set the length of the sequence portion of the PLUs that the Store Manager generates when you use the unique PLU generation function type the number in the No of Digits in Sequence field The sequence number follows the merchant ID and increments each time the Store Manager gene
155. acters long into the field This field determines whether the stickers or labels in the queue are printed using the format you selected for each item in the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window A format defines the information that is printed on the sticker or label For example it defines if the vendor s name is included For information about defining formats for stickers or labels see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 If you want to individually select a format for each sticker or label in the queue click Current Format ID in this window Action Click the radio button This field determines that the stickers or labels in the queue are printed using the format you select in the Current Format ID field in this window A format defines the information that is printed on the sticker or label For example it defines if the vendor s name is included For information about defining formats for stickers or labels see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 If you want to use the format ID you defined for each item in the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window click Default of Each PLU in this window Action Click the radio button This field defines the PLU in the queue Action Click the drop down list and select a PLU from the list This field defines the number of stickers or labels to print Action Type a number into the field This field defines the format used to print the sticke
156. adio button 2 Type a cashier number into the field All Cashiers This field determines if you want to include information about transactions processed by all the store s cashiers on the report Action Click the radio button Register This field determines if you want to include information for 1 register on the report Action 1 Click the radio button 2 Type a register number into the field 322 Using standard reports Field Description Register Group All Registers Transaction Types Item Voids Post Updates Select All Txn Types Generate Report This field determines if you want to include information for 1 register group on the report You can define register groups by running a Manager Code 6 Terminal Define transaction at the POS terminal For information about using manager codes refer to the POS Xpress User Manual Action 1 Click the radio button 2 Type a register group number into the field This field determines if you want to include information for all the store s registers on the report Action Click the radio button These fields determine the types of transactions you want to include in the report If you want to include all the transaction types in the report you can click Select All Txn Types Action Click o the checkboxes for the transactions you want to include in the report This field determines if you want the report to include all the transac
157. ag and drop data units between boxes Source Data Order By Ascending Description D escription v Catagory Number Cancel From the Source Data area on the left side of the window click and drag the first column by which you want the records sorted to the Order By area on the right side The column is listed at the top of the Order By area If required from the Source Data area click and drag a second column to the Order By area The column is listed second in the Order By area When you select more than one column to sort by the table records are sorted based on the first column then by the second You can have more than two columns selected Set Sort Order Drag and drop data units between boxes Source Data Order By Ascending Customer Jv Last Name lV Ece Cancel Clear the Ascending checkbox if you want to sort the records in descending order Note By default the Ascending checkbox is checked and the records are sorted in ascending order Click OK The table s records are sorted in the new order Sorting table records in selection windows Tip To remove a column from the Order By area and therefore remove it from the sort order click and drag it into the Source Data area 39 Customizing Store Manager 40 Managing the POS Terminals This chapter provides information about controlling and customizing the store s POS terminals using t
158. ail price of the items that must be purchased to qualify for the mix match pricing scheme The price in this field is compared with the price of the item being purchased based on the operator in the OP field This field contains the new selling price of the items with the special mix match pricing Alternatively the Off or the Off fields in this window can be used to define the way that the new selling price is calculated Reviewing mix match pricing schemes Field Description Alt 1 9 Off This field contains the flat amount that is deducted from the item s regular retail ptice to calculate the new selling price under the mix match pricing scheme Alternatively the Sell Price or the Off fields in this window can be used to define the way that the new selling price is calculated Alt 1 9 Off This field contains the percentage amount that is deducted from the item s regular retail price to calculate the new selling price under the mix match pricing scheme Alternatively the Sell Price or the Off fields in this window can be used to define the way that the new selling price is calculated Pricing Target Type This option allows you to indicate whether all or some defined promotions ate available to a defined customer group The options are a All This option indicates that the defined target group is entitled to receive all defined promotions and mixmatch pricing schemes Defined promotion scheme Speci
159. ails field Applying extended field options to customers Before you can apply extended field options to customers you must have extended fields option types options and option details if required already defined Your head office can either assign an 103 File Maintenance Features option type to a field or define the characteristics of text date string decimal quantity you can type into the field Fields option types options and option details are defined in the Configurator by your head office You can also define options and option details using the Store Manager For information about defining options and option details see Adding extended options and details on page 100 You can assign several options to one customer To assign an option to a customer 1 Open a customer record so the Customer Maintenance window appears with the customer s information displayed 2 Click Extended Fields a Extended Customer Fields Customer 1 Customer ff o Dean London SSS S Store Update Allowed IV Extended Field M JPicture Frames Plush Toys Interest Group 2 Interest Group 3 Locations Save Exit di 3 Click a field in the Extended Field field 4 Click the Value box beside the extended field and either select an option from the drop down list or type information into the box If you select an option from a drop down list the option details are displayed at the bottom of
160. ain Menu window click Labels Maintenance 2 Click Price Stickers 263 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers 3 Click Display All Print Queue Selection Window _ OF x Description 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the queue you want to print and then click Open 5 Click Print A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm printing 6 Click OK Printing shelf labels When you want to print shelf labels you create a queue list of PLUs quantities and formats then you print the queue You can create several queues When you print a queue the Store Manager writes the labels information in the order in which you placed them in the queue WARNING You can only print shelf labels if you click o Allow Shelf Label Creation in the Label Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the Label Parameters Maintenance window see General Label Parameters Maintenance window on page 259 You can only create a shelf label queue after you define format IDs Formats define the information that is printed on the labels When you print shelf labels you can either use the default format for the item or you can use another format The default format for each item is defined in the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window For information about defining shelf label formats see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 Creating a shelf label queue 264
161. ains description of the fields in the Receiving window Field Description Txn Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the inventory transaction The inventory transaction number sequence is used for purchase orders receiving transactions transfers and inventory count PLU lists No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a number after you save the receiving transaction Status This field indicates the current status of the receiving transaction Pending The transaction has not been completed and can be modified Received The transaction is complete and cannot be modified Partial Some of the items in the transaction have been received more items on the transaction can be received Void The transaction has been completed and then voided No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Txn Date This field defines the date the inventory transaction is created The transaction date does not need to be the same as the receive date No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the system date of the computer the Store Manager is running on 213 Performing Inventory Control Functions 214 Field Description Document Number Vendor Receive Date P O Number Ship Type Receiving Type Discrepancy Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the receiving transaction You can modify
162. allowed on hand type a number in the Minimum Stock On Hand field If you include the item in suggested orders the item is added to a suggested order whenever its on hand amount falls below the number that you enter into this field An amount is ordered to bring the item s on hand amount to the level entered in the Maximum Stock On Hand field To set the maximum number of the item allowed on hand type a number in the Maximum Stock on Hand field If you include the item in suggested orders an amount is suggested to bring the item s on hand amount to the level is entered in this field The Reorder Point field displays the number at which a flag is generated to indicate that new inventory needs to be ordered No action is required the Store Manager automatically displays the number in this field Maintaining PLU extended fields The PLU Maintenance window Future Prices tab The Future Price tab is used to inquire about a PLU s price on a specific date in the future If a PLU s price is going to change the effective date and retail price display in this window Note that this tab is for viewing only j PLU New Generate WAig ue Ty MERCED eI Venton ian netic Maintaining PLU extended fields You can use extended fields to record additional PLU information that is not available in the PLU table by creating customized fields and applying the fields to PLUs The PLU information in the extended fields is stored in the databas
163. ameters Setup 2 Click Label Parameters Designing and printing stickers and labels 3 Click Designed Labels Definition les Price Tags Selection Window Iof x Tags Name Delete 0 row s found Display Al Query Sort Exit 4 Click New 5 Complete the fields in the Designed Label Maintenance window as appropriate 6 Click New to add new entry lines 7 Click Save Tip To print the stickers or labels immediately click Print Label Modifying a sticker or label you defined You can modify a custom sticker or label If the only change you want to make is the PLU range the sticker or label prints for modifying an existing custom sticker or label is easier than creating a new design In the following steps you must enter information into the Price Tag Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Designed Label Maintenance window on page 278 To modify a custom sticker or label 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Label Parameters Click Designed Labels Definition 2 3 4 Click Display All All of the custom price stickers or shelf labels are displayed 5 Click the sticker or label you want to modify click Open 6 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 275 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers 276 ds Note You must click Save before you can use the fields on the right side of the Price Tag Maintenance wi
164. an generate the Sales report using criteria to define the items included on the report and the dates the report covers Once you have generated the Sales report you can generate the Sales Analysis report The Sales Analysis report provides more detailed information about the sales of the items The Store Manager compiles the Sales Analysis report based on the same criteria you choose for the Sales report Sales Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Sales and Sales Analysis reports a Sales Report Criteria i To complete the Sales Report Criteria window 1 Ifyou want the report period to be for today s date click the Current Business Date radio button 2 If you want the report period to be for yesterday s date click the Previous Business Date radio button 3 To select a range of dates for the report period click Period and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK 4 Ifyou want the report period to be for a selected week click the Week Ending radio button and type the date of the end of the week in which you want to compile the report or click the button beside the field and select a date from the pop up calendar Click OK To include sales information for the entire store click the By Store radio button To include sales information for
165. anagement Click the safe with the pickup Click POS Pickup The pending completed deleted and voided pickups are displayed in the window Click the pickup you want to modify and then click Open The POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance window displays the pickup information Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Voiding a pickup You can only void a completed pickup and it must be voided on the same Business Date Voided pickups are visible in the POS Pickup to Safe Selection window They cannot be modified and they do not affect the cashier s or register s actual tender amount during balancing or the safe s contents For information about completing a pickup see Completing a pickup on page 112 To void a pickup 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the safe with the pickup O lick POS Pickup The pending completed deleted and voided pickups are displayed in the ndow 4 O lick the pickup you want to void and then click Open The POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance ndow displays the pickup information a Click Void The pickup s status changes to voided Click Exit Viewing a pickup s details You can review the information you entered in a pickup transaction regardless of its current status Voided pickups remain visible in the POS Pickup to Safe Selection window To view the details of a pickup 1 2 3
166. appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The cross reference is deleted Setting up a quantity or level pricing scheme 172 A quantity pricing scheme defines a special price if a customer buys a specific quantity of an item A level pricing scheme defines different prices for the same item Once you have defined a scheme different customers can pay different prices To use the level pricing schemes you created you must enter the level number from the Level field in the Quantity Level Pricing Maintenance window into the Price Level field in the Employee Maintenance window or the Customer Maintenance window You can define multiple schemes for a PLU For example you can create a level 1 pricing scheme for PLU 456987268 at 4 55 Preferred customers pay the level 1 price You can also create a level 2 pricing scheme for the same PLU at 3 99 Gold customers pay the level 2 price WARNING You cannot define a quantity pricing scheme for a PLU unless you have checked the Qty Pricing checkbox in the PLU Maintenance window You cannot define a level pricing scheme for a PLU unless you check the Price Level checkbox in the PLU Maintenance window Setting up a quantity or level pricing scheme Adding a quantity or level pricing scheme You can define one quantity or level scheme each time you open the Quantity Level Pricing Maintenance window but you can define multiple schemes for a PLU For example you can com
167. ata Length Line Font Bold Italic Uln This field defines the description of the sticker or label you are designing Action Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters long into the field This field defines the type of sticker or label you are designing For information about creating sticker or label types see Creating new types of stickers and labels on page 269 Action Click the drop down list and select a type from the list This field defines the type of information that is printed on the sticker or label Action Click the drop down list and select an item from the list Select user defined from the list if you want to print a short custom text string on the sticker or label Type the text string into the Tag Data field This field defines the contents of a short string that is printed on the sticker or label You must select user defined in the Description drop down list before the text you type into this field is printed on the sticker or label Action Type an alphanumeric string up to the width of the box into the field This field defines the maximum length in inches of the information you selected in the Description drop down list Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field defines the line on which the information you selected in the Description drop down list is printed on the sticker or label Action Type a line number into the field This fie
168. ation about receiving see Receiving inventory on page 211 149 Managing Price Look Ups 6 To adda blank line to the list of vendors click Add 7 To remove the selected vendor from the list click Remove 150 Maintaining PLUs The PLU Maintenance window Labels tab This tab contains the fields used for defining a PLU s price sticker and shelf label printing options The PLU and PLU Desc Inventory Control and Inventory Information fields are accessible on all tabs in the PLU Maintenance window ja PLU 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 GUE TS To complete the Labels tab 1 To define the format used to print the price stickers for the item click the Price Sticker Format drop down list and select a format If you do not define a format in this drop down list the item s price stickers are printed using the format that you define in the Default Format ID for Price Sticker drop down list on the Label Parameters Maintenance window For information about creating formats see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 To define the format used to print the shelf labels for the item click the Shelf Label Format drop down list and select a format If you do not define a format in this drop down list the item s shelf labels are printed using the format that you define in the Default Format ID for Shelf Label drop down list on the Label Parameters Maintenance window To open the Price Tag wind
169. ature is enabled in the Configurator application this checkbox is for information purposes only and cannot be enabled or disabled in the Store Manager If checked the Local Dept Chg checkbox indicates that a manual update to the Department setting associated with a PLU has been performed This is an indicator only and can not be enabled or disabled in the Store Manager To activate the PLU generation function click Generate Unique PLU The Store Manager creates a unique PLU following the rules you define on the General Parameters Maintenance window and enters it into the PLU field To open the Extended Fields window click Extended Fields For more information about extended fields see Maintaining PLU extended fields on page 153 Click Save and then click Exit Modifying a PLU s information 146 You can modify a PLU s information Maintaining PLUs For more information about the fields in the PLU Maintenance window see The PLU Maintenance window User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab on page 147 and The PLU Maintenance window Labels tab on page 151 Tip If you have a large PLU table you can perform a query to find the PLU you want When the PLU Selection window appears click Query To modify a PLU s information l 2 3 4 ou On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click PLU Maintenance Click Display All The PLUs are displayed in the PLU Selection window Click
170. ayed in the report window you can print it For information about printing reports see Printing a report on page 297 You can change the appearance of inventory reports using the report template designer For information about the designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 Inventory Adjustment 332 The Inventory Adjustment Report provides information about the adjustments you make to on hand quantities of items and buckets including the amount of the adjustment and the reason for the adjustment Inventory Adjustment Report Selection Criteria window This window contains the fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Inventory Adjustment Report lolx Period WAE ES 05 31 2005 E PLU E Category o User Flag 1 Group o User Flag 2 Department User Flag 3 Vendor User Flag 4 Adjustment User Flag 5 Transaction Type UserFiags Reset Criteria Generate Report Exit Using inventory reports To complete the Inventory Adjustment Report Selection Criteria window 1 To define a range of dates for the report period click the button beside the Period field to open the pop up calendar Select a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the Period fields To define a range of items to be included in the report click the PLU fields and type a PLU number into the fields You can also use the Cat
171. balance A balance has a pending status until you c ompleteit You cannot modify a completed balance but you can void it If you find an error in a completed balance you must void the balance and create a new one however you must ensure that you perform the void on the same Business Date For information about voiding a balance see Voiding a balance on page 118 To complete a balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate safe 3 Click POS Balance The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window 4 Click the balance you want to complete and then click Open The POS Balance Maintenance window displays the balance information 5 Click Balance 6 Click Complete and then click Exit 117 Tender Management Modifying a balance You can only modify a pending balance Once you have entered the final information for a balance you can complete it For information about completing a balance see Completing a balance on page 117 You cannot modify a completed balance If you need to make a change to a completed balance you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a balance see Voiding a balance on page 118 In the following steps you are required to enter information in the POS Balance Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see POS Balance Maintenance window on page 119 To modify
172. balance 117 bank deposit 128 deposit into safe 122 deposit into the safe 122 fields in window 20 inventory transfer 232 loan 109 pickup 112 pickup from cash drawer 112 receiving transaction 223 safe balance 131 Configurator 12 13 downloading information 13 parameters See Configurator parameter files Configurator parameter files layaway parameters 13 register parameters 13 tender parameters 13 Configurator Parameters window 13 accessing 13 configuring inventory parameters 191 payroll parameters 353 sort options 36 sticker and label parameters 253 confirming clock in out times 360 contents of safe viewing 135 controlling POS terminals 42 converting purchase orders into receiving orders 211 count sheets generating 240 printing 240 creating batch 163 custom design for a sticker or label 274 departments 69 extended field options and option details 100 inventory count PLU list 244 inventory transfer 229 label and sticker formats 255 new customer record 95 new types of stickers and labels 269 PLU list 244 price sticker queue 261 purchase order 196 purchase order from a suggested order 198 receiving by case transaction 218 receiving transaction 211 report macro 293 shelf label print queue 264 shelf label queue 264 sticker or label design 274 stickers and labels 269 suggested order purchase order 198 update export files 159 uset flag option 77 cross reference numbers PLU creating 169 defining 169 deleting 171 modifying
173. box the PLU is eligible for an employee discount If you clear the checkbox the PLU is not eligible for an employee discount To define the fields and initiate the changes 1 Click Change Fields 2 Complete the fields in the tab as appropriate You can change the information in several fields at one time Click the checkbox to the right of the field to indicate the field is marked for change then complete the field with the new value 3 Click Global PLU Change A dialog box appears asking you to confirm the changes 4 Click Yes The Global PLU Change Maintenance window This tab contains the fields used to enter the new information you want applied to a group of PLUs Global PLU Change re BEEBE BEBE sisi st ts sisi st BEEBE EEEE sts sist lt lt sisi st s Vv M M v M M M M M M M M M lt i m iis eer 161 Managing Price Look Ups To complete the Change Fields tab 1 To define the new department you are assigning the PLUs to click the Department checkbox and select a department from the drop down list 2 To set the taxes that you are applying to the PLUs click the applicable Tax 1 16 checkboxes Leave the checkboxes empty for the taxes that you do not want to apply to the PLUs For information about setting up taxes see Setting up taxes on page 80 3 To set the user flag options that you are applying to the PLUs click the User Flag 1 6 drop down lists and
174. ce completing 131 entering 131 modifying 132 viewing details 133 voiding 132 Safe Balance Maintenance window 131 parameters 133 Safe Balance Selection window 132 Safe Content report 136 Safe Content Report window 136 Safe Contents window 135 Safe Deposit Maintenance window 122 parameters 124 Safe Deposit Selection window 121 Safe Management Menu window 106 safe options 105 example 106 Safe Transactions window 129 Safe Transfer Selection window parameters 129 Safe Transfer window parameters 130 Safe Withdrawal New window 127 safes See also safe options authority levels 32 for withdrawal 126 balances 129 131 completing 131 entering 131 379 modifying 132 new 131 viewing details 133 voiding 132 balancing 131 bank deposit completing withdrawal from safe 127 modifying 128 viewing details 129 voiding 128 content report customizing 136 exporting data 136 printing 136 Content Report window 136 contents viewing 135 deposits completing 122 eligible tenders 121 entering 121 modifying 122 new 121 pending transaction 121 122 viewing details 123 voiding 123 non safe options 105 safe options 105 transactions query 137 transaction list 137 transaction list parameters 137 viewing record details 136 transferring tender between 129 withdrawals 126 completing 127 configuration 126 for bank deposit 126 modifying 128 verification 126 127 viewing details 129 voiding 128 Sales Analysis report 308 compiling 308 dat
175. ce window For information about the fields in the window see Customer Maintenance window Demographic tab on page 98 To m odify a customer s record 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Customers The Customer Selection window appears 3 Click Display All The existing customers are displayed in the selection window 4 Click the customer record you want to modify and then click Open The Customer Maintenance window appears containing the customer s information or Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Setting up customers Deleting a customer record If you delete a customet s record it is no longer available at the POS terminal or for any reports that access the customer table The next time a cashier is prompted for the customer s information they will have to re enter it To delete a customer s record 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Customers 3 Click Display All The existing customers are displayed in the selection window We Customer Selection Window Customer Last Name _ First Name Phone Number Jj Hi Dean London 555 i Open New Delete Display Al Query Sort Exit 1 row s found 4 Click the customer record you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The customer s record is d
176. cept for minor adjustments to the quantities required Store Manager provides a feature for maintaining an order guide and an order entry screen to process repeat orders The order guide allows you to create a specific standing order for each customer that pre orders product The order entry screen allows you to create a new order using the pre defined order list and view the current selling prices for that customer You can also see on hand quantity and on order quantity for each product in your store Once complete the order acquires a pending status for payment processing at a later date typically when the customer picks up their merchandise Before you can set up an order guide for a customer you must complete the following configurations e Create a record for the customer e Ensure that the price level value is set to 1 in the Customer Maintenance window gt Loyalty Points tab This applies any discount schemes the customer may be entitled to such as discounts for bulk purchases and so forth e Create an order guide and link it to the customer Note You may create several order guides for one customer to reflect seasonal or other variations in their order requitements To set up a customer to use the order guide feature 1 Onthe Main Menu click File Maintenance 2 Click Customer The Customer Menu appears 3 Click Customers The Selection window appears Ordering receiving and transferring inventory 4
177. cheme the taxes you define on the PLU Maintenance window are applied Click Save and then click Exit To view the future price for an item With a PLU item selected in the Quantity Level Pricing window click the Future Price tab The PLU number description level and quantity information for the selected item appear in the PLU and PLU Desc fields z Quantity Level pricing PREFERRED tT General Future Price PLU fizz45000001 lt z2WLU ese SIKTE gt Level E Quantity 0 Delete Exit Information on an item s future price is displayed in the Effective Date and Future Price fields This information is sent from head office Setting up linked items Modifying a quantity or level pricing scheme You can modify an existing quantity or level pricing scheme To modify an existing quantity or level pricing scheme 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click Quantity Level Pricing 3 Click Display All All of the quantity or level pricing schemes are displayed 4 C ick the scheme you want to modify and then click Open The Quantity Level Pricing Maintenance window displays the information on Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a quantity or level pricing scheme You can delete an existing quantity or level pricing scheme To delete an existing quantity or level pricing scheme 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU
178. ck Exit Viewing a store s information 92 After you have entered a store s information into a record you can view it at any time To open a store s record 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Stores Click Display All The store records are displayed in the window Click the store whose information you want to see and then click Open The Store Maintenance window appears with the store s information displayed Click Exit when you are finished viewing the information Entering another store s information Modifying a store s information You can modify the information in a store s record In the following steps you must enter information into the Store Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Store Maintenance window on page 94 To modify a store s information 1 2 3 1 row s found Display AlI Query Sort Exit On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Stores Click Display All The store records are displayed in the window Pt Stores Selection Window ioj xi Store name tore Name District No Toronto Open New Delete Click the store whose information you want to modify and then click Open The Store Maintenance window appears with the store s information displayed Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a store
179. ck Parameters Setup 2 Click Receipt Logo 3 On the Receipt Logo Maintenance window edit the text in the Header Lines fields to the way in which you want it to appear on the customer s receipt Each string of text can be up to 20 characters long 4 Edit the text in the Trailer Lines fields to the way in which you want it to appear on the customer s receipt Each string of text can be up to 20 characters long 5 Click Save and then click Exit Tip For the line of text to appear bold type a backslash before the first character in the string Preparing to open a new store During the installation of new store management and POS terminal software unwanted data is collected during testing and training Before you begin to use the software in a live environment you must purge all of this data and clean up the system In the following steps you ate required to perform an End of Day Manager code 250 and a New Store Reset Manager Code 418 on a POS terminal More information about manager codes and specifically Manager Codes 250 and 418 is available in the POS Xpress User Manual There are three major tasks that must be completed when you ate preparing to open a store e Perform an End of Day function on a POS terminal e Perform the New Store Reset function on a POS terminal e Perform the Final Clean Up in the Store Manager Before you complete any of the following steps all the store s POS terminals must be closed
180. cted to employees with authority levels of one or higher An employee with an authority level of zero is not able to access any of the windows in the Store Manager To change a user s authority level 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Employee Maintenance g Employee Selection Window 3 On the Employee Selection window click the appropriate employee s record in the selection window 4 Click Open The Employee Maintenance window appears containing the employee s information Click the Authority Level drop down list and select a new level from the list 6 Click Save and then click Exit 33 Customizing Store Manager Adding third party application buttons to windows 34 During a Store Manager session you can launch and use a third party application by clicking a button on a menu window To use this feature you must customize the selection of third party applications that you want to be available and place buttons for launching them on the Store Manager windows In addition you can define in what state an application opens and assign authority levels to it to restrict the employees who can use it Before you complete the following steps you must know the name and path of the third party application s executable If you want a specific bitmap on the application s button you must know the name and path of the bmp bitmap file To add a third party application button to a menu win
181. ction of reasons that appear in this drop down list on the Code Table Maintenance window You can define any notes that you want to record about the transaction Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters in length in the Notes field The Tender field contains the tenders that you can include in the balance A tender is actually included in the balance if you enter a value in the corresponding Amount field on this window Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are available for balance This field contains a list of the tenders that are eligible No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the tenders that are eligible for balance To enter a balance amount for a tender click the tender and complete the fields on the right side of this window To enter an actual amount for a tender click Actual and complete the fields on the right side of this window The System field indicates the amounts of the tenders that are expected in the cash drawer This field is not visible if your head office has used the Configurator to enable blind balancing During a blind balance you do not know the system amount After clicking Balance the Store Manager compares the actual amount with the system amount and alerts you if they do not match No action is requited When you click Balance in this window the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the amount of tender that is expecte
182. ctxn asc 2536 bytes 1 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 43 group asc 162 bytes 10 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 44 export asc 139 bytes 5 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 44 dlisttxn asc 233 bytes 1 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 44 jtidtxn asc 32 bytes 2 records applied on server May 16 12 41 44 jtdtxn asc 23612 bytes 135 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 44 typro asc 329 bytes 5 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 44 typro asec 329 bytes 5 records applied on server May 16 12 41 45 1inktxn asc 253 bytes 4 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 45 1typroel asc 409 bytes 7 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 45 mixmatch asc 1683 bytes 11 records applied on server May 16 12 41 45 negtxn asc 117 bytes 8 records applied on server El gt Server connected l DB connected User McCallum Larry 05 20 2005 02 41 57 PM 3 Click the Log File drop down list A list of the three log files appears 4 Click a file The contents of the log file are displayed in the window Once you have opened a log file you can search through its contents for a text string To search a log file 1 In the Search field type a text string 2 Click Go The Store Manager searches through the log file for a match When all the matching information is found the first piece of it is displayed in the window 3 Click Next to display the next piece of matching information if required 290 Repo
183. d This field defines the quantity of the item you actually count in your store Type a number into the field This field defines the quantity of the item the Store Manager expects to be in the store No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the difference between the quantity on hand that the Store Manager expects and the quantity that you actually count in your store The variance is based on the values in the Quantity and Amount fields in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the total retail price of the number of items in the variance The amount is based on the values in the Retail and the Variance fields in this window No action required The Store Manager completes this field This field generates the Physical Inventory Count Sheet and the Physical Inventory reports The Physical Inventory Count Sheet report contains the same list of PLUs as shown in the Physical Inventory Maintenance window You can generate the Physical Inventory report by clicking View Physical Inventory Report on the Report window The Physical Inventory report contains the information displayed in the Physical Inventory Maintenance window You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of both the reports Click the button This field opens the Inventory Information window The window contains inf
184. d Each item can be eligible for up to 4 mix match schemes You can review the mix match pricing schemes that is setup by your head office in the Mix Match Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Mix Match Maintenance window on page 180 Click the Allow Merch Type MM checkbox to enable a mix match pricing scheme by merchandise type 145 Managing Price Look Ups 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Type the store s cost of the item in the Default Cost field Be sure to include decimal places If the item requires weighing click the Measurement drop down list and select an option To require the cashier to weigh the item click Scale Item on this window To assign a unique number that is used to track the item during order receive and transfer inventory transactions type a number in the Ordering Num field Note The Used By Days and Commission ID fields are not applicable in the Store Manager application To define the size of a PLU type a number that represents the weight or volume of the item in the Size field For example if an item weighs 250 Ibs then type 250 in the Size field and lbs in the Size Unit field After defining the size of the PLU type the unit of measurement of the item in the Size Unit field For example lbs g oz Note that you can use metric or imperial units The Allow PLU Upd checkbox indicates if you a
185. d Inventory Information fields are accessible on all tabs in the PLU Maintenance window WARNING This tab in the PLU Maintenance window is only visible if you check the Maintain Vendor SKU checkbox in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window see Inventory Parameters Maintenance window on page 192 j PLU 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 To complete the Vendor SKU tab 1 To set the ID number of the primary vendor of the item click the Primary Vendor drop down list and select a vendor For information about setting up vendors see Setting up product vendors on page 84 2 You can assign several vendors for an item To assign an ID number of a vendor of the item click the Vendor ID drop down list and select a vendor 3 To define the unique number that the vendor uses to identify the item type a SKU number into the Vendor SKU field 4 To define the cost of the item to the store from the vendor type the cost of the item in the Cost field 5 To define the number of units of the item in each shipping case type a number into the Pack Factor field For example a pack factor of 4 indicates that the item is shipped from the vendor in cases of 4 The number you enter into this field is used as the package size when you order or receive the item For information about purchase orders see Ordering inventory on page 196 For inform
186. d by the day of the week in this field Your head office uses the Configurator to select the fiscal week Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the day selected by your head office Configuring payroll periods A payroll period download parameter file periods asc is applied to a table in the Store Manager SQL database This file consists of the following Period type Period ID Description Start date End date Each row in the periods asc file represents a separate payroll period To configure a payroll period 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Payroll Click Clock In Out Report Click the Payroll Period radio button and select an option from the adjacent drop down list or Click the User defined Period radio button and select a start date and an end date from the adjacent pop up calendars Click Generate Report to display the Clock In Out Summary Report 355 Processing The Payroll Preparing clock in out information for export Before you export clock in out information to a file for your head office you can review and edit the information to ensure it is accurate and complete If the Allow Export of Unconfirmed Clock Time Entries checkbox in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window is clear you also have to confirm the times For information about defining payroll parameters see Configuring payroll parameters on page 353 You must config
187. d contains the total quantity of the item that customers returned to the store The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e Quantity Adjusted This field contains the quantity of the item involved in manual on hand inventory adjustments you made during the period The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e In Stock Quantity Closing This field contains the on hand quantity of the item at the period end date Click on the Closing button to display the closing quantity The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e In Stock Quantity Minimum This field contains the lowest on hand quantity of the item during the period Click on the Minimum button to display the minimum quantity The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e In Stock Quantity Maximum This field contains the highest on hand quantity of the item during the period Click on the Maximum button to display the maximum quantity The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e Quantity Ordered This field contains the quantity of the item that was reflected on purchase orders you issued during the period The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e Quantity Received This field contains the quantity of the item that was received into the store during the period The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e Transfer In This field shows the number of items that were transferred into the store
188. d fields and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK Note that the default date range in the Period fields is based on the previous inventory control period Note The QOH quantity on hand Coleman the report reflects the most recent inventory control period within the specified range of dates on the Criteria window To select a range of items to be included in the report click the PLU fields and type a range of PLU numbers in the fields You can also use the Category Group Department Userflag 1 6 and Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria To define the category that contains the items you want included in the report click the Category drop down list and select a category from the list You can also use the PLU To Group Department Userflag 1 6 and Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria To define the group that contains the items you want included in the report click the Group drop down list and select a group from the list You can also use the PLU To Category Department Userflag 1 6 and Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria
189. d in the Vendor SKU tab of the PLU Maintenance window Include in Suggested Orders This field indicates whether the on hand quantities of this item are selected when the Store Manager generates a suggested order You can define whether the Store Manager includes the item in suggested orders clicking Include in Suggested Orders in the Inventory Control tab of the PLU Maintenance window Min Stock Qty This field contains the minimum on hand quantity of the item The minimum stock amount is used to generate a suggested order You can define the minimum stock on hand for the item using the Minimum Stock on Hand field in the Inventory Control tab of the PLU Maintenance window Max Stock Qty This field contains the maximum on hand quantity of the item The maximum stock amount is used to generate a suggested order You can define the maximum stock on hand for the item using the Maximum Stock on Hand field in the Inventory Control tab of the PLU Maintenance window Quantity On Hand This field contains the current on hand quantity of the item in your store The Store Manager maintains a perpetual count of the item s on hand quantity including sales receiving and transfers Qty Preissued This field contains the quantity of the item that is currently reflected on pending purchase orders The Store Manager maintains this value automatically Qty On Order This field contains the quantity of the item that is currently reflected
190. d in the cash drawer The Short Over field indicates the difference between the actual balance amounts you enter into the fields on the right side of the window and system amounts This field is not visible if your head office has used the Configurator to enable blind balancing The Store Manager compares the actual amount with the system amount and alerts you if they do not match No action is required When you click Balance in this window the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the difference between the actual and system amounts The Total Tenders field displays the totals of the amounts in the Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Depositing tenders into the safe 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 The Lump Sum Denomination button allows you to switch between entering the lump sum amounts or denominations If you are entering the balance amount by denomination the tender denominations are listed in this field Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations ate defined for the tender the denomination button is disabled Use the Denomination button on this window to enter amounts by denomination Once in denomination mode the button s label changes to lump sum Note If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you tha
191. d inventory quantities To set the quantity of an item to a package or case 1 Complete the X Reference and PLU fields and the Capture PLU checkbox For information on cross references see Adding a cross reference on page 169 2 To set the number of items that make up a package type the number in the Package Quantity field 3 The type of package can be anything you want for example a case package or bundle To define the type of package click the Package Type drop down list The type of package is configured in Code Maintenance in the Configurator and through the ID Codes File Maintenance option in the Store Manager About controlled inventory transport permits Transport permits are required for controlled substances such as alcohol If a purchase is more than a specified amount then the shipment must be accompanied by a transport permit To configure the parameters that initiate a printed a inventory transport permit see Adding a PLU on page 143 251 Performing Inventory Control Functions 252 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers This section provides information about configuring the Store Manager to print price stickers and shelf labels It also gives procedures for designing and printing your own custom stickers and labels This section covers the following topics Configuring sticker and label parameters Printing price stickers Printing shelf labels Designing and printing stickers and labels
192. d the first column of stickers or labels Use this field in conjunction with the Margin Top Margin Bottom and Margin Right fields in this window Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field defines the width in inches of the distance between the right edge of the sheet and the last column of stickers or labels Use this field in conjunction with the Margin Top Margin Bottom and Margin Left fields in this window Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field 273 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Field Description Ellipse Height This field defines the vertical radius in inches of the sticker or label You only need to use this option if you select oval in the Shape drop down list in this window Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field Ellipse Width This field defines the horizontal radius in inches of the sticker or label You only need to use this option if you select oval in the Shape drop down list in this window Auction Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field Designing a new sticker or label 274 After you define the sticker or label type you want to use in your custom sticker or label you must define the information that appears on it its location and layout In addition you must define the PLUs you want to print the stickers or labels for For information about defining a sticker or
193. dard reports You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Department Detail report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template ie Department Detail Report By Department Mim x Preview Design On Template Design Made Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Department Report Detail By Department Store s 1 Operator G Green Dept CANDY 50 Period 2 17 99 To 2 16 99 Cashier Reg Date SKU Units Net Sales Discounts 1 000 neice Print Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario Page 1 of 1 2 18 991 6 38 48 Export Exit 319 Reporting Group report The following is a sample Group report For information about how the data in some of the columns is calculated see Department Report on page 318 You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Group report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template ia Gross Profit Report BLOUSES PLU Description SILK TIE SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 01 15 2002 02 41 PM 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 320 lol x Gross Profit Report Retail Avg Cost Avg Net Sales 45 00 0 00 5 284 94 413 19 Using standard reports Categ
194. der Use Vendor Ordering Days checkbox For information about suggested orders see Creating a purchase order from a suggested order on page 198 26 To automatically generate suggested orders as part of the end of day process click the Generate Suggested Orders during the EOD process checkbox Linking a vendor s SKU to a PLU 194 The Store Manager uses PLUs to identify items These PLUs do not necessarily match the SKU numbers the vendors use to identify the same items Once you have defined vendor s SKUs for PLUs you can create purchase orders or receiving transactions using vendor s SKUs to identify items instead of PLUs Before you can link a vendor s SKU to a PLU both the PLU and the vendor must already be defined For information about defining a PLU see Maintaining PLUs on page 142 For information about defining vendors see Setting up product vendors on page 84 To add or modify a vendor s SKU record you must enter information into the Vendor s SKU Maintenance window WARNING You can only assign vendor s SKUs to PLUs if you have checked o the Maintain Vendor SKU checkbox in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Linking a vendor s SKU to a PLU Vendor s SKU Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for linking a vendor s SKU for an item to its corresponding PLU J Vendor SKU New _ oy x Vendor Id f Vendor Name super vendor endor SKU
195. der to open and view information in the corresponding window click the View Level drop down list and choose an authority level from the list Click Save and then click Exit Using security features To restrict access to reports 1 On the Main Menu click Parameters Setup 2 On the Parameters Setup Menu click Report Mngmt Security a Report Management Security Setup Note Report Design and Report Export are automatically displayed in the Function Description column 3 To prevent the Reports Design On and Reports Export buttons from displaying to the user and therefore disable that user from using these functions click the Authority Level drop down list and select 6 Disabled 4 Click Save and the Exit Cash management security Cash management authority levels are assigned separately from all of the other features that require a security setup You can define view and update authority levels for each safe and each applicable transaction type Once the setup is complete it is exported from the Store Manager as the cmsecut asc file The file is then applied by the Xpress Server and can be downloaded to the POS terminals Note Each safe is configured separately in the Configurator application You can have access to five safes 31 Customizing Store Manager 32 To assign authority levels for each safe and transaction type On the Main Menu click Parameters Setup On the Security Menu click
196. ders 211 items without purchase order by case 218 partial orders 222 printing report 223 report 223 voiding transactions 224 Receiving New window parameters 220 receiving by case function 218 Receiving by Case parameters Receiving Selection window 219 receiving by case transaction 218 Receiving by Case window 219 parameters 220 receiving inventory 211 See receiving receiving orders See also receiving converting from purchase orders 211 Receiving report example 224 Receiving Report window 224 Receiving Selection window 211 Receiving by Case parameters 219 Receiving Transactions parameters 212 receiving transactions 213 by case 219 completing 223 converting purchase orders 211 creating 211 items without purchase order 218 partial orders 222 pending 223 printing report 223 receiving by case function 218 report 223 voiding 224 Receiving Transactions parameters Receiving Selection window 212 Receiving window 213 219 parameters 213 records 14 customer 95 accessing 95 creating 95 96 deleting 97 extended fields 95 maintaining 96 modifying 96 customer information 95 displaying all in a table 17 employee 57 finding 17 for other stores create 91 in tables adding 15 deleting 17 displaying all 17 modifying 17 searching 17 sorting options 36 sorting order 17 updating 12 maintenance 14 new store deleting 93 modifying 93 viewing 92 product vendor creating 84 deleting 86 modif
197. ding vendor s coupons Note Your head office uses the Configurator to define discounts Only discounts with the Affect Net checkbox selected in the Configurator are included in this total Total gross sales total taxes total reductions to gross Total sales of the non merchandise items not included in the Total Gross Non Merch Sales figure Note Your head office uses the Configurator to define non merchandise items Only non merchandise items without the Add to Gross checkbox selected in the Configurator are included in this total Total of tender coming into the store that is not a direct result of a merchandise sale including additional amounts deposits and fees Total of reductions not included in the Total Reductions to Gross figure including vendor s coupons Note Your head office uses the Configurator to define discounts Only discounts without the Affect Net checkbox selected in the Configurator are included in this total 307 Reporting Column Formula Total Accountability Total of all figures This figure always balances to the Total Tenders figure Total Tenders Total of all tenders This figure always balances to the Total Accountability figure Sales Analysis The Sales Analysis Report provides added detail about the information on the Sales report The Store Manager compiles the Sales Analysis and the Sales reports based on the same criteria To compile the Sales Analysis Report
198. dow To define the user flag option for which you are setting promotional prices click the User Flag 1 6 drop down list and select an option If you click the User Flag 1 drop down list you can select User Flag 1 options If you click the User Flag 2 6 drop down lists you can select User Flag 2 6 options The PLU s that are assigned the user flag option you select in this drop down list are affected by the promotional price You can select from the user flag options assigned to user flags 1 6 You can only use this field if you click By Merch Type in this window You can assign user flag options to PLUs using the User Flags 1 6 drop down lists in the PLU Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The PLU Maintenance window User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab on page 147 You can set a price range so that the promotion affects only those products within the set range Click the first Price Point field and type a from price then click the second Price Point field and type a to price To qualify the item for more than 1 active promotion click the Accumulate checkbox to allow more than 1 promotion to be applied to a single PLU You must click this radio button if the item is an exception to a promotion or if the merchandise type contains exceptions For information about defining exceptions to promotions see Defining an exception to a promotion on page 189 Click the Promo Method Applied To drop down
199. dow 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click 3rd Party Parameters g 3rd Party Programs Menu Selection Window O x Menu Parms Administration Menu Window 0 Cash Management Menu Window 0 File Maintenance Menu Window Labels Maintenance Menu Window Label Parameters Menu Window Main Menu Window for POS Manager Ancestor Menu Window POS Manager Parameters Menu Window Payroll Menu Window PLU Management Menu Window o o o o o o o oa il Open 16 row s found Exit 3 Click the Store Manager menu window that you want to contain the third party application s button from the menu list Adding third party application buttons to windows 4 10 11 12 Click Open Te 3rd Party Programs Setup veu FRinstaionWeniWindow O O 7 fe M Note The Store Manager automatically completes the Menu field with the name of the window that you choose in the selection window No further action is required To assign a name to the third party application s button in the menu window type the name of the button in the Label field To sort the order of the applications type a number in the Picture checkbox to indicate the order in which this particular application will appear To locate the bitmap that appears in the third party applications button in the menu window type the full path and name of the bitmap file in the Picture field T
200. drop down list see Populating drop down lists on page 63 17 To assign a status to the customer click the Status drop down list and select a customer status from the list of options You define the selection of customer statuses that appeat in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For more information about populating the drop down list see Populating drop down lists on page 63 18 To record reference information about the customer type the information in the Reference 1 field 19 To record reference information about the customer type the information in the Reference 2 field 20 To open the Extended Customer Fields window click Extended Fields This button is only available after you save any changes you have made to the customer s record For more information about extended fields see Maintaining extended customer fields on page 99 Customer Maintenance window Loyalty Points tab To complete the customer Loyalty Points parameters 1 Type the customer s number last name and first name in the appropriate fields 2 Price levels are defined by your head office using the Configurator application Type the number that is associated with the customert s price level in the Price Level field 3 Automatic discounts are defined by your head office using the Configurator application Type the number associated with the customet s automatic discount status in the Automatic Discount field
201. ds in the Payroll Clock In Out Report Criteria window Field Description Payroll Period This field defines the report period as all the periods up to and including the User defined Period All Employees Selected Employee Generate Report current period You can also use the User defined Period fields to select the report period Action Click the radio button This field defines a range of dates for the report period You can also click Payroll Period to select the report period Action Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar Click a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field This field determines if you want to include information for all the store s employees on the report Action Click the radio button This field determines if you want to include information for 1 employee on the report Action 1 Click the radio button 2 Type a cashier number into the field This field generates the report based on the criteria in the window For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Action Click the button 315 Reporting Payroll Clock In Out Summary report The following is a sample Payroll Clock In Out Summary report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Payroll Clock In Out Summary report For information about the template designer see Us
202. ds the completed transfer You cannot void a transfer until you have completed it For information about voiding a transfer see Voiding a transfer on page 233 Click the button Completing a transfer An inventory transfer has a status of pending until you complete it You cannot modify a transfer after you complete it To complete a transfer 1 Create a new transfer or open a pending transfer 2 Click Complete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to complete the transfer 3 Click OK The dialog box closes The transfer s status changes to complete Printing a transfer report You can print a transfer report containing the information from the transfer displayed in the Inventory Transfer by PLU window or the Inventory Transfer by Case window The Transfer report is linked to the report template designer You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Transfer report Ordering receiving and transferring inventory To print a Transfer report 1 Create a new transfer or open a pending transfer 2 Click Report The Transfer report is displayed in the report window ey Transfer Report ioj x Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Gave lempate Delete Template Report of Transfer In by PLU Document Number Transfer Store Transaction Date Transfer Number Transfer Date Reason Origin Store Phon
203. e Payroll Parameters Maintenance window on page 354 Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the date This field opens the Payroll Clock In Out Detail Calendar View window This window displays the employee s clock in out information in a different format You can edit the information in the calendar view window Action Click the button This field contains the unique number that identifies the employee Auction No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the employee number of the employee you select in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window This field contains the employee s last name Auction No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the last name of the employee you select in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window This field contains the employee s first name Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the first name of the employee you select in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window This field defines the date and time the employee clocked in There is one entry in this field for each time the employee clocks in Action The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it To edit the information in the box 1 Click the button beside the field to open the popup calendar window Click a date and click
204. e Populating drop down lists on page 63 Click the drop down list and select a ship type from the list This field defines the type of receiving transaction you ate creating You must complete this drop down list if you click Receiving Type Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window You can define the selection of receiving types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a receiving transaction type from the list This field defines a unique number that identifies a discrepancy between the quantity of items expected in the transaction and the quantity of items actually received You must complete this field before you complete the transaction if you click Receive Discrepancy Number Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Type a number up to 17 characters long into the field Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Number of Cases Total Inv Cost Note Hash Qty Origin PLU XREF Description Expected Qty Actual Qty Short Over This field defines the number of cases of items shipped to your store Type a number into the field This field defines the total cost to the store of the items shipped to your store Type a currency amount into the field This field defines any notes regarding the receiving transaction Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters long in
205. e Hash Qty Fax Vendor Ship Via Status Note Item PLU XREF Description Dept Retail Quantity Quantity Short Amou Price Expected Received Over 5 12 99 09 23 50 3 Click Print A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the printing 4 Click OK The Store Manager prints the report on the printer defined as the default printer and the report remains displayed on your screen in the report window Voiding a transfer You can void a transfer if it has a status of complete A voided transfer remains visible in the Store Transfer Selection window You can open it to see the information in it but you cannot modify it To void a transfer transaction 1 Create a new transfer or open a pending transaction 2 Click Void A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm you want to void the transfer 3 Click OK The transfer is voided 233 Performing Inventory Control Functions Viewing inventory information You can review detailed inventory information about the items in your store using the Inventory Information and Inventory History windows To review an item s information the item must be inventory controlled You can mark an item as inventory controlled by clicking Inventory Control in the PLU Maintenance window and you can enter the initial on hand inventory information for the item in the Inventory Control tab of the PLU Maintenance window To open the Inventory Information window e Click Inventory
206. e To define the type of package click the Package Type drop down list The type of package is configured in Code Maintenance in the Configurator Click Save To complete the Inventory Control Itab 1 2 3 To display the Inventory Control tab click the Inventory Control checkbox a X Reference New Click the Include in Suggested Orders checkbox Click Save and then click Exit Modifying a cross reference You can modify a cross reference To modify a cross reference number for a PLU 1 2 3 4 on On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click PLU Xref Click Display All All of the cross references are displayed Click the cross reference that you want to modify and then click Open The X Reference Maintenance window displays the information Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a cross reference You can delete a cross reference To delete a cross reference 1 2 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click PLU Xref 171 Managing Price Look Ups 3 Click Display All All of the cross references are displayed a X Reference Selection Window lof x PLU Reference Capture PLU 12345000009 12345000024 12345000012 12345000006 12345000013 71 row s found Display All Query 4 Click the cross reference you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box
207. e You can define the item s retail price in the Retail Price field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window Use Dept Settings This field indicates whether item or department settings are used for determining the item s prices You can define whether the Store Manager uses item or department settings using the Use Department in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window Sugg Retail Price This field contains the item s suggested retail price You can define the suggested retail price in the Sugg Price field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window Package Qty This field indicates how many of the item ate in a package You can define the package size in the Package Qty field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window Cost This field contains the item s cost You can define the item s cost in the Default Cost field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window User Flags 1 6 These fields indicate the user flags to which the item belongs You can assign the item to user flags using the User Flags 1 6 drop down lists in the PLU Page 2 tab of the PLU Maintenance window Vendor This field contains the ID number of the item s vendor The adjacent field contains the name of the item s vendor You can define the product s vendor using the Vendor ID field in the Vendor SKU tab of the PLU Maintenance window You can define the product s vendor using the Vendor ID fiel
208. e 131 setting parameters 133 Safe Balance Selection 132 Safe Content Report 136 Safe Contents 135 Safe Deposit Maintenance 122 setting parameters 124 Safe Deposit Selection 121 Safe Management 106 Safe Transactions 129 Safe Transfer setting parameters 130 Safe Transfer Selection setting parameters 129 Safe Withdrawal New 127 Salesperson Report Criteria 325 setting parameters 325 Select Display Type 212 Select Display Type Purchase Orders Selection 196 Select PLU 141 Select Suggested Order Type 198 Server Log 364 Server Message Log 364 Server State Information 363 Set Sort Order 38 Single text Translation 28 Sort Setup 36 Specify Sort Columns 37 Standard Labels Format Maintenance 257 Store Administration 43 49 51 Store Maintenance 93 setting parameters 94 n ore Manager Parameters Menu 13 n ore Transfer setting parameters 226 Store Transfer by Case 230 setting parameters 230 Store Transfer by PLU 225 setting parameters 226 ore Transfer Selection 225 Transfer in by Case parameters 229 n 385 Transfer in by PLU parameters 225 Transfer out by Case parameters 229 Transfer out by PLU parameters 225 Stores Selection 92 93 Suggested Order Statistics 198 Tare Weight Maintenance 89 setting parameters 90 Tare Weight Selection 89 Tax Maintenance 80 82 General parameters 80 Print Options parameters 82 Tax Steps parameters 83 Tax Selection 82 Tender Report setting parameters 313 Tender Report Criteria 312
209. e and can be exported to a file for use by a third party application Your head office uses the Configurator to define fields option types options and option details You can also define options and option details using the Store Manager For example your head office can define a color field and you can define three options white black green You can assign a color option to a PLU Extended fields can have option types and options assigned to them or they can be defined to require you to type information into them Your head office defines extended fields and how you can complete them e Option types Created by your head office and assigned to extended fields They contain options from which you can choose to complete the field The same option type can be assigned to several fields e Options Choices available to fill the extended field They are assigned to option types and appear in drop down lists You can define options and assign them to option types using the Store Manager e Option details Text that provides additional information about the options You can define details for options in the Store Manager For example assume the following field option types options and option details are defined 153 Managing Price Look Ups Recipes field Vegetable recipes option type assigned to the Recipes field Caesar Salad option recipe ingredients and instructions option details Green Beans with Onions option
210. e displayed in the window You may have to click a tab to see them depending on their status To complete the fields in the Transaction List window 1 To select a tender management function click the Txn Type drop down list and select a type from the list The Txn Date field contains the date on which the transaction is created It does not need to match the business date For example you can create a deposit transaction for the previous day a Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar Click a date in the calendar and then click OK b Type a time using the format HH MM SS c Edit the AM PM indicator if required by typing over the existing indicator 137 Tender Management 138 The Business Date field contains the range of business dates for the transaction that you are looking for The Operator field displays the employee number of the person that processes the transaction Type a cashier number in the Operator field To search for transactions that were processed by a particular register click the Register field and type a register number To search for all tenders click the All Tenders radio button To search for a specific tender click the Selected Tender radio button then select an option from the drop down list The Audit tab shows chronologically how the contents of the safe has changed It shows transaction types increases and decreases and other transaction tender amounts
211. e field to open a pop up calendar and select a date b Click OK c Click in the field and delete the default time d Type a new time including AM or PM 6 The Creation Date field defines the date and time of the file s creation No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system time of the computer it is running on 164 Using price batch management functionality 10 11 12 13 14 15 The Last Change Date field defines the date and time of the last instance when the PLU information in the file was modified No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system time of the computer it is running on The Op field indicates that the line has been added or modified No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with Mod modified when you modify or insert a line in the file The PLU field defines the item whose information is being modified You do not type directly in this field When you click Insert the Choose PLU and Operation type window displays a PLU field Type a number into this field Note The fields you see displayed to the right of the PLU field depend on the definition Your head office uses the Configurator to create the fields that can be included in the file To open the selected line for editing click Modify and edit the information displayed in the fields in the bottom of the wind
212. e in the Safe Deposit Selection window They cannot be modified and they do not affect the safe s system amount For information about completing a deposit see Completing a deposit into the safe on page 122 Note To void a deposit it must be performed on the same business day To void a deposit l 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the appropriate Safe Click Safe Deposit O lick Display All The pending completed deleted and voided deposits are displayed in the indow g Click the deposit you want to void and then click Open The Safe Deposit Maintenance window displays the deposit information Click Void The deposit s status changes to voided Click Exit Viewing details of a deposit into the safe You can review the information you entered into a safe deposit transaction regardless of its current status Voided deposits remain visible in the Safe Deposit Selection window To view the details of a deposit 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the appropriate Safe Click Safe Deposit Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided deposits are displayed in the window Click the deposit you want to review and then click Open The Safe Deposit Maintenance window displays the deposit information 123 Tender Management 124 The Safe Deposit Maintenance window This window contains the fields for proc
213. e information a Local File Rebuild Note A parameter download will not occur during a rebuild To perform a local file rebuild 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Administration Click Local File Rebuild On the Local File Rebuild window click the checkboxes beside the files that you want to rebuild Click Start Note The Abort button is active only when a rebuild is in progress You must click the Abort button to stop the regularly scheduled rebuild in order to perform an immediate rebuild in the Store Manager To abort the rebuild process of each file click the Abort button on the Rebuilding Local File pop up window that shows the name of the file being rebuilt and the progress of the rebuild To confirm the abort request click Yes or click No to cancel the request and continue the rebuild process When the local file rebuild is complete the files are saved in the xps txnsave directory 55 Managing the POS Terminals 56 Managing Personnel This section describes the employee maintenance tasks that can be performed using the Store Manager Administrative and personnel maintenance options including maintaining employee files Maintaining employee files You can add modify delete or deactivate employee records in the Store Manager For an employee to use the Store Manager they must have a record Employee records include names and addresses but they also include an authority level
214. e shelf location codes see Maintaining inventory shelf location codes on page 242 Pl Inventory Count Sheet RequiredBy Monday August 09 2004 PLU from 1 to 1 InweBTicket Stock Quantity Shelf Location PLU Number Ordering Description Rtl Price 112266 3301 BALLOONS 40 00 08709 2004 04 19PM_ 123456 back doce E Store 8 874 Exit 241 242 Performing Inventory Control Functions The following is an example of the Inventory Count Sheet showing the Quantity On Hand for a PLU item Li al Inventory Count Sheet 104 PLU from 1 to 1 Ordering Description Rt Price L 1 L 2 r 3901 BALLOONS 400 C Print Tip To enter new ctiteria for the count sheet click Search Mode on the count sheet You return to the Count Sheet window Maintaining inventory shelf location codes This feature allows you to define the shelf location codes for the Inventory Count Sheet To maintain the inventory shelf location codes 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory Adjusting on hand inventory quantities 2 Click Shelf Location Maintenance The Shelf Location Maintenance window appears g Shelf Location Maintenance B x PLU Description 1 COKE 12345000001 SILK TIE 12345000002 B D OXFORD WHITE 16 34 12345000003 COTTON PANT 38 34 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 12345000005 COTTON SLACKS SIZE 12 __ Seve 12345000006 LONG COTTON SKIRT SIZE 8 12345000007 PCS DIGIT
215. e the save options You can configure sorting options in the Sort Maintenance window To configure the sort options 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 From the Store Manager Parameters Menu window click Sort Setup ia Sort Setup Allow Sorting Save Sort Order Save SortbyUserID M 3 Click the Allow Sorting checkbox to change the sort order when you click the column header You can also save the sort order that you define in the Specify Sort Columns window 4 To save the new sort order defined in the Specify Sort Maintenance window click the Save Sort Order checkbox This checkbox is not available unless you enable the Allow Sorting checkbox in this window 5 To save the sort order that you defined using the Specify Sort Columns window and link it to your employee number click the Save Sort by User ID checkbox Each employee can have their own sort settings that are triggered based on the employee number they used to log into the Store Manager This field is not available unless you enable the Allow Sorting checkbox in this window 6 Click Save and then click Exit Sorting by clicking a column header 36 You can sort the table records in a selection window using the values in one of the window s columns The change you make to the sort order using this method is not saved after you close the window Before you can sort by clicking the column header you must click the Allow Sorting checkbox in
216. eason for the failure JEt Terminal Admin Exception Handler ioj x Terminal ID Action oo O fi CASHIER SIGNED ON Retry Signoff Make sure cashier signoff at register Bypass Abort Exit To solve the problem click a radio button in the Action box or you can click Exit to close the window and abort the Close Terminal function 5 Click Exit when the Close Terminal process is complete Tip You can print a hard copy of the messages that appear in the XPS Server Message Box by clicking Print Log The log is printed on the default printer Opening or closing all POS terminals You must close all POS terminals before you initiate the Open All Terminals function You must open all POS terminals before you initiate the Close All Terminals function To open all POS terminals in the store 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 45 Managing the POS Terminals 2 Click Store Administration je Terminal Administration Terminal 1D c T 01 CASHIER 5555 Store Status Store is opened Terminal Administration f Monitor Terminalfs Open Terminal s Open All Terminals Close Terminalfs Close All Terminals XPS Server Message Exit Go ea 3 On the Terminal Administration window click Open Terminals 4 The Open Terminals function begins You can monitor the process in the XPS Server Message Box When the f
217. ed Transferring inventory 224 A transfer records the movement of items between stores or the store and warehouse You can create transfers to record the movement of inventory into or out of your store Inventory can be transferred using PLUs to identify items or items can be transferred by the case Your head office can also create transfers and send them to your store as electronic documents Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Transferring inventory using PLUs When you create a new transfer it has a status of pending The items you ship or receive are not added to your on hand inventory quantities until you complete the transfer For information about completing a transfer see Completing a transfer on page 232 In the following steps you must enter information into the Store Transfer by PLU window For information about the fields in the window see Store Transfer by PLU window on page 226 To create a transfer 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Store Transfer Store Transfer Selection Window Click the Transfer In By PLU tab or the Transfer Out By PLU tab Click New Complete the fields in the Transfer In By PLU window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit ON a 225 Performing Inventory Control Functions Store Transfer by PLU window This window contains the fields used for creating store transfers in or out of the store using PLUs to iden
218. ed to the PLU Number fields in the following windows e PLU Maintenance window e Cross Reference Maintenance window e Global PLU Change Maintenance window e Price Batch Maintenance window e Quantity Level Pricing Maintenance window e Link Item Maintenance window e Purchase Order Maintenance window e Receiving Maintenance window e Store Transfer Maintenance window e Physical Inventory Define window e Inventory Adjustment window e Vendor s SKU Maintenance window e Print Queue Maintenance window e Price Tag Maintenance window e Item Movement Report Criteria window e Inventory Adjustment Report Selection Criteria window e Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria window e Current Inventory Report Selection Criteria window e Gross Profit Report Selection Criteria window Before you complete the following steps you must have a maintenance window open and your cursor positioned in the PLU number field 140 Using the PLU Search window To use the PLU search window to find a PLU 1 Press F12 to display the PLU Search window Select PLU PLU Search 6 FASHION Description BEAUTY E CARD amp GIFT E SHOES amp ACCESSORIES B GROCERY 6 HARD GOODS B All Groups A A A OK Cancel Show All PLUs 2 Double click the category to which the PLU belongs from the list on the left side of the window A list of groups opens below the category 3 Double c
219. efault format for shelf labels For information about defining format IDs see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 Action Click the drop down list and select a format from the list This field determines if the item s cross reference number is used instead of the PLU on labels and stickers Action Click V the checkbox to use the cross reference number instead of the PLU Printing price stickers Printing price stickers When you want to print price stickers you create a queue list of PLUs quantities and formats then you print the queue You can create several queues When you print a queue the Store Manager writes the stickers information in the order in which you placed them in the queue WARNING You can only print price stickers if you click Vv Allow Price Sticker Label Creation in the Label Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the Label Parameters Maintenance window see General Label Parameters Maintenance window on page 259 You can only create a price sticker queue after you define format IDs Formats define the information that is printed on the stickers When you print price stickers you can either use the default format for the item or you can use another format The default format for each item is defined in the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window For information about defining price sticker formats see Creating label and sticker formats
220. efine the cashier or register that the tender is being loaned to type a cashier or register number in the Register field Your head office uses the Configurator to define whether loans are performed by the cashier or register Note that the field name reflects the setting The Txn Status field indicates the loan transaction s status pending completed deleted or voided No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Operator field displays the employee number of the person that processes the loan transaction No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the employee number of the person who last dealt with the transaction The Txn Date field contains the date on which the loan transaction is created No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system date of the computer it is running on The Business Date field contains the current business date Note that this date can be different than the system date 107 Tender Management 108 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 If a reason is mandatory select the reason that you are performing the loan from safe transaction from the Reason drop down list You define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list on the Code Table Maintenance window You can define any notes that you want to record about the loan transaction Type an
221. egory Group Department Userflag 1 6 and the Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria To select the category to which the items belong that you want included in the report click the Category drop down list and select a category from the list To select the group with items you want included in the report click the Group drop down list and select a group from the list To select the department with the items you want included in the report click the Department drop down list and select a department from this The Userflag 1 6 fields define the user flag option that is assigned to the items you want included in the report Click the drop down list and select a user flag option from the list To specify the supplier of the items you want included in the report click the Vendor drop down list and select a supplier from the list To specify specific adjustment types click the Adjustment Transaction Type drop down list and select a type The available types are e Sale e Return e Received e Apply e Manual Adjustment e Transfer In e Transfer Out e Physical Inventory e Reset e New Item e Item Deleted e In Store Transfer e Inventory Adjustment from Head Office e PDT Sale e PDT Return e PDT Pickup e PDT Cancel To generate the report based on the above criteria click Generate Report For more information about g
222. elect a ship type To control the percentage of the allowed difference between the expected quantity and the actual quantity type a value in the Short Over Qty Threshold Percent field If the actual quantity entered is not within the given percentage of the expected quantity a warning is issued 193 Performing Inventory Control Functions 21 To require a ship via selection from the Ship Via drop down list in the Transfer window click the Ship Via Required checkbox If you click this checkbox you cannot complete the receiving transaction until you select a ship via 22 To require a selection from the Reason drop down list in the Physical Inventory Maintenance window click the Physical Inventory Reason Required checkbox If you click this checkbox you cannot complete the transaction until you select a reason 23 To define the frequency with which inventory is tracked click the Period Type drop down list and select Monthly or Daily 24 To define what is included when the Store Manager traces changes to the on hand quantities of inventory controlled items click the Trace Type drop down list and select a trace type A Basic trace includes manual adjustments receiving and transfers An All Changes to QOH traces includes all activity that affects on hand quantities 25 To determine whether the Store Manager uses the order days as defined in the Vendor Maintenance window when it is generating a suggested order click the Suggested Or
223. elete Exit ddd Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Refer to the section Maintaining employee files on page 57 for information about what you should enter into each of the fields in the maintenance window Click Save and then click Close Once you have added a record to a table you can modify or delete it About the navigation system Modifying a record in a table You can modify records in a table by entering information into the fields in its maintenance window You select the appropriate record in the table s selection window and open the maintenance window When a table contains many records it can be difficult to locate the record you want to modify There are two functions you can use in the Store Manager to help you locate the record you want e You can change the order in which the records are displayed in the selection window For information about changing the sort order of records see Sorting table records in selection windows on page 36 e You can perform a query to search for a specific record For information about searching for records in a table See Performing a query in a selection window on page 19 Alternatively you can display all the records in the table and choose the record you want to modify The following procedure describes modifying an employee record in the employee table You can apply the same procedure to modifying records in other tables in the Store Manager
224. eleted 97 File Maintenance Features Customer Maintenance window Demographic tab The fields in this window are used for creating customer records m Customer Maintenance of x Demographic Additional Customer Customer fi Last Name Dean First Name London Information Middle Name M Title Mr Gender Male Birthdate 05 1 2 70 Address 1 fiJo Stet Address 2 Prz o City fono State Province Prao Zip Postal M 8L3B5 Telephone 1 416 999 5555 Country Canada Telephone 2 Type E old Reference 1 Status inactive Reference 2 Delete Extended Fields Exit To set the parameters in the Demographic tab 1 To define the customer number type a number up to 14 characters in length in the Customer field To record the customer s last name type their name in the Last Name field To record the customer s first name type their name in the First Name field To record the customer s middle name type their name in the Middle Name field eS To record the customer s title for example Mrs Miss Mr click the Title drop down list and select a title 6 To record the customer s gender click the Gender drop down list and select a gender 7 To record the customer s birthday click the button beside the Birthdate field to open the pop up calendar Click a date in the calendar and then click OK Alternatively you can
225. em date on which the Store Manager is running Document Num This field defines the unique number that identifies the receiving transaction You can modify the document number if you click Modify PO Doc Number in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Type a number into the field Vendor This field defines the vendor that supplies the items you are receiving You must complete this drop down list before you can add items to the receiving transaction Click the drop down list and select a vendor from the list Receive Date This field defines the date the items are received into your store The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field P O Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the purchase order this receiving transaction is based on Type a number into the field 220 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Ship Type Receiving Type Discrepancy Num Number of Cases Total Inv Cost Note Hash Qty Origin Case Number Quantity This field defines how the items are shipped to your store You must complete this drop down list if you click Shipping Type Requ
226. employees must enter their user name and password You can change an employee s password either in the Change Password window or the Employee Maintenance window where you set up new employees For more information about the Employee Maintenance window see Maintaining employee files on page 57 To change an employee s password l On the Main Menu click Administration Using security features 2 Click Change Password Change Password Current Password New Password Verify New Password OK Cancel 3 Inthe Current Password field type the employee s password 4 Inthe New Password field type the employee s new password The characters you type are encoded and displayed as asterisks 5 Inthe Verify New Password field type the new password again The characters you type are encoded and displayed as asterisks 6 Click OK If the passwords you typed into the New Password and the Verify New Password fields are not the same a warning message displays requiring you to retype the password If they match the password is saved 7 Click Exit Restricting access to selected windows and functions You can assign authority levels to the Store Manager windows so that only authorized employees can access them You can define separate authority levels for viewing the information and for updating the information in windows Window level security configuration is performed on the Worksheets Securi
227. enders that are expected in the safe This field is not visible if your head office has used the Configurator to enable blind balancing During a blind safe balance you do not know the system amount The Store Manager compares the actual amount with the system amount and alerts you if they do not match No action is required When you click Balance in this window the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the amount of tender that is expected in the cash drawer The Short Over field indicates the difference between the actual safe balance amounts you enter into the fields on the right side of the window and system amounts This field is not visible if your head office has used the Configurator to enable blind balancing During a blind safe balance the Store Manager compares the actual amount with the system amount and alerts you if they do not match No action is required When you click Balance in this window the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the difference between the actual and system amounts The Total Tenders field displays the totals of the amounts in the Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To define the amount of the selected tender type an amount including the decimal places in the Lump Sum Batch field To select a tender click the tender in the Tender field The Total Lump Sums field displays the total of the lump sum amounts that you enter
228. ened Terminal Administration f Monitor Terminals Open Terminal s Open All Terminals Close Terminal s Close All Terminals PS Server Message Exit j 5 3 Click Monitor Terminal s 4 Click the checkbox beside each POS terminal you want to monitor 5 Click Exit when the Open Store process is complete Monitoring and controlling the POS terminals Tip You can print a hard copy of the messages that appear in the XPS Server Message Box by clicking Print Log The log is printed on the default printer Opening or closing a POS terminal The POS terminal status must be closed before you initiate the Open Terminal function Its status must be open before you initiate the Close Terminal function To open a POS terminal 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Store Administration je Terminal Administration iof x SE J o O B 1 OT CASHIER 5555 Store Status Store is opened m Terminal Administration f Monitor Terminals Open Terminals Open All Terminals Close Terminalfs Close All Terminals XPS Server Message Exit 3 Click the checkbox beside each POS you want to open 4 Click Open Terminal s The Open Terminal function begins You can monitor the process in the XPS Server Message Box When the function is complete the POS terminal status is open Note
229. eneral Parameters gt Physical Inventory Adjustment you can provide the shelf location range here Performing a physical inventory count 4 5 Click Generate Sheet The Inventory Count Sheet is generated and displayed on your screen Click Print The Store Manager prints the count sheet on the printer defined as the default printer jg Inventory Count Sheet iof x Inventory Count Sheet Required By Monday June 03 2002 PLU from 1111 to 9999 PLU Number Ordering Description Rtl Price L71 L72 12345000001 SILK TIE 45 00 12345000002 B D OXFORD WHITE 16 34 39 99 12345000003 COTTON PANT 38 34 19 99 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 49 99 12345000005 COTTON SLACKS SIZE 12 39 99 12345000006 LONG COTTON SKIRT SIZE 8 35 99 12345000007 PCS DIGITAL PHONE MODEL D 1000 24 99 12345000008 LEATHER PHONE CASE 24 99 12345000009 IN CAR CHARGER 35 99 06 08 2002 02 21 PM 1111 MoCalum Lary Print Store 1 Exit Search Mode Parameters which control display of the On Hand Inventory count and Shelf Location are set in the Configurator Transactions gt Inventory gt General Parameters gt Physical Inventory Adjustment If the parameters are not set these headings will not be displayed The following is an example of the Inventory Count Sheet showing the Shelf Location You can click Shelf Location header to sort the inventory items by shelf location then by PLU For information on maintaining th
230. enerating reports see Generating reports on page 297 333 Reporting Inventory Adjustment Report Notes added in the Inventory Adjustment Maintenance window are displayed on the report Wi Inventory Adjustment Report PMPKN BAG PLSTC care 07 02 041258PM_ Caster 7000 oles AAAAAAAAAAAAAMAMAMAA w in SLOOTBAG MR BONES 37752 AVAIL 10 Received 0702 04 01 07 PM Cashier 7000 ma Notes AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAMAAAA f 10014 10014 PMPKN BAG PLSTC AVAIL 10 Tu Received O702 04 01 07 PM Cashier 7000 Notes AAAAAAAAAAAAAAABAMAA The information displayed under the Txn is a TLog generated sequence number created when the inventory adjustment transaction is completed Reg is always 255 within Store Manager 334 Using inventory reports Note This information only appears for adjustment transactions created within Store Manager Any inventory transactions created at the POS are not reflected here n Inventory Adjustment Report B Design On Design Mode Off OnFile No Save Template Delete Template entory Adjustment Report Period 06 01 2004 In Stock 48419611237 559 8PM Cashier 7000 5 INES 37752 AVAIL 10 20 0 48419431107 5600 255 F 7PM Cashier 7000 SS E C AVAIL 10 198 0 48419811237 561 255 al 7 Phd Cashier 7000 Tip To find a PLU click in the PLU field and press F12 The PLU Search window appears Inventory Adjus
231. epancy Num pooo Number of Cases m Total Inv Cost o g0 Note P Hash Oty ft 0 Origin Manual Case Number Quanti ShorOver Complete Totals 0 000 0 000 o void 0 Partial New Save r Receive one Designed Lake 219 Performing Inventory Control Functions The following table contains descriptions of fields in the Receiving by Case window Field Description Txn Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the inventory transaction The inventory transaction number sequence is used for purchase orders receiving transactions transfers and inventory count PLU lists No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a number after you save the transaction Status This field indicates the current status of the receiving transaction Pending The transaction has not been completed and can be modified Received The transaction is complete and cannot be modified Partial Some of the items in the transaction have been received more items on the transaction can be received Void The transaction has been completed and then voided No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Txn Date This field defines the date the inventory transaction is created The transaction date does not need to be the same as the receive date No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the computet s syst
232. equence that is triggered when a cashier enters an item in this department into a transaction Type a prompt identification number in the Prompt ID field Prompts are defined by your head office in the Configurator You can obtain the prompt ID number from your head office To ensure that the prices of the items in this department are positive click the Positive Dept checkbox Clear this checkbox to allow negative prices For example if the items in the department were bottle returns and steam cleaner deposit refunds you would define the prices as negative If a PLU is required for a cashier to sell an item in this department click the PLU Required checkbox Clear the checkbox to allow department sales If a PLU is not required the cashier can sell an item by selecting a department and entering a price at the POS terminal Click on the Cost Required drop down list and select an option Type a tare weight identification number in the Tare Weight field to define the weight of the packaging used for items in this department The weight is deducted from the item s total weight to calculate the price The tare weight is only applied to items that are weighed If the tare weight is different for various items in this department use the Tare Weight field in the PLU Page 1 tab on the PLU Maintenance window to assign tare weights on an item by item basis If the items in this department are weighed click the Scale Item checkbox If only some items i
233. er by and still be considered balanced in the Safe Balance Threshold field in the General Parameters Maintenance window Entering a new safe balance A new safe balance has a pending status until you complete it You can modify the amounts in a pending balance transaction Completed pickups loans withdrawals and deposits are applied to the system tender totals during balancing Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Reason Code drop down list if the Reason parameter is set to mandatory In the following steps you are required to enter information into the Safe Balance Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Safe Balance Maintenance window on page 133 To enter a new safe balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the safe that you are attempting to balance Click Safe Balance Click New Complete the fields in the window as appropriate ON Oe ae be Click Save and then click Exit The Safe Balance Maintenance window closes Tip The Actual fields on the left side of the Safe Balance Maintenance window only display the amounts you enter for balance You cannot edit these fields directly To enter an amount click the tender s row on the left side of the window and enter the amount into the fields on the right side of the window Completing a safe balance A safe balance has a pending status until you complete i
234. er to alter the appearance and layout of the Hourly Sales Summary report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template ja Hourly Sales Report Preview Design On Store 1 Operator G Green Bm x Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Hourly Sales Report Date 2 19 99 Period 2 17 99 To 2 19 99 12 00AM 1 2 00AM 3 Days Weekdays Sun Mon Tue Wed Thr Fri Sat Average Period Transactions Net Sales Items Net Sales Items 09 304M 10 00AM 3 00 37 50 97 46 38 99 3 00 37 50 32 49 1 00 10 00AM 10 304M 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ooo 0 00 0 00 0 00 10 30AM 11 00AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 00AM 11 30AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 30AM 12 00PM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00PM 12 30PM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 30PM 01 00PM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 01 00PM 01 30PM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Print Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario Page 4 of 6 2 19 9910 04 23 E Exit The following table contains the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns Column Formula of total transactions of total net sales of Total Items Sold Average net sales Average Items Average Number of Ite
235. erarchy of categories groups and departments For information about defining the hierarchy see Setting up the product hierarchy on page 65 Tip You can type a unique PLU number into the PLU field or you can click Generate Unique PLU to have the Store Manager create a unique PLU for you and enter it into the field The PLU that the Store Manager creates follows the rules you define in the Leading Digit Merchant ID No of Digits in Sequence and Check Digit ID fields in the General Parameters Maintenance window Maintaining PLUs Adding a PLU You can add a PLU when a new product arrives in the store Before you add any PLUs you must have defined the product hierarchy of categories groups and departments For information about defining the hierarchy see Setting up the product hierarchy on page 65 To create a PLU 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click PLU Maintenance PLU Selection Window Bile Es Dept Number PLU Description Retail Price Vendor Id Click New PLU 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 oj General User Flags Taxes amp ltemizers Vendor SKU Labels Inventory Ctrl Future Prices PLU 12345000004 PLU Desc SILK BLOUS 0 Dept Number fe224 x Dept Desc BLOUSES Retail Price 49 99 Ordering Num Sugg Price 0 00 Default Cost J 0 00 Original Price 0 00 Verify PLU E Promptld l 0 Qty Mode Allowed v PriceLev Flg M Allow
236. eria 296 Item Movement Report Criteria 296 304 setting parameters 304 317 Journal Search 284 285 287 Label Parameter Details Maintenance 253 254 setting parameters 254 Label Parameters Maintenance 259 Link Item New setting parameters 177 Link Item Maintenance setting parameters 177 Link Items Selection 177 Log Files 290 Loss Prevention Report Criteria 321 setting parameters 322 Loss Prevention Summary Report 324 Main Menu 14 Mix Match Maintenance 180 setting parameters 180 181 Mix Match Selection 180 Non Merchandise Report Criteria setting parameters 311 Parameters Menu 256 Payroll Clock In Out Detail 357 setting parameters 358 Payroll Clock In Out Report 315 Payroll Parameters Maintenance 354 setting parameters 354 Performance Report Selection Criteria 344 345 setting parameters 344 Physical Inventory Maintenance 245 Physical Inventory Maintenance window setting patameters 245 Physical Inventory Selection 244 PLU New 143 PLU Maintenance 143 Inventory Control parameters 152 153 Labels parameters 151 PLU Page 2 parameters 147 148 setting Vendor SKU parameters 149 Vendor SKU parameters 149 PLU Search 140 141 PLU Selection 147 PLU Selection window 143 POS Balance Maintenance 116 118 119 setting parameters 119 POS Balance Selection 117 119 POS Loan New 107 POS Loan Safe Maintenance 109 setting parameters 107 POS Loan Selection 109 POS Pickup 114 POS Pickup Selection 111 POS Pickup to
237. erring tenders between safes The safe transfer transaction enables you to transfer tenders between safes If there is more than one potential destination safe you can select it from the safe choice list A transaction involving a particular safe as the source or destination is displayed on the Safe Transfer Selection and Safe Transactions windows To transfer tenders between safes 1 Click Cash Management 2 Click the Safe that you have determined to be the source safe The destination safe is always the default when only two safes exist On the Safe Management menu click Safe Transfer 4 If more than two safes exist select the destination safe from the Safe drop down list 129 Tender Management 130 5 10 11 12 Click New ia 1 Safel Safe Transfer Txn 1 06 06 01 11 24 06 06 2001 Sampl Ete vord The name of the safe that the funds are being transferred from displays automatically in the From field No action is required If there is more than one potential destination safe select the destination safe that the funds are being transferred to in the To field If there is only one potential destination safe then it is automatically selected Click the Reason drop down list and select the reason that you are performing the safe transfer You define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list on the Code Table Maintenance window You can define any notes that you wan
238. ers e Tender parameters e Layaway parameters For information about downloading information from the Configurator refer to the Configurator User Guide You can view information about the status of the three mandatory sets of parameters in the Configurator Parameters window This window also displays information about other parameters that are downloaded from the Configurator You cannot edit the information in the window To access the Configurator Parameters window 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 On the Store Manager Parameters Menu window click Configurator Parameters Configurator Parameters Mandatory Configurator Parameters Register Parameters p efined Tenders fi 0 Tenders Defined Layaway Parameters p efined Other Configurator Parameters Non Merchandise Items Benties Tax IDs Benties Discount IDs Enties Mix Match IDs T Enies Ss Departments FS Entries stiti S Department Groups 26 Entes Department Categories E Entries 13 Getting Started About the navigation system The Store Manager includes a translation feature that allows you to change menu button names field names window titles and message box text The procedures in this manual assume that the default text is used The following windows contain the default menu button names Main Menu The Main Menu window contains the buttons that open other Store Manager menu windows This is the menu you see
239. es after a count 243 ordering 196 parameters configuring 191 physical count 240 adjusting on hand quantities 243 count sheets 240 entering new on hand quantities 244 PLU count lists 243 on hand quantities 244 purchase order converting to receiving orders 211 duplicating 206 issuing 204 manual 196 report 204 voiding 205 receiving 211 by case 218 by PLU or vendor s SKU 211 partial orders 222 voiding transactions 224 receiving by case function 218 reports 332 compiling 332 Current Inventory 338 Gross Profit 340 Inactive PLU 335 Inventory Adjustment 332 List of Orders 236 Performance Detail 344 Performance Summary 344 Transfer 233 using 332 shelf location 242 transfer 224 by case 229 completing 232 creating 225 printing reports 232 using PLUs 225 Transfer report printing 232 transferring 224 uploading levels to corporate office 237 viewing information 234 voiding transfer 233 Inventory Adjustment report 293 332 altering appearance 335 Inventory Adjustment Report Selection Criteria window 332 Inventory Adjustment window 248 249 parameters 249 inventory control 191 196 See also inventory configuring parameters 191 inventory control functions 191 191 ordering inventory manual purchase orders 196 parameters 191 PLUs 191 purchase orders creating 196 issuing 204 manual 196 modifying 197 suggested order 198 suggested order 198 viewing information 234 Inventory Control parameters 152 X Reference windo
240. es this field This field indicates whether the amount of the items on the purchase order is more than the amount in the Min Order field in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the unique number that identifies the item you are ordering Type a number into the field If you click By PLU Xref in the Select Display Type dialog box you must enter the item s PLU or cross reference number If you want to use cross reference numbers only you must click Xreference Only in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance Window For information about defining cross reference numbers see Defining a PLU cross reference on page 169 This field contains the item s description as you defined in the PLU Maintenance window when you defined the PLU No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the quantity of the item you are ordering Type a number into the field This field defines the number of the item that is shipped in each case For example if the number 4 is in this field the item is shipped in cases of 4 No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the number in the Pack Factor field in the Vendor s SKU Maintenance window if vendor s SKUs are being used If you do not enter a number into the Pack Factor field the Store Manager enters the number 1 into this field This field defines
241. essing safe deposit transactions a 2 Safe2 Safe Deposit Txn 6 0 00 06 11 01 15 28 06 07 2001 0 00 0 00 0 00 To complete the Safe Deposit Maintenance window 1 The Txn Num field defines a unique number that identifies the deposit transaction This number is a counter that reflects the number of tender management transactions for example pickups and balances that have been performed This is not the transaction number that is recorded on the TLog The number in the T Log Num field in this window is recorded as the transaction number in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number when you save the transaction The T Log Num field defines the unique number that identifies the deposit transaction in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you complete the balance The Txn Status field indicates the deposit transaction s status pending completed or voided No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Operator field displays the employee number of the person that processes the deposit transaction No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the employee number of the person who logged into the Store Manager The Txn Date field contains the date on which the deposit transaction is created No action is required T
242. et M Max Price 99 999 99 Add Amount 000 Allow Zero Price I Auth Level ff QtyMode Allowed Allow Sale M Menu No Poo Qty Desc ha Allow Exchange M Prompt ID DP AllowDec Qty D Allow Returns M Positive Dept M Allow Rin wo Rept M PLU Required M Allow Discount M Allow Pend Trans M Cost Required None z Auto Disc ID o New Tare Weight 0 AllowEmpl Disc M STE Scale Item L Empl Disc 0 000 Delete Wd Exit In the General tab type a number in the Department field that identifies the department Type a description of the department in the field adjacent to the Department number This field is limited to 40 characters Click the Dept Group drop down list and select the group that the department belongs to You can define the price of all the PLUs in the department Type an amount including decimal places in the Preset Amount field All of the items are then sold at the same price Use the Force Preset option to prevent the cashier from changing the price of an item at the POS Leave this field blank if you do not want all the PLUs in the department to have the same price To make the preset price of an item unalterable at the POS click the Force Preset checkbox Clear the checkbox to allow the cashier to change the preset price of an item in this department To define the minimum price that a PLU in this department can have type an amount including decimal places in the Min Price field To define the maximum price
243. etails 110 log files 290 mix match pricing schemes 179 pickup s details 113 PLU price changes 168 server state information 363 store information 92 voiding balance 118 bank deposit 128 deposit into safe 123 loan 110 pickup from cash drawer 113 purchase order 205 receiving transaction 224 safe balance 132 transfer 233 383 wW warehouse transfer inventory 224 window 384 See also windows Safe Transaction List 136 setting parameters 137 3rd Party Programs Menu Selection 34 3rd Party Programs Setup 35 3rd Party Software Maintenance 14 Average Hourly Sales Report Criteria 327 329 setting parameters 327 Balance Report Criteria 330 setting parameters 330 Cash Management Security Setup 32 Change Password 29 Choose PLU and Operation Type 166 Clean Up Transaction History 54 Code Table Maintenance 64 Column Hide 301 Column Truncation 301 Configurator Parameters 13 Customer Display Maintenance 52 Customer Maintenance 96 Demographic parameters 98 Loyalty Points parameters 99 Customer Selection 96 97 Department New 73 75 General parameters 71 Department Categories Selection 37 67 Department Category Maintenance 65 Department Group Maintenance 68 Department Groups Selection 67 68 Department Maintenance 15 Department Report Criteria 317 setting parameters 317 Departments Selection 15 19 69 70 75 Design Label Definition 270 272 setting parameters 272 Design Labels Selection 270 271 Designed Label Mainte
244. eted only if the price change is related to a batch For information about using the price batch management function to change a PLU s price see Using price batch management functionality on page 162 Defining a PLU cross reference Cross reference numbers are linked to PLUs You can enter cross reference numbers instead of PLUs into PLU number fields in the Store Manager and the cashier can enter them into transactions at the POS terminal A cross reference number can represent a single PLU or multiple PLUs that each have the same retail price Before you define a cross reference number for a PLU the PLU must be defined in the PLU Maintenance window and your head office must enable the cross reference feature in the Configurator Adding a cross reference The PLU must be defined before you can create a cross reference number to represent it For information about defining a PLU see Adding a PLU on page 143 In the following steps you ate required to enter information and make selections in the Cross Reference Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Click New on page 170 To add a cross reference number for a PLU 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 169 Managing Price Look Ups 170 2 Click PLU X Reference a X Reference Selection Window 0 x x Reference Capture PLU 1111 12345000001 123450000014 12345000002 123450000021 12345000002 2222
245. eters 1 2 10 Type a unique number in the Vendor ID field that identifies the vendor The Vendor Name field contains the vendor s name The text you type into this field appears in drop down lists where you select a vendor Type an alphanumerical string up to 35 characters long into the field Type the number and street portion of the vendor s address in the Address field Type the city portion of the vendor s address in the City field Click the State Province drop down list and select the vendot s state or province You define the selection of states and provinces that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For more information about populating the drop down list see Populating drop down lists on page 63 Type the zip United States or postal code Canada portion of the vendot s address in the Zip Postal field To defines the type of products the vendor supplies to your store click the Vendor Type drop down list and select a type from the list You define the selection of vendor types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For more information about populating the drop down list see Populating drop down lists on page 63 Type the vendor s fax number without hyphens or brackets in the Fax field You can type up to 10 characters To define the name of the store s first contact person in the vendor company type the contact name in the
246. eters Maintenance window general parameters 259 labels and stickers defining parameters 259 designing and printing 269 formats creating 255 deleting 256 modifying 256 printing labels 264 creating a queue 264 deleting a queue 266 modifying a queue 265 printing a queue 266 printing stickers 261 creating a queue 261 deleting a queue 262 modifying a queue 262 printing a queue 263 Labels parameters PLU Maintenance window 151 launching macros 332 layaway parameters 13 level pricing scheme 172 adding 173 deleting 175 modifying 175 setting up 172 licensee order guide 206 Link Item New window setting parameters 177 Link Item Maintenance window parameters 177 Link Items Selection window 177 linked item adding 176 deleting 178 modifying 178 setting up 175 linking vendor s SKU 194 List of Orders report 236 loan completing 109 entering 106 float 106 modifying 110 pending loan transaction 106 modifying 110 performing 106 safe 109 viewing details 110 voiding 109 110 log files 290 seatch 290 view 290 372 Log Files window 290 Loss Prevention Detail report 324 altering appearance 325 compiling 324 example 325 Loss Prevention report 292 Loss Prevention Report Criteria window 321 parameters 322 Loss Prevention Summary report 321 altering appearance 324 example 324 parameters 321 Loyalty Points parameters Customer Maintenance window 99 M Macro List Menu reports 331 macros 331 See also report macros lau
247. etn plete Performance Detail Report Department TIES BLOUSES Preview Split View PLU Number Description Sold Net Sales Average Cost Last Sold Retail 12345000001 SILK TIE 3 000 Wa m nas ma ma o S BLOUSES 2224 Print 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 6 000 284 94 47 49 0 00 01 15 02 49 99 Export 6 000 284 94 47 49 0 00 49 99 2 Total 9 000 413 19 45 91 0 00 94 99 01 15 2002 11 06 AM 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 Exit e To show or hide the criteria used to generate this report click the Show Hide Criteria toggle button Pending Transactions 346 The Pending Transactions Reports provide information about pending transactions of a specific type or status The reports include information such as the transaction type number status date pick up date total amount customer data payments and bins location As with other reports you can send print and export the reports by clicking on the corresponding button in each report window Three types of report can be generated a regular report a report sorted by item and a details report each of which ate described in the following pages You can seatch for pending transactions by the creation date the last paid date within a specified period report type by item overdue by more than a specified number of days category group or by department Using inventory reports Pending Transactions Report Cr
248. ets Click the In Stock Quantity checkbox or leave it unchecked 10 You can generate the report to show All Buckets No Buckets or Selected Buckets Click the appropriate radio button to display the required Buckets in the report 11 The three Buckets in the example window above are defined as Available Allocated and Not For Sale Click one or all of the checkboxes to generate the report with information on the selected Buckets 12 To generate the report based on the above criteria click Generate Report For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Tip To find a PLU click in the PLU field and press F12 The PLU Search window appears Current Inventory Reports The following is a sample of a full Current Inventory Report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Current Inventory Report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template lol x jg Current Inventory Report Design On Design Modef Off On File No Beye Metal ate pelete wen pl ate Current Inventory Report Department BLOUSES Item ID 12345000004 12345000004 Quantity Allocated Not For Sale In Stock Items Total i 499 90 0 00 Send All Items Total 10 000 499 90 0 00 Print Item Count 01 24 02 15 40 1111
249. f PLU numbers in purchase orders receiving transactions and transfers click the Xreference only checkbox If you use cross reference numbers instead of PLUs you cannot enter PLUs into the PLU Xref fields in the Purchase Order window or Receiving window For information about defining cross reference numbers see Defining a PLU cross reference on page 169 To define the minimum authority level an employee must have to delete a purchase order receiving transaction or transfer using the Delete button on the appropriate selection window click the Delete Inv Transaction Authority drop down list and select an option If you select 6 inventory transactions cannot be deleted If you must complete the Order Type drop down list in the Purchase Order window click the Order Type Required checkbox To display the By Case tab click the Activate By Case Tab checkbox When enabled this feature allows the receipt of inventory by the case If the quantity you enter into the Act Qty field must match the quantity you enter into the Hash Qty field in the Receiving Maintenance window click the Received Qty and Hash Qty Have to Match checkbox The hash quantity is the total number of pieces you expect to receive in the order If you click this checkbox and the quantity you receive does not match the hash quantity you cannot complete the receiving transaction To capture all the items in receiving transactions individually click the Capture All
250. f x Design On Design Modef Off On File No Saye Meni plete Delete Tempie Performance Summary Repor Department TIES BLOUSES Period 12 01 42001 12 31 2001 Department Description Sold ____NetSales ___ QOH QOH Cost Order Cost __ 2221 TIES 5 000 0 00 0 00 2224 BLOUSES 9 000 0 00 0 00 Bo Total ooo 8080 s0 14000 o0 o 0 00 01 15 2002 10 31 AM 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 e To show or hide the criteria used to generate this report click the Show Hide Criteria toggle button Performance Detail The Performance Detail report contains detailed information about sales costs on hand quantities and quantities on order The Performance Summary report and the Performance Detail report use the same criteria window For information about the fields in the Performance Report Selection Criteria window see Performance Report Selection Criteria window on page 344 Performance Detail report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Performance Detail report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 The dates shown in the Last Sold column associated with a specific PLU reflect the most recent inventory period within the date range specified on the Criteria window 345 Reporting ia Performance Detail Report ioj x Design On Design Mode Off On File No Seve Neti ete pelet
251. fe modifying withdrawal 128 into bank from safe 126 completing withdrawal 127 viewing details of withdrawal 129 voiding withdrawal 128 into safe 121 completing 122 entering 121 modifying 122 new 121 pending transaction 121 tenders 121 viewing details 123 voiding 123 design for sticker or label creating custom 274 Design Label Definition window 270 272 parameters 272 Design Labels Selection window 270 271 Designed Label Maintenance window 274 278 parameters 278 280 designing report template 300 stickers and labels 269 274 detailed safe transactions viewing 136 details of bank deposit viewing 129 drop down lists 63 adding selections 64 editing 65 populating 63 product vendors 84 query records 19 duplicating purchase order 206 E editing a batch 165 EJProcessor electronic journal update 286 EJProcessor window 286 electronic journal See also journal files EJProcessor 286 Electronic Journal Viewer 283 Multi Journal Search parameters 288 patameters 288 Printing Method parameters 289 Search Criteria parameters 289 updating 285 286 multi journal search 288 opening file 287 printing method parameters 289 search parameters 289 searching for transactions 288 selecting a journal 285 setting up 283 284 updating 285 updating with third party applications 285 EJProcessor 286 electronic journal files See journal files Electronic Journal Setup window 283 parameters 284 Electronic Journal Viewer 287 288 Multi Jour
252. fies the specific mixmatch or promotional pricing scheme the defined target group is entitled to receive Customers who do not belong to the defined target group do not receive the defined promotional price Common Mix Match scenarios The following scenarios are some of the more common mix match pricing schemes you will see The table below lists the PLUs used in the examples PLU Description Price Options Pkg Orange Golf Balls 10 00 Discountable Enabled Pkg Green Golf Balls 10 00 Discountable Enabled Pkg While Golf Balls 10 00 Discountable Enabled Pkg Red Golf Tees 15 00 Discountable Enabled Pkg White Golf Tees 15 00 Discountable Enabled Pkg Blue Golf Tees 15 00 Discountable Enabled Black Golf Hat 20 00 Discountable Enabled Brown Golf Hat 20 00 Discountable Enabled White Golf Hat 20 00 Discountable Enabled e Buy any 2 items of the same price and get the third same priced item for free In this scenario if you buy 2 packages of golf balls the third package is free On the Mix Match Maintenance Window the Calculation at Total Time and Complete MM checkboxes are checked The Match Price and Sell Price fields for the first two packages equals 10 00 For the third package of golf balls the Match Price equals 10 00 and the Off field equals 100 e Buy 2 of the same item and get the third of the same item for free In this scenario if you buy 2 packages of golf balls of the same color you get the third package
253. from another store e Transfer Out This field shows the number of items that were transferred out of the store to another store e Net Sales Total This field contains the total net sales amount for this item e Received Cost This field shows the cost of the items received into inventory Uploading inventory information to the corporate office Knowing the inventory levels of the stores in your chain allows yout corporate or head office to make better buying decisions for your overall organization You can send your head office a snapshot of the inventory levels in your store at a specified time using the Inventory Upload feature This feature works by allowing you to define a triggering date on which an inventory upload file is created This file is activated at the end of the defined day at store closing Information in the upload file provides your head office with an up to the minute overview of the inventory levels in your store To be fully configured this feature requires the following additional configurations outside the Store Manager application e Configure the Upload Trigger file See the Download File Formats section of the Technical Reference Guide e Configure a generic inventory file See the TLog Data Capture Formats section of the Technical Reference Guide e Ensure that the Period Type option in Configurator is set to Daily Transactions gt Inventory gt General Parameters gt General tab Any ot
254. g an employee sale transaction click the Allow Empl Disc checkbox Type an amount that represents the discount that is allowed on employee sale transactions in the Empl Disc field Setting up the product hierarchy 30 To enable a cashier to enter items in this department in to a regular sale transaction click the Allow Sale checkbox 31 To enable a cashier to enter items in this department in to an exchange transaction click the Allow Exchange checkbox 32 To enable a cashier to enter items in this department in to a return transaction click the Allow Returns checkbox 33 To enable a cashier to enter items in this department in to a return transaction without a receipt click the Allow Rtn w o Rept checkbox 34 To allow pending transactions on items in this department click the Allow Pend Trans checkbox 35 Click Save and then click Exit Assigning taxes to a department The Taxes tab contains the fields used for defining the taxes that can be assigned to departments To assign taxes to a department 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Departments The existing departments are displayed in the selection window 3 Click Open to open the department to which you want to apply the taxes 4 Click the Taxes tab 5 Click the Itemizer 1 4 checkboxes that define the itemizers applied to items in this department You can use up to 4 itemizers to restrict the tenders that a customer ca
255. g status until you complete it You can modify the amounts in a pending deposit transaction Pending deposit amounts are not applied to the safe contents For information about completing a deposit see Completing a deposit into the safe on page 122 Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Reason Code drop down list To enter a new deposit into the safe 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the Safe that is to receive the deposit Click Safe Deposit Click New 121 Tender Management 5 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Tip The Amount fields on the left side of the Safe Deposit Maintenance window only display the amounts you enter for deposit You cannot edit these fields directly To enter an amount click the tender s row on the left side of the window and enter the amount in the fields on the right side of the window Completing a deposit into the safe A deposit has a pending status until you complete it Completed deposit amounts are added to the safe s contents You cannot modify a completed deposit but you can void it Note that it must be voided on the same business day If you find an error in a completed deposit you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a deposit see Voiding a deposit into the safe on page 123 To complete a deposit into
256. ge 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field opens the Price Tag window You can use the Price Tag window to design price stickers or shelf labels for the item Click the button This field opens the Print Queue Selection window You can use the Print Queue Selection window to create a price sticker queue that you can print Click the button This field opens the Print Queue Selection window You can use the Print Queue Selection window to create a shelf label queue that you can print Click the button This field generates a Receiving report and displays it in the report window on your screen For more information about the Receiving report see Printing a Receiving report on page 223 Click the button This field opens the Inventory Information window The window contains information about the item in the line of the receiving transaction that you have highlighted The item in the highlighted line must be inventory controlled For more information about the Inventory Information window see Viewing inventory information on page 234 Click the button This field completes the receiving transaction You cannot modify a receiving transaction after you complete it The transaction s status becomes complete For information about completing a receiving transaction see Completing a receiving transaction on page 223 Click
257. ger In the following steps you are required to enter information and make selections in the Translation window For information about the fields in the window see Translation window on page 26 If WARNING _ If the text you are editing has double slash separators in the original text you must make sure you maintain the pattern when you type the new text For example menu text contains the option text help text short toolbar text and long toolbar text separated by the double slash separators You must use the same pattern when you type the new text To change a single text 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the Main Menu window click Administration O lick Translation O lick Category drop down list A list of categories appears Click the appropriate category Click the Object drop down list A list of objects in the category appears Click the appropriate object An alphabetical list of the text in the object appears in the bottom half of the window Click the text you want to change and then type the new text into the field on the right side of the window Click Save and then click Exit Tip When you select text belonging to a button window title checkbox tab field radio button or other window item you can see immediately what the new text looks like in the preview area at the bottom of the Translation window Changing the text for all the objects in a category The process
258. ght in the Description field another store s information You can create records for the other stores in the Store Manager so you can refer to them later for information such as phone address contact and email address Before you create a store record you must define the selections in the State Province drop down list For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 To add or modify a store record you must enter information into the Store Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Store Maintenance window on page 94 91 File Maintenance Features Adding a new store You can create a new store record Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the State Province drop down list For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 In the following steps you are requited to enter information into the Store Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Store Maintenance window on page 94 To create a new store record 1 2 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Stores 9 Stores Selection Window ioi x EEC EE District No T oronto n New 1 rowfs found Display All Query Sort Exit Click New Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then cli
259. ging the customer display rssrecsinnnnanniin a Changing headers and trailers on receipts Preparing to open a NEW Stofe vse bs Rebuilding local tiles penh esni iee er ides a ied caesar RAE ae enseny Chapter 4 Managing Personnel Maintaining employee fil s cccsicssccsicssetisiesassebeesacebbsncsedetasdobisiadescsardeserectessunieseesits 57 Adding n employ record iseinean 58 Modifying an employee s record sssssssssssssssssssssesssseessstrssssreessnstssnrresnnrreessee 59 Deleting an employee s r cord weecccececseeseeesesessessssessessssessessssessessssesseseaes 60 Employee profiles and overtime calculations ssssssssssssssrssssssessssesssreresssee 60 The Employee Maintenance window oi 61 Chapter 5 File Maintenance Features Populating drop down lists 0 4 Setting up the product hierarchy Defining categories s Adding a category ste Modifying a categOty t aiceniatiuigisrienite ea aa Deleting a category arinen nE T RR NAAN Defining proups srra snari O Adding a proupa n cin E E RE RR Modifying a StOup sanear a a R Deleting A group ari hainin swan Sania RRA AA Defining departments iieii na AARE AEAEE Adding a department sitesi hands R A EANA R RRE Assigning taxes to a department sssssssssssssssssssrresssrsessrsrssssresssrressssees Modifying department ii c ccssceseat ccciedestscasiccacateisactivnegeettacdeainiedeessets Deleting a depattiment o isisiccssicitesicncteteactescscrstsactteineie
260. gistered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB Sweden SAP R 3 mySAP mySAP com xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world Transactionware POS Xpress Store Manager and Configurator are all registered trademarks of SAP Triversity All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Data contained in this document serves information purposes only National product specifications may vary These materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAP AG and its affiliated companies SAP Group for informational purposes only without representation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty SAP Important Disclaimers SAP Library document classification PUBLIC This document is for informational purposes only Its content is subject to change without notice and SAP does not wa
261. h in the PLU Desc field that describes the item The description can appear on the customer display and customer receipt To assign the department to which the item belongs click the Dept Number drop down list and select an option The Dept Desc field contains the description of the department that you select in the Dept Number drop down list on this window No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To set the price that is charged for the item at the POS type a currency amount including decimal places in the Retail Price field To prompt the cashier to verify the item s price when they enter this item into a transaction click the Verify PLU checkbox The default price is the amount you enter into the Retail Price field in this window The cashier can change the price while the prompt is displayed To set the vendor s suggested retail price for the item type a currency amount including decimal places in the Sugg Price field If the original price of the item is different from the retail or suggested price type the original price in the Original Price field If you want the item to be returnable click the Allow Returns checkbox If it cannot be returned the cashier cannot enter it into a return transaction If you want the item to be returnable without a receipt click the Allow Rtn w o Rep checkbox If it cannot be returned without a receipt the cashier cannot enter it into a return wit
262. hata 326 Hourly Sales Summaya annan e a a aa a 327 Hourly Sales Report Criteria Window ssssssssssssssssssssrssssrreessreessrressss 327 Hourly Sales Summary report sss sssssssssssssssssessssesssstesnnresssreensneeensneense 328 Avetage Hourly Sales a A E E A ES 329 Average Hourly Sales report pronecese e Es 329 POS Balance inro na E N E comarca dunia ies 330 Balance Report Criteria WIndOW ssss ssssssssssessssrtssssreessrressnnrsssneresssee 330 Balance teport oea eet a ceeatns 331 MA CEOs annan eneen er hiina eaea tetas E R E R a eaaa 331 Using inventory reports erra aes e E AR A A AE NEEE iE 332 Inventory Adjustment eiaeia i ra E Ea RAE NS R 332 Inventory Adjustment Report Selection Criteria window 332 Inventory Adjustment Report ssssssssssssssssessssrsssstesssrresssreessneresnreeess 334 Inventory Adjustment Report vaneriin n ann E Er 335 Macue PEU ta a e a a e a a tee dates 335 Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria window sss ssssssessssessssseess 336 Tnactive PEU feport soteh iinnat e EREE E 337 Current TOVENAAR RNO 338 Current Inventory Report Selection Criteria window sss ssss sss 338 Current Inventory Reports ssssssssssssssssessssesssrsesssstesssreessreeennneessnerenns 339 GtOss Prot EE vielen A MAE Lee Lele eh tale Bah 340 Gross Profit Report Selection Criteria window s sssssssssssssssseesssees 340 Gross Pront Report aea aitaa aar E nRa 343 P rformanc e Sumimaty opr aoe nA npa o aE A RAE A
263. he Extended Unit and the Cost Price fields in this window No action required The Store Manager completes this field This field defines the retail price for the item You define the retail price in the Retail Price field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the retail price for the items being ordered The total price is based on the values in the Extended Unit and the Retail Price fields in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the department to which the item you want to order is assigned You can assign PLUs to departments using the Dept Number drop down list in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window For information about defining departments see Defining departments on page 69 No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the gross margin the store earns on the item The calculation is based on the difference between the values in the Retail Price and the Cost Price fields No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field indicates the line that is highlighted in the purchase order The Retail Price Ext Retail Dept Gross Mrg Seq and Order Number fields contain the information for the line that is highlighted in the purchase order No action requ
264. he Loss Prevention Summary report The summary report is displayed in the report window 2 Click Details The Loss Prevention Detail report is displayed in the report window Using standard reports Loss Prevention Detail report The following is a sample Loss Prevention Detail report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Loss Prevention Detail report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template P Loss Prevention Detail Report Preview Design On Store s 1 Operator G Green Cashier Reg Date 5555 1 Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario 2 19 9909 54 58 Txn Ref Dpt L L x Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Loss Prevention Report Returns Period 2 17 99 To 2 17 99 Qty Discount Sku Number Amount Reason Print Export Exit Page 1 of 1 Salesperson The Salesperson report contains sales information such as item and amount organized by salesperson Salesperson Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Salesperson report The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Salesperson Report Criteria window Field Description Current Bus
265. he Store Manager Control options include monitoring opening and closing terminals and opening and closing the store Customization options include changing the customer display at the POS terminals and changing the header and trailer text on customer receipts In addition to controlling and customizing options this chapter describes how you can rebuild local files This chapter covers the following topics Monitoring and controlling POS terminals Opening and closing the store Changing the customer display Changing the header and trailer information printed on receipts Rebuilding local files 41 Managing the POS Terminals Monitoring and controlling the POS terminals You can monitor a POS terminal open a POS terminal and close a POS terminal using the Store Manager During the POS terminal opening and closing functions you can monitor a POS terminal status When you close a POS terminal its information is transferred to the server When you open a POS terminal information is automatically transferred from the server to the POS terminal Monitoring a POS terminal 42 The information about the POS terminal you are monitoring appears in the XPS Server Message box in the Terminal Administration window To monitor a POS terminal 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Store Administration je Terminal dministration OF x Terminal ID B 7 0T CASHIER 5555 Store Status Store is op
266. he Store Manager automatically completes this field Txn Date This field defines the date the inventory transaction is created The transaction date Transfer Date Ship Via Carton Count Vendor To From Store Hash Qty Reason does not need to be the same as the order date No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the system date of the computer the Store Manager is running on This field defines the transfer date The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field This field defines how the items are shipped to or from yout store You can define the selection of ship via types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window If you click Ship Via Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window you must complete this drop down list before you can complete the transfer Click the drop down list and select a ship via type from the list This field defines the number of cases included in this transfer Type a number into the field This field defines the vendor of the items included in the transfer You must complete this drop down list before you can add items to the transfer Click the drop down list and select a vendor from the list This field defines the store the items are bei
267. he Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system date of the computer it is running on The Business Date field contains the current business date Note that this date can be different than the system date Depositing tenders into the safe 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Select the reason that you are performing the deposit from safe transaction from the Reason drop down list You define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list on the Code Table Maintenance window You can define any notes that you want to record about the transaction Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters in length in the Notes field The Tender field contains the tenders that you can include in the deposit A tender is actually included in the balance if you enter a value in the corresponding Amount field on this window Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are available for deposit This field contains a list of the tenders that are eligible No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the tenders that are eligible for deposit To enter a deposit amount for a tender click the tender and complete the fields on the right side of this window The Amount field indicates the amounts of the tenders included in the deposit To enter a deposit amount for a tender click the tender in the Tender field and complete the fields in the right s
268. he data in some of the columns e Net Sales Sales total returns voids Non merchandise Detail Report The Non merchandise Detail Report provides detailed information about every non merchandise transaction or non merchandise item The Store Manager compiles the Non merchandise Summary and Non merchandise Detail reports based on the same criteria To compile the Non mercandise Detail Report 1 Select criteria and generate the Non merchandise Summary Report The summary report is displayed in the report window 2 Click Generate Detail Report The Non merchandise Detail report is displayed in the report window 311 Reporting Non merchandise Detail Report The following is a sample Non merchandise Detail Report Non Merchandise Detail Report Non Merchandise Report Detail Report 4 perator Radus Leslie Business Date Range 05 01 2006 05 23 2006 pn Merch Type 0 PM 05 13 06 12 27 PM 7006000991234567 05 13 06 12 47 PM 7006000992314569 05 13 06 12 45 PM 24 2006 01 27 PM Tender The Tender Report provides information about tender usage including number of transactions using the tender and tender totals Tender Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Tender report a Tender Report Criteria 312 Using standard reports To complete the Tender Report Criteria window 1 Ifyo
269. he drop down list Setting up the product hierarchy Note You must type a number in the Code field If you type letters into the field an error message appears when you tty to use the drop down list 6 Type an alphanumeric string up to 30 characters long in the Description field This text appears as the selection in a drop down list 7 Click Save and then click Exit Tip To modify a selection that is already entered click the selection and edit the text in the Description field To delete a selection click the selection and click Delete Once you have populated a drop down list with selections the selections appear when you click the drop down list in the maintenance window where it is located Setting up the product hierarchy All items sold in your store have PLU numbers to identify them Before you can set up a PLU you must define the product hierarchy that classifies PLUs The product hierarchy is as follows from the highest level to the lowest level You must define the hierarchy in this same order from highest to lowest The order is listed below e Categories e Groups e Departments e User Flags You must create a category before you can assign groups to it and you must create a group before you can assign departments to it User flags allow you to further classify items by creating divisions in a department WARNING Your head office can also create categories groups departments and u
270. he fields in the window with the appropriate information including the attachment s file name and file type 3 Click Send The report s data is exported to the file you defined A dialog box appears asking you for the recipient s address The appearance of the dialog box depends on the email system in your store 4 Choose the email recipient using the fields in the dialog box 5 Click OK or the appropriate button to confirm the recipient as correct The recipient is accepted and the email is transmitted Tip To include the report header information such as report title and store number in the data included in the file you must click Include Column Heading in the Send Report Data window 299 Reporting Using the report template designer The report template designer allows you to design new layout templates for many of the reports you can print from the Store Manager You can use the designer to move columns of information change the text of column headings truncate decimal places from columns of numbers and alter other aspects of a report s appearance You must design a new template for each report You cannot design a general template that is used by all the reports You can use the report template designer to create new layouts for the following reports e Item Movement e Payroll Clock In Out Summary and Detail e Department e Loss Prevention e Hourly Sales Summary and Average Hourly Sales e Sa
271. he fields used for setting up how tax information is printed on receipts and reports The field descriptions follow 82 a Tax LOCAL TAX Setting up taxes To set the Tax Print Options parameters 1 To print the tax description on the customer s receipt even if the tax is not charged click the On Receipt checkbox 2 To print the tax description on the sales report even if the tax is not charged click the On Sales Reports checkbox 3 To print the manual tax description when the cashier applies a manual tax but a zero tax amount is calculated click the If Manual checkbox to print the manual tax description when the tax is not charged 4 To add the total of this tax to the total of another tax and to print the combined total on the receipt type the ID number of the other tax in the Sum Tax ID for Receipt field 5 To add the total of this tax to the total of another tax and to print the combined total on the sales report type the ID number of the other tax in the Sum Tax ID for Report field Setting up Step Taxes The Tax Steps tab contains the fields used for setting up step taxes The Store Region Type Description and Print Character fields are accessible on all the tabs in the Tax Maintenance window These fields are described in Tax Maintenance Print Options tab on page 82 1a Tax LOCAL TAX Of x General Print Options Tax Steps TaxID fi Description LOCAL TAX Print Char T me
272. her setting will not support the upload feature Upon configuration the inventory upload feature is launched in Store Manager Note It is not recommended to run this function while the store is open as it may use considerable processing resources to produce the upload file 237 Performing Inventory Control Functions To launch an upload of inventory information to the head office 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Export File The Export File Menu window appears 3 Click Upload 4 Enter the information required to launch the upload process g Upload povo0v0000 E povo0vn000 E e From Date Enter the first date for the inventory report e To Date Enter the last date for the inventory report e Identifier Enter an identifier for the inventory report The length of the identifier field must not exceed 4 characters This value and the store number produce a sequence number to identify the inventory report e File Location The drive and directory path of output file This information is optional If not specified the default directory is the Xpress Server upload directory 238 Viewing inventory information 5 Click Upload The process begins A window showing the process elapsed time is displayed Server Processing 239 Performing Inventory Control Functions Performing a physical inventory count You can use the Store Manager to
273. his window To determine if the price of each item in the package is added to make the total package price the description of each item is printed on the receipt and the taxes assigned to each item are applied Click the Use Parent checkbox to use the package PLU s description and price Leave the Use Parent checkbox unchecked to use the individual items price and description If the individual item details are not used the price of the package PLU is used and only the package description is printed If the item s price and description are used prices are taken from the Price and Description fields and the Tax 1 16 checkboxes in this window To define the department to which the package belongs click the Department drop down list and select a department To assign the taxes that are applied to the item in the package click the Tax 1 16 checkboxes for the taxes you want to apply to the item Taxes are applied individually to each item in the package if you do not check the Use Parent field in this window When the item does not qualify for the package the taxes you define on the PLU Maintenance window are applied Click Save and then click Exit Tip If you want to add another item to a package immediately after you create one you do not need to close the Link Item Maintenance window Refresh the window by clicking New Modifying a linked item You can modify an item in a package To modify an item in a package l
274. hout receipt transaction To allow the cashier to enter this item into a regular sale transaction click the Allow Sale checkbox To allow the item to be exchanged for another item click the Allow Exchange checkbox If the item cannot be exchanged the cashier cannot enter it into an exchange transaction To allow an item to be included in a layaway sale or other type of pending transaction click the Allow Pend Trans checkbox To allow a cashier to apply discounts to this item click the Allow Discount checkbox If an employee discount is allowed on this item during an employee sale transaction click the Allow Empl Discount checkbox You can define an employee s discount rate using the Emp Discount field in the Employee Maintenance window If an item is linked to other items click the Link Item checkbox The Link Item table is checked each time the cashier enters this item into a transaction For example a package of skis poles boots and bindings could all be linked to one PLU called Ski Package Maintaining PLUs 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 To define an item as a coupon click the Coupon Item checkbox If the item is a coupon it returns a negative price when the cashier enters it into a transaction If this item is eligible for special quantity pricing click the Qty Pricing checkbox For example if soda is eligible for quantity pricing a single can of
275. ick File Maintenance Click Departments Click Open to open the department to which you want to apply the print options 75 File Maintenance Features 76 4 10 11 Click the Print Options tab g Department New If the regular prices of items in this department are printed on customer receipts click the Print Reg Retail Price checkbox For more information about defining PLUs see Maintaining PLUs on page 142 Click the Print Slip checkbox if receipts are printed on a slip printer when the cashier sells an item in this department You can define other characteristics of slip printing using the Slip Advanced Lines and Slip Total Lines fields in this window To define the number of lines to advance before printing begins if receipts for items in this department are printed on a slip printer type then number of lines in the Slip Advanced Lines field You can define if the receipts are printed on a slip printer using the Print Slip checkbox in this window To define the number of lines of text that can be printed on each receipt type the number of lines in the Slip Total Lines field Type the number of spaces the printing is indented on each receipt in the Slip Indent field To set the number of validations that the cashier must perform when they sell an item in this department type the number of required validations in the Number of Validations field Type the remote printer number in the Remote Printer Nu
276. ick OK jes Server Message Log iof x fee pepe U Delete Exit 364 Index Symbols Safe Transaction List window 136 parameters 137 log files 290 seatch 290 viewing 290 Numerics 3rd Party Programs Menu Selection window 34 3rd Party Programs Setup window 35 3rd Party Software Maintenance window 14 3rd Party Software menu 14 3rd party See a so third party A about the Store Manager 11 accessing server information 363 adding batch item 166 categoty 66 department 70 employee record 58 extended field options 154 extended options and details 100 154 group 67 linked item 176 new store 92 PLU 143 PLU cross reference 169 promotion 185 record toa table 15 selections to a drop down list 64 store 92 tax 80 third party application buttons to menu windows 34 type of sticker or label 269 vendor 84 adjusting on hand inventory quantities 243 after a count 243 at any time 248 administrative tasks payroll 353 performing 283 all POS opening ot closing 45 another store s information entering 91 applying batch 163 extended field options to customers 103 extended field options to PLUs 104 157 assigning an option to a customer 104 authority levels 29 auditing product price changes 167 authority levels 28 assigning 29 cash management 31 updating 32 viewing level 32 changing 33 changing a user 33 functions 29 safes 32 third party applications 34 to access reports 31
277. ide of this window No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the total of the amounts you enter in the fields on the right side of the window The Total Tenders field displays the totals of the amounts in the Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To define the amount of the selected tender type an amount including the decimal places in the Lump Sum Batch field To select a tender click the tender in the Tender field The Total Lump Sums field displays the total of the lump sum amounts that you enter in the Lump Sum Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Total Denominations field displays the total of the amounts that you enter in the Amount field when you enter amounts by denomination Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations are defined for the tender the denomination fields are not available Click the Denomination button in this window to enter amounts by denomination No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Note If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amou
278. igner see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template Using standard reports Department The Department report provides information about sales of items in the department You can compile Category Group or Department reports directly from the Department Report Criteria window by selecting the appropriate report type criteria A report that groups together details automatically sorts the details by an identifier For example a department report that is grouped by category will sort the details of each group by the group number A department report that is grouped by group will sort the details of each group by the department number The reports are linked so if you compile a Category report and double click a line item to generate a Detail Report the Store Manager compiles a Group report for the groups in the category you selected If you click a group on the report window and generate a Detail Report the Store Manager compiles a Department report for the departments in the group The Department Detail Report contains information on an item level Department Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Department report jg Department Report Criteria 5 x Current Business Date C Previous Business Date Period ovtsy2o02 01 15 2002 C Week Ending 01 15 2002
279. immediately after you log onto the Store Manager a g Fm g Administration File Cash PLU Inventory Labels Maintenance Management Management iol g a E se T Reports Payroll 3rd Party Parameters Server State Sign Off Software Setup To access the menus associated with the icons on the Main Menu click on the icon that contains the menu that you want to display 3rd Party Software Menu The buttons that appear in this menu window are determined by the applications you set up in the 3rd Party Software Maintenance window Relationship between tables and windows 14 The Store Manager stores information in tables Each table contains records and each record contains fields For example employee information is stored in the Employee table Each employee s information is stored in a record in the table and the employee s last name is stored in a field in the record Every table has the following e Selection window This window displays selected fields from each of the records in the table It allows you to select the specific record you want to open e Maintenance window This window displays all fields in the record It allows you to add modify or delete the information in the table You change the information stored in a record in the maintenance window Some maintenance windows contain tabs to organize the fields Click on a tab to open it About the navigation system The following is an example of
280. in the Store Manager in the Single text Translation window You cannot translate text in messages menu options and system codes in the window To translate an individual text 1 2 Open the window that contains the text you want to change Place your cursor over the text you want to change Note To change the text of a window s title bar or a tab name place your cursor over a free area of the window or tab Press the Ctrl key and right click simultaneously Translate Text Original T ext Department Groups New Text Department Shortcut To Translation Cancel Type the new text in the New Text field Click OK The text change is immediately applied Tip You can click Shortcut to Translation to open the Translation window from the Single text Translation window By default the category and object that the original text belongs to are selected for you so that all the options in the same category and object are displayed for editing Using security features The Store Manager has several security features that allow you to restrict access to the Store Manager and more specifically who can access specific windows in the Store Manager Passwords restrict an employee s access to the Store Manager and authority levels assigned to employees and to windows restrict an employee s access to specific windows Changing a user s password 28 Before they can access the Store Manager
281. indow Report Macro Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for defining the sequence of reports included in a report macro The following table contains descriptions of fields in the Report Macro Maintenance window To complete the Report Macro Maintenance window 1 The ID field defines the unique number that identifies the report macro No action is required the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number from 1 to 10 To define the name of the macro click the Description field and type an alphanumeric description up to 40 characters long The macro name you enter into this field appears under the macro s button in the Report Macro List Menu window The Item field defines the order in which the reports are printed No action is required the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number To specify which report you want to include in the macro click the Report Name drop down list and select a report To set the date type criteria that is used when the Store Manager generates the report click the Date Type drop down list and select a date type criteria To set the report type criteria that is used when the Store Manager generates the report click the Report Type drop down list and select a report type criteria To determine if the detailed or summary version of the report you select in the Report Name field is printed click the Detailed
282. indow click Administration Click Translation Click Translate All Objects An alphabetical list of all the text in the Store Manager appears in the bottom half of the window Click the first text you want to change and then type the new text into the field on the right side of the window Repeat the previous step until you have typed new text for all the text in the Store Manager Click Save and then click Exit Translation window This window contains the fields used for changing the text in the Store Manager 18 Translation To display only unedited text in the list in the bottom half of the window click the Not Translated Texts Only checkbox Text that has been edited is hidden Clear the checkbox to display all text To list additional text related to the object you selected in the Single text Translation window click Translate Ancestor Object To define the new text type an alphanumeric string in the Translated Text field The new text can be alternate English text or another language Changing the text in the Store Manager 4 To adjust the size of the field in which the text you selected appears click the arrows in the Spin Box Note The Original Text field defines the original default English text No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 27 Customizing Store Manager Using the Single text Translation window You can change most of the text that appears
283. indows About the Store Manager The Store Manager is a store level management tool that provides back office processing functions You can use the Store Manager to perform many of your store management tasks such as maintaining employee and customer records managing PLUs printing reports reviewing employees work hours ordering inventory and tracking on hand inventory quantities Three versions of the Transactionware store level software are available e POS Manager Has all of the basic back office functions listed above but does not include inventory management functions e Store Manager Includes all the features of the POS Manager plus inventory management functions e Store Manager Deluxe Includes all the features of the basic Store Manager plus full perpetual inventory control ordering and receiving functions Throughout this manual the generic term Store Manager will refer to the complete Transactionware Store Manager Deluxe product The Store Manager works in conjunction with the POS Xpress point of sale software and the Configurator head office application For information about the relationship between the Store Manager and the Configurator see The Store Manager and Configurator association next 11 Getting Started The Store Manager and Configurator association Your head office uses theConfigurator to tailor the POS Xpress application to meet your specific requirements and to download changes to the
284. iness Date Previous Business Date This field determines if the report period is the current business date You can also click Previous Business Date and the Period From To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button This field determines if the report period is the previous business date You can also click Current Business Date and the Period From To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button 325 Reporting Field Description Period From To This field defines a range of dates for the report period You can click Current Business Date and Previous Business Date to select the report period Auction Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar Click a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field Salesperson ID From To This field defines a range of salespeople whose sales you want to include in the report Action Click the drop down list and select a salesperson from the list Generate Report This field generates the report based on the criteria in the window For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Action Click the button Salesperson report The following is a sample Salesperson report m Salesperson Report OF xi Salesperson Report Store s 1 Operator G Green Period 2 17 99 To 2 19 99 Salesprsnid 5555 Employee Name Garry Green Gross Non
285. information about completing a loan see Completing a loan on page 109 Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Reason Code drop down list if the Reason parameter is set to mandatory in the General Parameters To enter a new loan 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe in which the loan is to come from Note If there is only one safe the single safe menu appears immediately There are no safes to choose 3 Click POS Loan Performing a loan float Click New iS H Safel POS Loan New Pending 00 00 06 07 01 13 30 06 07 2001 BEnEmMINENEM To complete the POS Loan Safe Maintenance window 1 The Txn Num field defines a unique number that identifies the loan transaction This number is a counter that reflects the number of tender management transactions for example pickups and balances that have been performed This is not the transaction number that is recorded on the TLog The number in the T Log Num field in this window is recorded as the transaction number in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number when you save the loan transaction The T Log Num field defines the unique number that identifies the loan transaction in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you complete the loan To d
286. ing a customer recOtd riarann ni AR NAN Ei 96 Deleting a Customer recOrd arenen anan e ani 97 Customer Maintenance window Demographic tab Customer Maintenance window Loyalty Points tab Maintaining extended customer fields o cccccecsseeeseeeeseseseeeeseens z Adding extended options and details sss sssssssssssssssssessssssssrresssreessrseessnees 100 Modifying extended options ssss ssssssssssessssseessreessssresssresnsreesssrtensnersnsreesssre 101 Deleting extended GptoOns 4 xistie sceeietacsciearessientvesieta ena a aa 102 The Extended Field Options Maintenance window occ 103 Applying extended field options to CUStOMETS uo eee 103 Tender Management Sate and non SAate opttOnss seee er e na a coed ARA AAR 105 Performing a loan doat raano A E E E N 106 Bin tering a new loaie a r 106 Completng aloan ice cgit in a NEEE A E ENE ARA ATE 109 Modifying a lony neaei a A A a aaa 110 V iding a loan Sansa E E AE 110 Viewinga loan sdetails seide a a s 110 Perfotming a pickup pira Rina E N A A EERE 111 Entering Anew pickup srne re aE a hoch E TEAN 111 Completitig aipickup ninr r aS EE EAE A 112 Modifyinig a pickup siitia a En 112 Voiditio a pickup rrr i Arara EEN EEA A EER 113 Viewing a pick p s detalls a n aa praep ap e ER ERARE ERES 113 POS Pickup to Safe Maintenance Window occas 114 Balaneinga cash Atawer sinda a a a 116 Entering anew balance nsoriara o ar aE e a EERE 116 Completing a balance sirina
287. ing a purchase order see Voiding a purchase order on page 205 Click the button This field opens a detail screen which contains information about the item in the line of the purchase order that you have highlighted The information in the detail window cannot be edited Click the button This field creates a new purchase order For information about duplicating a purchase order to create a new order see Duplicating a purchase order on page 206 Click the button 203 Performing Inventory Control Functions 204 Issuing a purchase order A purchase order has a status of pending until you issue it You can void a purchase order but you cannot modify a purchase order after you issue it Issuing a purchase order makes it available to be converted into a receiving order For information about converting the purchase order into a receiving order see Converting purchase orders into receiving orders on page 211 To issue a purchase order 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Purchase Orders 3 Click Display All The existing purchase orders are displayed in the selection window 4 Click the purchase order you want to issue and then click Open A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU 5 Click a radio button in the dialog box The dialog box closes The Purchase Order Maintenance window appears 6 Click Issue A dia
288. ing design options appears For information about the design options on the menu see Template design options below 300 Using the report template designer 5 Use the design options to change the layout of the report 6 Click Save Template The new template is saved and is used the next time you generate this report 7 Click Design On The template designer becomes inactive Template design options You can right click anywhere on the report window to access a shortcut menu containing the design options truncate re position and hide Click an option to select it Truncating If you truncate a column the characters after the decimal place ate dropped and only the whole number is displayed To truncate a column 1 Right click on the report window The shortcut menu appears 2 Click Truncate on the shortcut menu The Column Truncation window appears 3 Click the checkbox beside the column you want to truncate 4 Click OK The Column Truncation window closes and the you can see the change to the column immediately Tip To replace the characters after the decimal place clear the check mark from the checkbox beside the column Re positioning You can reposition report fields within the confines of their general boundaries For example you can move a header field such as the report title to a new position in the header area but you cannot move it into the body of the report or into the footer To m
289. ing details 133 voiding 132 safes bank deposit withdrawal 126 129 366 transactions records 136 transferring tender between 129 security functions 31 Cash Management Security Setup window 32 Cash Safe management parameters General Parameters Setup window 24 cashier prompts for customer information 95 categories 63 adding 66 defining 65 deleting 67 modifying 66 Category report 321 example 321 Change Criteria parameters Global PLU Change window 160 Change Fields parameters Global PLU Change window 161 Change Password window 29 changing all the text in the Store Manager 26 customer display 52 header and trailer information printed on receipts 53 user authority level 33 user password 28 changing text all category 25 all objects 26 single object 24 Store Manager 24 Choose PLU and Operation Type window 166 choosing report criteria 296 Clean Up Transaction History window 54 cleaning up system for new store 53 clock in out confirming times 360 editing employee times 356 357 exporting files 356 to head office 361 parameters 356 reviewing employee times 356 closing all POS terminals 47 single POS terminal 44 store 51 Code Table Maintenance window 64 Column Hide window 301 Column Truncation window 301 compiling Loss Prevention Detail report 324 Non Merchandise Detail report 311 Payroll Clock In Out Detail report 316 reports 296 choosing criteria 296 generating 296 printing 297 Sales Analysis report 308 completing
290. ing the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template p Payroll Clock In Out Summary Report Ot x Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Payroll Clock In Out Summary Report Store 1 Operator D Thomas Date 3 3 99 Employeett First Name Last Name Total Worked Confirmed Yalid Thomas Total of Employees 1 Store s Total Worked Hours 0 hrs Print Export Exit Generate Detail Report a Page 1 of 1 3 37991 4 55 26 Payroll Clock In Out Detail 316 The Payroll Clock In Out Detail report provides information about employee s clock in and clock out times total hours worked and the reason for work The Store Manager compiles the Payroll Clock In Out Summary and Payroll Clock In Out Detail reports based on the same criteria Included in this report is an employee signature line that can be used for verification To compile the Payroll Clock In Out Detail Report 1 Select criteria and generate the Payroll Clock In Out Summary report The summary report is displayed in the report window 2 Click Generate Detail Report The Payroll Clock In Out Detail report is displayed in the report window Payroll Clock In Out Detail report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Payroll Clock In Out Detail report For information about the template des
291. ion Change the information in the fields as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Setting up the product hierarchy Deleting a group You should only delete a group if there are no departments assigned to it To delete a group 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Department Groups 9 Departments Selection Window lel ES Dept Number Dept Description Group Number 102 SKIRTS OMEN PANT OMEN TOP 105 SWEATERS noe INTIMATE APPAREL 107 LEGWEAR ACKETS Open 121 aaan ENTAL h22 TAILORED CLOTHING Mier 123 ACTIVE WEAR am Delete 79 row s found Display All Query Sort Hon 3 On the Departments Selection window click Display All The existing groups are displayed in the selection window 4 Click the group you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The group is deleted Defining departments Departments are the third level in the product hierarchy Departments are assigned to groups and in turn departments contain PLUs You can add modify or delete department records in the Store Manager You must create departments before you can assign PLUs to them You can also further separate a department with user flags To add or modify a department you must enter information into the Department Maintenance window 69 File Maintenance Features 70 Adding a depa
292. ion window To enter an order from an order guide 1 Onthe Main Menu click File Maintenance 2 Click Customer The Customer Menu appears 209 Performing Inventory Control Functions 3 Click Order Entry The Selection window appears 4 Once you have identified the required order guide click New to add a new row to the list The order items are displayed from the selected order guide and sorted according to the item sort order established with the order guide Order Entry Maintenance window O lolx licensee 1 23456 Order Date 06 01 2005 Status Complete Business Name M amp M Bar and Grill Order fo201 00 Guide ID fi EMP Verified Date 06 01 2005 Pickup Date 06 08 2005 100000350 6JEVAN WM BBN JULEP 129 48 ile 2 ofo00420 ap BEAM BLK FLASK 750 1 6 36 98 16 3 2 o00450 6 KNOB CRK BBN SHKR J 21 1 sf 127 08 Complete ie Save le Ole a Delete New Ext Licensee Order Report Order Guide Print Picking List 5 For each item appearing in the list enter the amount ordered by the customer in the Quantity Ordered field Continue entering the order until all items are entered 6 Click Complete to generate the order Initially the order will be assigned a status of Pending The order can still be modified in this state You can also print a picking list and an Order Guide by clicking the appropriate options at the bottom of the window When the order is converted
293. ion window closes The new option description is displayed in the Options Description field Click Exit Once you have selected the option you want to modify you can change the option description by editing the text in the Option Details field and clicking Save Details Deleting extended options 102 You should not delete an extended option if you have applied it to a customer In the following steps you are required to enter information and make selections in the Extended Field Options Maintenance window For more information about the fields in the window see The Extended Field Options Maintenance window on page 103 To delete an option 1 25 3 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Extended Field Options The Extended Field Options Maintenance window appears Click the option you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The option and its details are deleted Tip To delete the option details only click the option and delete the text from the Option Details box Once all the text is deleted click Save Details Maintaining extended customer fields The Extended Field Options Maintenance window This window contains the fields for creating and maintaining extended options and option details jes Extended Customer Fields Customer 1 Iof xi Customer fi Dean London Store Update Allowed IY Extended Field Inte
294. ired The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field contains a unique number that is used to track the item during order receive and transfer transactions You define the order number in the Ordering No field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field generates a Purchase Order report and displays it in the report window on your screen For more information about the Purchase Order report see Printing a Purchase Order report on page 204 Click the button Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Inventory Information Issue Void Details Duplicate This field opens the Inventory Information window The window contains information about the item in the line you highlighted in the purchase order The item in the highlighted line must be inventory controlled For more information about the Inventory Information window see Viewing inventory information on page 234 Click the button This field issues the purchase order You cannot modify a purchase order after you issue it The ordet s status becomes issued For information about issuing a purchase order see Issuing a purchase order on page 204 Click the button This field voids the issued purchase order You cannot void a purchase order until you have issued it For information about void
295. ired in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window You can define the selection of ship types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a ship type from the list This field defines the type of receiving transaction you ate creating You must complete this drop down list if you click Receiving Type Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window You can define the selection of receiving types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a receiving transaction type from the list This field defines a unique number that identifies a discrepancy between the quantity of items expected in the transaction and the quantity of items actually received You must complete this field if you click Receive Discrepancy Number Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Type a number up to 17 characters long into the field This field defines the number of cases of items shipped to your store Type a number into the field This field defines the total cost to the store of the items shipped to your store Type a currency amount into the field This field defines any notes regarding the receiving transaction Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters long into the field This field defines the total number of items that the store expects to receive The actual quantity received
296. is window to enter amounts by denomination Once in denomination mode the button s label changes to lump sum To define the amount of the selected tender being removed from the safe type an amount including the decimal places in the Lump Sum Amount field To select a tender click the tender in the Tender field The Total Denominations field displays the total of the amounts that you enter in the Amount field when you enter amounts by denomination Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations are defined for the tender the denomination fields are not available Click the Denomination button in this window to enter amounts by denomination No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Note If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount The Total Lump Sums field displays the total of the lump sum amounts that you enter in the Lump Sum Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue
297. isplay All All the shelf label print queues are displayed 2 3 4 Click the queue you want to modify and then click Open 5 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save Tip To delete an item from a queue select the item and click Delete in the Print Queue Maintenance window 265 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Deleting a shelf label queue You can delete a shelf label queue To delete a queue of shelf labels 1 2 3 4 5 On the Main Menu window click Labels Maintenance Click Shelf Labels Click Display All Wey Print Queue Selection Window iol x Queue ID Label Type Description 5 Shelf Label 1 Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit Click the queue you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The shelf label queue is deleted Printing a shelf label queue 266 After you create a queue of shelf labels you can print it You can either print the stickers immediately after you create the queue or you can print a saved queue The steps in this section describe how to print stickers in a queue you created earlier and saved To print shelf labels 1 2 On the Main Menu window click Labels Maintenance Click Shelf Labels Printing shelf labels 3 Click Display All Wes Print Queue Selection Window Of x Queue ID Shelf Label
298. isplayed in red Payroll Clock In Out Detail Ol x Week Start of Week 02 15 99 End of Week 02 21 99 Calendar View m Employee Information Employeett 5555 Last Name First Name Clock In Clock Out Total Worked Reason Code i i 02 18 99 11 52 06 02 18 99 11 59 27 AM jor 2 hrs Straight Time z Weekly Total Worked Hours jo 12 hrs New Save Delete Red denotes Clock Time has been adjusted elt Confirm Time Employee clock times are confirmed Exit 357 Processing The Payroll 358 The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window Field Description Start of Week End of Week Calendar View Employee Last Name First Name Clock In This field contains the date of the first day of the fiscal week You define the fiscal week end using the Fiscal Week End field in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window see Payroll Parameters Maintenance window on page 354 Auction No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the date This field contains the date of the last day of the fiscal week You define the fiscal week end using the Fiscal Week End field in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window se
299. iteria window The Pending Transactions Report Criteria window contains the fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather pending transaction information g Pending Transactions Report Criteria _ oj x Regular Report C By Item Report Transaction Group LAVAWAY x Transaction Number Sell Date between f 01 01 2002 f 01 31 2002 Last Payment between 01 01 2002 f 01 31 2002 Next Payment Expected Pickup Transaction Status Active C All Written Off E Payment C Pickup Selected Picked Up E C AnyDey Cancelled Overdue by 10 days Transaction Activity x C Due before Customers Items All Dept Category JAPPAREL C Reference Dept Group LADIES APPAREL x Phone Department BLOUSES xl C Name PLU E Exit Reset Criteria Generate Report To complete the Pending Transactions Report Criteria window 1 You can print a regular report or a report that is grouped by item To print a regular pending transactions report click Regular Report 2 To print all pending transactions for a specific item click By Item Report 3 Click the Transaction Group drop down list and select a group of transactions to include in this report If you leave this field blank then all will be selected by default 4 Click the appropriate fields to select a date range either the Sell Date between or Last Payment between for the report
300. jacent drop down list and select an option from the list Type the time using the 24 hour clock in the field adjacent to the drop down list You can search for transactions that were processed by the cashier you specify Click the Cashier Number checkbox Click the adjacent drop down list and select an option from the list Type the cashier number in the field adjacent to the drop down list To search for transactions with numbers that match the criteria you specify click the Transaction Number checkbox Click the adjacent drop down list and choose an option from the list Type the transaction number in the field adjacent to the drop down list The electronic journal viewer can search for transactions that contain captured signatures click the Signature Present for the Transaction checkbox To define the test that must be present in the transaction for the electronic journal viewer to consider it a match type a text string in the Search for Text field You can enable the Include Spaces and Exclude Spaces features to define whether the text in the transaction must exactly match the text you enter into this field To clear all the search criteria in this window click Clear To begin the search based on the search criteria click Search 289 Journals and Journal Files Viewing log files You can view and search through the contents of three 1og files Log files allow stores to view and act upon downloaded files during the polling p
301. l Parameters Setup window 23 update export files creating 159 updating Electronic Journal Viewer with new journals 285 record tables 12 tables records 12 uploading inventory levels 237 user authority level changing 33 user flags 63 assigning to departments 70 assigning to PLUs 77 assigning to promotions 77 defining 77 defining options 77 options creating 77 deleting 79 modifying 78 User Flags Maintenance window 78 79 User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers parameters PLU Maintenance window 147 148 user password changing 28 using file maintenance functions 63 inventory reports 332 PLU search window 140 PLUs transferring inventory 225 price batch management functionality 162 report template designer 300 reports 303 security functions 28 single text translation window 28 translation window 24 V vendor See product vendors adding 84 deleting 86 Vendor Maintenance window 85 87 parameters 87 Vendor Selection window 85 86 vendor SKUs 194 linking to PLUs 194 receiving inventory 211 Vendor SKU Maintenance window 195 parameters 195 Vendor SKU parameters PLU Maintenance window 149 vendor s information modifying 85 vendor s SKUs manual purchase order 196 receiving inventory by 211 verification safe withdrawals 127 viewing balance details 119 contents of safe 135 detailed safe transactions 136 details of bank deposit 129 details of deposit into safe 123 details of safe balance 133 inventory information 234 loan d
302. l pricing 185 quantity or level pricing scheme 172 tare weights 88 taxes 80 shelf label print queue creating 264 deleting 266 modifying 265 printing 266 shelf labels 253 custom design creating 274 deleting 276 modifying 275 printing 277 customizing 269 designing 269 formats 255 deleting 256 modifying 256 parameters configuring 253 defining 259 printing 253 264 266 269 setting parameters 253 printing queue 264 creating 264 deleting 266 modifying 265 printing 266 type adding 269 creating new 269 deleting 270 designing new 274 modifying 270 single object changing text 24 Single text Translation window 28 SKUs 194 linking vendor s to PLU 194 sort 38 by column header 36 configuring options 36 records 36 Specify Sort Columns window 37 table records in selection windows 36 Sort Setup window 36 Specify Sort Columns window 37 Standard Labels Format Maintenance window 257 standard reports 303 step taxes 80 stickers and labels See also price stickers and shelf labels custom design 274 creating 274 deleting 276 modifying 275 printing 277 278 designing 274 designing and printing 269 parameters 280 configuring 253 defining 259 type adding 269 defining 270 deleting 270 modifying 270 275 store adding 92 closing 49 51 terminal admin exception handler 51 end of day function 49 opening 49 opening new 53 cleaning up system 53 new store reset function 53 records deleting 93 modifying 93 opening 92 ser
303. l the employees who have this store set as their home store ot who may be borrowed from other stores Click the employee record you want to modify and then click Open On the Employee Maintenance window change the information in the fields as required Click Save and then click Close The new information in the employee s record takes effect immediately 59 Managing Personnel Deleting an employee s record You can delete an employee s record from the database To delete an employee record 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Employee Maintenance 3 Click Display All This window displays all the employees who have this store set as their home store or who may be borrowed from other stores jg Employee Selection Window First Name Last Name Cashier Slsperson Type Larry Smith 1111 1111 0 Steve Jane Mary 44440 la x Open 4 row s found w Delete Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the employee record you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The employee s record is deleted Employee profiles and overtime calculations 60 Employee profiles are created and maintained in the Employee Selection window You must first enable the use of employee profiles in the Configurator application See Chapter 12 Managing Personnel and Vendor Records in The Configurat
304. lance Maintenance Window ues 133 Viewing the contents of the Safe deed a ea a EEE 135 Viewing detailed safe transactions wc 136 Performing a query on safe transactions wesc 137 Managing Price Look Ups Using th PLU Search windo Wssssanranansoneninsnnanncugiiiiia Maintaining PLUS occ Additig a PLU sits atieiteec tees Modifying a PLU s information wate ele tina PLU Yede et E Rn REA The PLU Maintenance window User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab 147 The PLU Maintenance window Vendor SKU tab The PLU Maintenance window Labels tab wv The PLU Maintenance window Inventory Control tab 152 The PLU Maintenance window Future Prices tab esc 153 Maintaining PLU extended fields eisenii iia raii 153 Adding extended Options pennrener ARES 154 Modifying extended Options icine 155 Deleting extended Options uo 156 The Extended Field Options Maintenance window cccccee 156 Applying extended field options to PLUS ccc 157 G netating an export files anni E S Creating update export files srin iaae r EEE RET Making global changes to PLUs Defining the PLUs to be changed Defining the fields to be changed The Global PLU Change Maintenance window Using price batch management functionality Applying a batch ssssessssesssssesssseessssresssresssseresssees Creating a new batch v7 Editing a Batch geere a na E E O EAR GG Selectie a Date a a a a a aiaa Adding an item to a batch sasranrannososun
305. ld This field determines if the stickers or labels are printed from the top to the bottom of the sheet or if they are printed across the sheet Action Click o the checkbox to print the labels from the top to the bottom of the sheet This field defines how many rows of stickers or labels are on a sheet Use the Row Space field in this window to define how far apart the rows are Action Type a number into the field This field defines how far apart in inches the rows of stickers or labels are Use the Rows field to define how many rows are on a sheet Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field defines the shape of the sticker or label Action Click the drop down list and select a shape from the list This field defines the height in inches of the margin at the top of the sheet before the first row of stickers or labels Use this field in conjunction with the Margin Bottom Margin Left and Margin Right fields in this window Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field defines the height in inches of the distance from the bottom edge of the sheet and the last row of stickers or labels Use this field in conjunction with the Margin Top Margin Left and Margin Right fields in this window Action Type a number with up to 3 decimal places into the field This field defines the width in inches of the distance between the left edge of the sheet an
306. ld defines the column in which the information you selected in the Description drop down list begins printing Each column is the width of a character space For example if you enter 5 into this field the information begins printing 5 spaces from the left edge of the sticker or label Action Type a column number into the field This field defines the font that the information you select in the Description drop down list is printed in on the sticker or label Action Click the drop down list and select a font from the list This field determines if the information you select in the Description drop down list is printed in bold weight on the sticker or label Action Click o the checkbox to print the information in bold weight This field determines if the information you selected in the Description drop down list is printed in italics on the sticker or label Action Click o the checkbox to print the information in italics This field determines if the information you selected in the Description drop down list is underlined on the sticker or label Action Click o the checkbox to underline the information when it is printed on the sticker or label 279 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers Field Description Ft Size Print Label Copies Show Hide Sample New Delete This field determines the size of the font of the information you selected in the Description drop down list is printed on the label
307. ld if you click By PLU in this window The Description field contains the description of the PLU for which you are setting a promotional price You can only use this field if you click By PLU in this window No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field when you type a PLU into the PLU field If you are defining promotional prices for an entire group of PLUs click the By Merch Type radio button If you click this radio button use the Department Vendor Group Category or User Flag 1 6 fields to identify the group You can click By PLU in this window if you want to define a promotional price for individual PLUs To define the department for which you are setting promotional prices click the Department drop down list and select an option You can only use this field if you click By Merch Type in this window To define the vendor that supplies the items for which you are setting promotional prices click the Vendor drop down list and select a vendor You can only use this field if you click By Merch Type in this window To define the group for which you ate setting promotional prices click the Group drop down list and select a group You can only use this field if you click the By Merch Type radio button in this window To define the category for which you are setting promotional prices click the Category drop down list and select a category You can only use this field if you click By Merch Type in this win
308. ld is gt the second OP field is lt and the Off field is 25 The third OP field is lt and the Off field is 40 The fourth OP field is lt and the Off field is 50 Combining mix match promotion and discount transactions The Mix Match window shown below is an example of a mix match that allows for promotions and discounts to be applied to the sale in addition to the mix match ioi MM ID fe MM Desc Best 50 7 for 1 00 Discount Desc Best 50 for 1 00 Start Date 00 00 0000 Recalc Promos and Discounts J Match by Merchandise Type M Stop Date 00 00 0000 Apply Disc to Alt Prorate Vendor Complete MM a Calculation at Total Time m Flagif Match PLU a Discount on Lowest Price x Danarment poo Unique PLU Ej J a Policy ID Match UserFlag1 I znae a Dept Group 0 Unique UserFlag1 T B P Category _ Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Alt 5 Alt 6 Alt 7 Alt 8 Alt 9 Pricing Target Type jal Buy Quantity Match Price op Sell Price f Off mm LOO ON o f afe a iera D ssj T es D ssj T O T u D sal T ss SEs T R DO T T E l I Exit ALLL Notice that the Recalculate Promos and Discounts checkbox is enabled if this item is on promotion or discounted then the promotion and discount is recalculated based on the mix match 184 Setting up promotional pricing price For example the mix match price is 2 97 and the promotion is 10 off then 2 97 less 0 30 would bri
309. le Maintenance window Action Click the drop down list and select a reason from the list This field confirms clock in out time entries that are displayed in this window for the employee For information about confirming clock in out entries see Confirming clock in out times on page 360 Action Click the button 359 Processing The Payroll Confirming clock in out times 360 The selections you make in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window determine whether you must confirm the clock in out information for all employees before you export it to a file for your head office If you click Allow Export of Unconfirmed Clock Time Entries in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window you can confirm the information optional You can confirm clock in out information from the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window If you click Allow Confirm All for Clock Time Entries in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window you can also confirm information by clicking Confirm All in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window For information about the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window see Payroll Parameters Maintenance window on page 354 Before you confirm the clock in out information you should review and edit it to make sure it is accurate and complete For information about reviewing and editing the information see Editing clock in out times on page 356 The following steps describe confirming clock in out information
310. les Tax e Balance e Inventory Adjustment e Inactive PLU e Quantity On Hand e Gross Profit e Performance Summary and Detail e Pending Transactions Summary and Detail Designing a new report template The Store Manager can store one template per report If you design a new template it overwrites the default and is automatically used each time you generate the report Because the Store Manager can rebuild the default template you can always revert to the default report template In the following steps you must use design options For information about the design options and other fields related to the template designer see Template design options on page 301 Only users with the appropriate authority level can use the Design On button You must have a user authority level of 5 the highest in order to view the Design On button otherwise it will be greyed out and disabled For information on assigning user authority levels see Using security features on page 28 To design and save a template 1 Compile the report for which you want to design the template For information about compiling a report see Compiling a report on page 296 2 Click Design Off A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm that you want to use the designer The template designer becomes active The Template Design Mode box indicates that the status is On 3 Click OK 4 Right click on the report window A shortcut menu contain
311. lick File Maintenance Click Department Categories Click Display All The existing categories are displayed in the selection window Click the category you want to modify and then click Open The Department Category Maintenance window appears containing the category s information Edit the text in the Description field Click Save and then click Exit Setting up the product hierarchy Deleting a category You should only delete a category if there are no groups assigned to it To delete a category 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Department Categories I Department Categories Selection Window lel E Catagory Number Description Aoo SHOES ACCESSORIES 6 Open New Delete 6 row s found Display All Quen Sot Exit 3 From the Department Categories Selection window click Display All The existing categories are displayed in the selection window 4 Click the category you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The category is deleted Defining groups Groups are the second highest level in the product hierarchy Groups are in categories and in turn groups contain departments You can add modify or delete group records in the Store Manager You must create groups before you can assign departments to them Adding a group When you create a group you must assign it to a category You
312. lick New The Extended Field Option window appears containing fields for option ID and description Extended Field Option Option Type 5000 Interest Groups Option Id E Description Candles OK Cancel 5 Type an option ID number and a description into the fields 6 Click OK The Extended Field Option window closes The new option ID and description are displayed in the Options fields 7 Click the option to which you want to add details 8 Inthe Option Details box type text 9 Click Save Details and then click Exit Modifying extended options You can modify the description portion of options that you create in the Store Manager or that your head office created in the Configurator In the following steps you are required to enter information and make selections in the Extended Field Options Maintenance window For more information about the fields in the window see The Extended Field Options Maintenance window on page 103 To modify an option 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Extended Field Options 3 Click the option you want to modify and then click Modify The Extended Field Option window appears containing a Description field Extended Field Option Option Type 500 10 Interest Groups Option Id E Description Cand les OK Cancel 101 File Maintenance Features Type the new option description into the field Click OK The Extended Field Opt
313. lick the group to which the PLU belongs from the list on the left side of the window A list of departments opens below the group 4 Double click the department to which the PLU belongs The department s PLUs and their descriptions are listed on the right side of the window Select PLU PLU fin Search o FASHION a Description B A ACCESSORIES E pA 42003426 2 SIDE BUCKLE WRAP H DO E San LF UNISEX 42007724 CORDORY SKIRT S E WOMENS if DRESSES E INTIMATE APPAREL tf JACKETS E LEG WEAR E EGE cof SWEATERS sof WOMEN PANT H0 WOMEN TOP Show All PLUs 3 row s found 5 Click the PLU 6 Click OK The PLU you selected is entered into the PLU Number field in the maintenance window 141 Managing Price Look Ups Maintaining PLUs 142 The Store Manager and other Triversity applications use PLU Price Look Up numbers to identify products in the store Other methods of identifying items with which you may be familiar include SKUs Stock Keeping Unit bar codes item numbers and product numbers Your head office must define a PLU s configuration before you can add PLUs to the PLU table in the Store Manager After you have defined PLUs you can link them together into packages create promotional pricing and mix match pricing schemes and create short easy to remember cross reference numbers Before you create any PLU records you must define the product hi
314. ll Clock In Out Summary Ioi xi Week Start of Week 02 15 99 End of Week 02 21 99 Confirm All Export Date of Export 00 00 00 Export Segt Not Exported Export Total Worked 5555 Gary Green jo hrs IN Jn i Store s Total Worked Hours Jo hrs New Open Exit 3 Click Start of Week or End of Week to locate the appropriate week s information 4 Click Export The information is exported to a file Once you export clock in out time information you can teview it but you cannot edit it 361 Processing The Payroll 362 Viewing the Server State This section provides information about the windows in the Store Manager that you can use to get information about the store s server Accessing server information The Store Manager includes two windows that provide you with information for troubleshooting your POS system They are e Server State Information window e Server Message Log window Note You cannot edit the information in these windows To open the Server State Information window e On the Main Menu window click Server State The Server State Information window displays the Store Information and the Server Connection information 363 Viewing the Server State To open the Server Log window 1 Click Setup Log 2 You can view and or save the log Click the View Log checkbox to display the Server Log window 3 Click the Save Log checkbox to save the log file 4 Cl
315. ll the objects in a category wees 25 Changing all the text in the Store Manager wuss 26 Translation Window c ssisisssssnasssesssesesessveesesesoevesessenssessasbcsenscseseosetsieaies 26 Using the Single text Translation Window sssssssssssssssssssssessssreessreeessreessss 28 Using security features sssini siiis iieis 28 Changing a uset s paSSWOrd ssisissssssicsscssscsassstentossorvervssctsssonsatstanessserbinsdvoniens 28 Restricting access to selected windows and functions ssss sssssesssssessssees 29 Cash management SCULLY ssccstsssssecscsssssnastonssssessessssstinastonsseidensestsessnas Changing a uset s authority level wc essesesessesssessssessessssessens Adding third party application buttons to WINdOWS uses Sorting table records in selection windows Configuring the sort Options wo Sorting by clicking a column headet cccsecseeeeeeees Sorting using the Specify Sort Columns window Managing the POS Terminals Monitoring and controlling the POS terminals 0 0 42 Monitoring a POS terminal c ccsscsssssieseesssesostesessesesossonesssnssesasesaesesestaesonis 42 Opening or closing a POS terminal ss ssssssssssssssssessssrssssrsesssrresssreesssreessseees 43 Opening or closing all POS terminals oo 45 Opening and closing the Storte sssini 49 Opening the Store ccccsicccessesecsssssnsssseiecsoseiessosatedgssevesessenesestasbseseascdeseesedssna e 49 Closing The Stofe issiria rinanta E ris 51 Table of Contents Chan
316. llow with the vendor type a description up to 30 characters long in the Terms field 21 To record any notes about the vendor type the notes in the Notes field 22 To record the vendor s web site address type the address in the Web Site field 23 To define the days on which orders ate placed with the vendor click the Order Days Monday to Sunday that correspond with days of the week that an order is placed Setting up tare weights 88 A tare weight is the weight of an item s packaging that must be deducted from the total weight of the item before the retail price is calculated For example the price of the container is deducted from the weight of a salad sold by the gram before the price is calculated You can define tare weights in the Store Manager You assign tate weights to individual PLUs in the PLU Maintenance window or to departments in the Department Maintenance window The unit of measurement that is used at the POS terminal to interpret the weight is defined in the setup of your scale hardware For example assume you define a tare weight to be 5 and you assign it to PLU 457975276 salad If your scale uses grams as its unit of measurement then 5 grams are deducted from the weight of PLU 457975276 To add or modify a tare weight record you must enter information into the Tare Weight Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Tare Weight Maintenance window on page 90 WA
317. log box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to issue the purchase order 7 Click OK The purchase order s status changes to issued Printing a Purchase Order report You can print a purchase order report containing the information from the purchase order displayed in the Purchase Order Maintenance window The Purchase Order report is linked to the report template designer You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Purchase Order report To print a purchase order report 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Purchase Orders 3 Click Display All The existing purchase orders are displayed in the selection window 4 Click the purchase order you want to use to form the basis of the report and then click Open button A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU 5 Click a radio button in the dialog box The dialog box closes Ordering receiving and transferring inventory 6 7 8 Click Report The Purchase Order report is displayed in the report window oix Design On Design Mode Off On File No Save Nemplete Delete template Purchase Order 00010000012 Preview Split View Txn Number 4 Txn Date 03 14 2002 Exp Del Date 03 21 2002 Store 1 Order Date 03 14 2002 Cancel Date Status Issued Origin Manual Terms 30 days Transmitted Yes
318. lowing steps you must define the selections in the Vendor Type and State Province drop down lists For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 In the following steps you must enter information and make selections in the Vendor Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Vendor Maintenance window on page 87 To create a vendor s record 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Setting up product vendors 2 Click Vendors button JEt Vendor Selection Window Iof x Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 3 Click New button 4 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 5 Click Save and then click Exit Modifying a vendor s information You can modify the information in an existing vendor file In the following steps you ate requited to enter information and make selections in the Vendor Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Vendor Maintenance window on page 87 To modify a vendor s record 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Vendors Click Display All The existing vendors are displayed in the selection window 2 3 4 Click Open The Vendor Maintenance window appears containing the vendor s information 5 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click E
319. mber field 12 Select a type of remote print control option from the Remote Printer Control drop down box Setting up the product hierarchy Defining user flags User flags provide you with a way to further classify items You can define up to six user flags and options for each flag After you have defined user flag options you can assign them to PLUs and you can assign options from user flags 1 and 2 to promotions Different PLUs can be in the same department but you can assign different user flag options to them For example assume that you define the following options to User Flag 1 Seasonal Christmas Easter and Valentine s You can assign different options to three PLUs in the floral department e PLU 58962247 christmas tree Christmas option e PLU 45846317 daffodils Easter option e PLU 78271249 rose bouquet Valentine s option For information about assigning user flag options to PLUs see The PLU Maintenance window User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab on page 147 For information about assigning user flag options to promotions see Setting up promotional pricing on page 185 You can also use the user flag options to generate the Item Movement report using the user flag options as criteria to track the sales of the items you assign the options to For information about the Item Movement report Item Movement on page 303 Creating a new user flag option You can create user flag options for si
320. me criteria you choose for the Loss Prevention Summary report Loss Prevention Report Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Loss Prevention Summary and Loss Prevention Detail reports 321 Reporting The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Loss Prevention Report Criteria window Field Description Current Business Date This field determines if the report period is the current business date You can also click Previous Business Date and the From To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button Previous Business Date This field determines if the report period is the previous business date You can also click Current Business Date and the From To field to select the report period Action Click the radio button From To This field defines a range of dates for the report period You can also click Current Business Date and Previous Business Date to select the report period Auction Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar Click a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field By Store This field determines if you want to include information for the entire store on the report Action Click the radio button Cashier This field determines if you want to include information for 1 cashier on the report Action 1 Click the r
321. motions are displayed in the window Click the promotion you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The promotion is deleted and the promotional pricing is no longer applied Defining an exception to a promotion You may want to exclude items from a promotion For example if you want to put all the items in the women s accessories department on sale with a 5 discount except for leather gloves by ABC Inc you can define a promotion for the accessories department and an exception for the gloves Before you create an exception for a promotion you must create the promotion To create an exception J ONS A A OU a Create a new promotion for the merchandise that you want excluded from the promotion Do not define a discount method or enter a discount or a new price Click Save and then click Exit Open the main promotion and scroll to the first item or merchandise type that has an exception Click the Accumulate checkbox and then click the Except checkbox Type the ID number of the promotion you created in step 1 into the Exception ID field Scroll to the next item or merchandise type that has an exception 189 Managing Price Look Ups 7 Inthe Exception ID field click the Except checkbox and type the promotion number Repeat steps 5 6 and 7 until you have identified the exceptions where appropriate 8 Click Save 190 Performing
322. mounts For example if you enter the following into fields 1 3 325 2 30 3 35 Break point 35 01 is charged on purchases between 01 and 25 02 is charged on purchases between 26 and 30 03 is charged on purchases between 31 and 35 04 is charged on purchases between 36 and 40 05 is charged on purchases between 41 and 45 Setting up product vendors Vendors are the suppliers of the products you sell in your store You can maintain vendor records in the Store Manager When you create a vendotr s record the vendor is added to the selections in drop down lists where you are required to select a vendor such as in the General Parameters Maintenance window and the Purchase Order Maintenance window Before you create a vendor record you must define the selections in the Vendor Type and State Province drop down lists For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 To add or modify a vendor s record you must enter information and make selections in the Vendor Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see The Vendor Maintenance window on page 87 Adding a vendor 84 When you create a vendor s record the vendor is added to the selections in drop down lists where you are required to select a vendor such as in the General Parameters Maintenance window and the Promotions Maintenance window Before you complete the fol
323. mpting you to confirm you want to void the purchase order Click OK The purchase order is voided 205 Performing Inventory Control Functions Duplicating a purchase order You can create a new purchase order by duplicating an existing order The new purchase order has a status of pending regardless of the status of the original order To duplicate a purchase order 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Purchase Orders 3 Click Display All The existing purchase orders are displayed in the selection window 4 Click the purchase order you want to duplicate and then click Open A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU 5 Click a radio button in the dialog box The dialog box closes The Purchase Order Maintenance window appears 6 Click Duplicate The new purchase order is displayed in the Purchase Order Maintenance window The new order is identical to the original order 7 Change the information in the fields as appropriate 8 Click Save and then click Exit Creating an order guide for licensee transactions 206 When dealing with corporate customers on a regular basis you may need to repeat an order for the same inventory items on an ongoing basis For example if you are running a liquor store you would service a number of hospitality type customers with the same products every week Items in the order typically do not change ex
324. ms Per Transaction Number of transactions during time increment total number of transactions Net sales during time increment total net sales Number of items sold during time increment total items sold Net sales during time increment number of transactions during time increment Number of items sold in time increment number of transactions during ao ncrement Number of items sold during increment number of transactions during increment Using standard reports Average Hourly Sales The Average Hourly Sales report contains average sales figures grouped in hour or half hour increments The Hourly Sales Summary report and the Average Hourly Sales report use the same criteria window For information about the fields in the Hourly Sales Report Criteria window see Hourly Sales Report Criteria window on page 327 Average Hourly Sales report The following is a sample Average Hourly Sales report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Average Hourly Sales report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template t Hourly Sales Report olx Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Average Hourly Sales Report Store 1 Operator G Green Date 2 19 99 Period 2 17 99 To 2 19 99 12 00AM 1 2 00AM 3Day
325. must define a category before you can assign groups to it After you have defined a group you can define departments and assign them to the group To add a group 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Department Groups 67 File Maintenance Features 68 3 he On the Department Groups Selection window click New ja Department Group WOMENS iof x Group Number New Group Description Category Description FASHION Save Category Number fi Delete Exit On the Department Group Maintenance window assign a unique number to identify the group in the Group Number field Type a description of the group in the Group Description field Click the Category Description drop down list and select the category to which the group belongs Note The Category Number appears automatically with the identification number of the category that you selected in the Category Description drop down list Click Save and then click Exit Once you have created a group you can create and assign departments to it Modifying a group You can modify a group after it is defined To modify a group 1 2 3 4 A On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Department Groups On the Department Groups Selection window click Display All Click the group you want to modify and then click Open The Department Group Maintenance window displays the group s informat
326. must have a record in the PLU table click the PLU Must Exist checkbox If you do not require the PLU record to exist the Store Manager accepts any number you type into the PLU XREF fields in the Purchase Order Receiving or Transfer windows 5 If the receive all function in the Receiving window and Transfer window is required click the Allow Receive All Receiving and Transfers checkbox If the function is not available the Receive All and Receive None radio buttons on the windows are disabled For information about the fields used in the receive all function Receiving window on page 213 and Store Transfer by PLU window on page 226 6 To record SKUs used by vendors to identify the items they supply to your store vendor s SKUs in the Store Manager click the Maintain Vendor SKU checkbox If you enter a vendor s SKU 192 Configuring the inventory parameters 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 for an item into the Store Manager you can either use the item s SKU number or PLU in purchase orders receiving transactions and transfers If a vendor s SKU must have a record in the Vendor SKU table click the Vendor SKU must exist checkbox If you do not require the vendor s SKU to exist in the Vendor SKU table the Store Manager accepts any number you type into the Vendor SKU fields in the Purchase Order window or Receiving window If cross reference numbers are used instead o
327. must match the number you enter into this field if you click Receive Quantity Match Hash Quantity in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Type a number into the field This field indicates the origin of the receiving transfer purchase order electronic document manual No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the unique number that identifies the case of items Type a number into the field This field defines the number of cases you receive in your store Type a number into the field 221 Performing Inventory Control Functions 222 Field Description Sht Ovr This field defines the difference between the number of cases you actually received and the number you expected Type a number into the field If the shipment was short cases type a negative sign before the number Receive All None This field is not available in the Receiving by Case window of the Store Manager Designed Label This field is not available in the Receiving by Case window of the Store Manager Price Label This field is not available in the Receiving by Case window of the Store Manager Shelf Label This field is not available in the Receiving by Case window of the Store Manager Report This field generates a Receiving report and displays it in the report window on your Inventory Information Complete Void Details Partial screen For more information about the Receiving report
328. n the department need to be weighed enable weighing on an item by item basis by checking the Use Scale checkbox in the PLU Page 1 tab on the PLU Maintenance window To allow the cashier to enter quantities for items click the Qty Mode checkbox If you allow the cashier to enter quantities you can enable the Allow Decimal Qty checkbox in this window to allow decimal quantities If you requite the cashier to type a quantity for items in this department enable the Qty Required checkbox in this window To describe the unit of measurement that prints on a receipt when a cashier sells an item for example grams liters lbs in this department type a description in the Qty Desc field This field is limited to 15 characters If cashiers are allowed to enter partial quantities for items in this department for example 1 2 1b click the Allow Dec Qty checkbox This feature is only enabled if you click Allow Quantity or Qty Required in this window To enable a cashier to make discount transactions for items in this department click the Allow Discount checkbox Type a discount identification number in the Auto Disc ID field to define the automatic discount applied to items in this department Type a 0 in this field if you do not want an automatic discount applied Discounts are defined by your head office in the Configurator You can obtain the Discount ID number from your head office To enable employee discounts on items in this department durin
329. n ID field on the Extended Field Option window The Extended Field Option window appears when you click New or Modify 4 The Options Description field defines the description of the option You do not type directly in this field The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the description you type in the Description field on the Extended Field Option window The Extended Field Option window appears when you click New or Modify 5 To define the option s details type an alphanumeric string in the Option Details field 6 To save the Option Details click Save Details Applying extended field options to PLUs Before you can apply extended field options to PLUs you must have extended fields option types options and option details if required already defined Your head office can either assign an option type to a field or define the characteristics of text date string decimal quantity you can type into the field when you apply the option to the PLU Your head office uses the Configurator to define fields option types options and option details You can also define options and option details using the Store Manager For information about defining options and option details see Adding extended options on page 154 WARNING To export a PLU s information and extended field information to a third party application one of the options you assign to it must be an export file type For information about generating
330. n also print the order guide Viewing displayed information about the order When an order guide is complete the P T ID field shows the configured pending transaction type such as Layaway for the order After that order is settled and picked up the status changes to Complete You can sort the item list by clicking on any item column header in the order guide maintenance window The list of items is automatically redisplayed in the new sort order Clicking on the same column again toggles the sort between descending and ascending order The sort order for a specific order guide is maintained in the picking list report and pending transaction Item numbers are automatically sequenced by default You may manually renumber the sequence Entering an order from an order guide When you choose the option to enter an order from a defined order guide the order entry window displays items from the order guide according to the item sort order defined for the guide You can specify a pickup date and enter item quantities as required When all order items have been entered you can print a picking list from the order You can use the search feature in the summary window to look for a specific order by searching on any of the following fields Customer Customer Name Status or Guide ID You can then choose an existing order from the list of orders displayed in the window You can also generate a new order entry or delete an existing one from the select
331. n and its details are deleted Tip To delete the option details only click the option and delete the text from the Option Details field Once all the text is deleted click Save Details The Extended Field Options Maintenance window This window contains the fields for creating and maintaining extended options and option details ies Extended Field Options Maintenance ioi x Option Types Options New Modify Delete Description 5000 Interest Groups 1 Beanie Babies ___4 Candies iII Picture Frames IU A Greeting Cards Option Details 0 line s Save Details El 4 of Exit To complete the Extended Field Options Maintenance window 1 The Option Types ID field contains the unique number that identifies the option type Your head office uses the Configurator to define option types No action is required the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the option type s ID number The Option Types Description field contains the description of the option type Your head office uses the Configurator to define option types No action is required the Store Manager automatically completes this field with the option type s description The Options ID field contains the unique number that identifies the option You do not type directly in this field The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the number you Maintaining PLU extended fields type in the Optio
332. n exception 189 deleting 189 modifying 189 Promotion New window parameters 186 promotion exception defining 189 Promotion Maintenance window 185 parameters 186 promotional pricing creating a promotion 185 setting up 185 Promotions Selection window 185 186 purchase order converting into receiving orders 211 creating 196 duplicating 206 from suggested order 198 issuing 204 modifying 197 report 204 voiding 205 Purchase Order Maintenance window 199 parameters 199 Purchase Order Report window 205 Purchase Order Selection window 196 Purchase Orders Selection window 197 Manual PO parameters 196 Q Quantity Level Pricing New window patameters 173 Quantity Level Pricing Maintenance window 173 patameters 174 Quantity Level Pricing Selection window 173 175 Quantity On Hand report altering appearance 339 parameters 338 Quantity On Hand Report Selection Criteria window 338 patameters 338 quantity or level pricing schemes See quantity pricing scheme and level pricing scheme quantity pricing scheme 172 adding 173 deleting 175 modifying 175 setting up 172 query drop down list 19 performing 19 safe transactions 137 selection window 15 R reading journal files 283 Rebuilding local files 55 Receipt Logo Maintenance window 53 receipts header and trailer information changing 53 customize 53 printing messages 53 receiving See also receiving transactions completing transactions 223 converting orders from purchase or
333. n in this field the description in the MM Desc field in this window is printed on the customet s receipt These fields specify which mix match quantities are tracked through reporting If quantities are entered a Mix Match Transaction Summary record is created in the register s TLOG This field contains the number of the item to which the price change is applied in the TLog For example assume the mix match scheme is for a can of soda entered into the Alt 1 line in the maintenance window and a bag of chips entered into the Alt 2 line The price of the chips is discounted by 50 If you enter Alt 1 into this field the discount is applied to the chips when the transaction is recorded in the TLog This field indicates if every mix match criteria in this window must be satisfied before the transaction is eligible for the mix match This field indicates the mix match is applied only when all the items are the same For example assume a mix match pricing scheme sells 3 items that normally cost 35 each for 1 00 If the Match PLU checkbox is checked the customer must purchase 3 of the same item to qualify for the special price If you clear the Match PLU checkbox the customer can purchase 3 different items normally costing 35 each and still qualify for the special mix match price This field specifies that promotions and item discounts are recalculated after a mix match is realized This field indicates if the mix match is ap
334. n include in the pickup A tender is actually included in the loan if you enter a value in the corresponding Amount field on this window Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are available for pickup This field contains a list of the tenders that are eligible No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the tenders that are eligible for pickup To enter a pickup amount for a tender click the tender and complete the fields on the right side of this window The Amount field indicates the amounts of the tenders included in the pickup To enter a pickup amount for a tender click the tender in the Tender field and complete the fields in the right side of this window No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the total of the amounts you enter in the fields on the right side of the window The Total Tenders field displays the totals of the amounts in the Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Lump Sum Denomination button allows you to switch between entering the lump sum amounts or denominations If you are entering the pickup amount by denomination the tender denominations are listed in this field Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations ate defined for the tender the denomination button is disabled Use the Denomination button on th
335. n use to pay for the items You do not explicitly set up itemizers you simply assign itemizers to tenders and to departments and if they match the items in the department can be purchased with the tender Itemizers can also be used to restrict discounts and items in addition to tenders For example if the tender food stamps has itemizer ID 2 and department 3 has itemizer ID 2 a customer can pay for an item in the department with food stamps If department 4 has itemizer ID 1 a customer cannot pay for items in it with food stamps 73 File Maintenance Features 74 Note Itemizers are assigned to tenders in the Configurator by your head office Click the Itemizer Taxes 1 4 checkboxes in this window to assign taxes to the itemizers applied to the department These checkboxes define the taxes that are applied to items in this department when you use itemizers to restrict the tenders that a customer can use to purchase them For example assume department 3 is assigned itemizers 1 and 3 and itemizer 1 is assigned taxes 1 and 2 and itemizer 3 is assigned tax 2 The tender cash has itemizer 1 and food stamps has itemizer 3 If the customer pays for an item in department 3 with cash tax 1 and 2 is applied If the customer pays for the item with food stamps only tax 2 is applied If you want to assign taxes to items in the department based on the tender the customer uses to pay for them you can use these checkboxes For more i
336. nal Search parameters 288 patameters 288 Printing Method parameters 289 Search Criteria parameters 289 seatch function 288 updating 285 286 emailing report as attachment 298 report data 299 employee files See employee records Employee Maintenance window 61 parameters 61 employee records 57 adding 58 deleting 60 maintaining 57 modifying 59 values 57 Employee Selection window 18 33 end of day function 49 51 for cleaning up new store system 53 terminal admin exception handler 51 entering another store s information 91 balance 116 bank deposit 126 deposit into safe 121 loan 106 new bank deposit 126 new on hand quantities 244 new safe balance 131 on hand quantities after a count 244 pickup from cash drawer 111 safe balance 131 export files creating updates 159 generating 158 Export Report Data window 298 exporting clock in out files to head office 361 clock in out information preparing 356 PLU information 159 report data to file 298 reports 298 Extended Customer Fields window parameters 103 extended field option details See extended fields option details Extended Field Option window 101 155 extended field options 154 See also extended fields options adding 154 applying to customers 103 applying to PLUs 104 157 assigning to PLUs 157 customer See also extended fields customer 100 creating 100 deleting 156 modifying 155 option types 153 Extended Field Options Maintenance window 100 102 154 156 parameters
337. nance 274 278 setting parameters 278 280 EJProcessor 286 Electronic Journal Setup 283 setting parameters 284 Electronic Journal Viewer 287 288 setting parameters 288 Employee Maintenance 61 setting parameters 61 Employee Selection 18 33 Export Report Data 298 Extended Customer Fields 104 setting parameters 103 Extended Field Option 101 155 Extended Field Options Maintenance 100 102 154 setting parameters 103 156 Extended PLU Fields 158 Format ID Maintenance 255 setting parameters for price shelf labels 257 Format ID Selection 255 256 General Label Parameters Maintenance 259 General Parameters Setup 22 Cash Safe Management parameters 24 General Information parameters 22 Server Communication parameters 23 Unique PLU Generation parameters 23 Generate Export Files 159 Global PLU Change 160 Change Criteria parameters 160 Global PLU Change window 160 Change Fields parameters 161 Gross Profit Report Selection Criteria 340 setting parameters 341 Hourly Sales Report Criteria 327 setting parameters 327 Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria 336 setting parameters 336 Inventory Adjustment 248 249 setting parameters 249 Inventory Adjustment Report Selection Criteria 332 Inventory Count Sheet 241 Inventory History Information 236 setting parameters 236 Inventory Information 234 setting parameters 234 Inventory Menu 196 Inventory Parameters Maintenance 191 setting parameters 192 Inventory Parameters Menu 191 Item Movement Crit
338. nce report that provides details about the balance transactions you perform in your store For information about the Balance report see Balance report on page 331 Entering a new balance 116 A new balance has a pending status until you complete it You can modify the amounts in a pending balance transaction For information about pickups see Performing a pickup on page 111 For information about loans see Performing a loan float on page 106 Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Reason Code drop down list if the Reason parameter is set to mandatory In the following steps you must enter information in the POS Balance Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see POS Balance Maintenance window on page 119 To enter a new balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate safe Balancing a cash drawer 3 Click POS Balance 1a 2 Safe2 POS Balance Selection Window 4 Click New Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Tip The Actual fields on the left side of the POS Balance Maintenance window only display the amounts you enter for balance You cannot edit these fields directly To enter an amount click the tender s row on the left side of the window and enter the amount in the fields on the right side of the window Completing a
339. nce window only display the amounts you enter for withdrawal deposit You cannot edit these fields directly To enter an amount click the tender s row on the left side of the window and enter the amount into the fields on the right side of the window Modifying a safe withdrawal bank deposit You can only modify a pending withdrawal deposit Once you have entered the final information for a withdrawal deposit you can complete it You cannot modify a completed withdrawal deposit If you need to make a change to a completed withdrawal deposit you must void it and create a new one To modify a pending withdrawal deposit 1 or 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management C C C ick the appropriate safe lick Safe Withdrawal lick Display All The pending completed deleted and voided withdrawals deposits are displayed in the window Click the one you want to modify and then click Open Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Voiding a safe withdrawal bank deposit 128 You can only void a completed withdrawal deposit Voided withdrawals deposits are visible but they cannot be modified and they do not affect the safe s system amount To void a withdrawal deposit 1 2 3 4 O C C C di C C n the Main Menu window click the Cash Management ick the appropriate safe lick Safe Withdrawal lick Display All The pending
340. nching 332 report macros 332 Main Menu window 14 maintaining customer record 96 employee files 57 extended customer fields 99 PLU extended fields 153 PLUs 142 supplemental customer attributes 99 maintenance window adding records to a table 15 description 14 example 15 modifying records in a table 17 making global changes to PLUs 160 managing PLUs 139 POS terminals 41 Manual PO parameters Purchase Orders Selection window 196 manual purchase order creating 196 using PLU or vendor s SKU 196 menu buttons defaults 14 for navigation 14 third party applications in menu windows 34 menu windows third party application buttons 34 Mix Match Maintenance window 180 parameters 180 181 mix match pricing schemes 142 179 183 defining prices 179 reviewing 179 viewing 179 mix match promotion recalculate promotions and discounts 181 Mix Match Selection window 180 modifying balance 118 bank deposit 128 batch item s information 166 categoty 66 cross reference PLU 171 departments 75 deposit into the safe 122 employee record 59 extended options 101 155 group 68 label format 256 linked item 178 loan 110 pickup from cash drawer 112 PLUs information 146 price sticker queue 262 promotion 189 purchase order 197 record ina table 17 report macro 294 safe balance 132 shelf label queue 265 sticker format 256 sticker or label type 270 sticker or label you defined 275 store s information 93 tare weight 89
341. nd receiving transactions Tip To find a PLU click in the PLU X Ref field and press the F12 key The PLU Search window appears 195 Performing Inventory Control Functions Ordering receiving and transferring inventory You can order receive and transfer inventory items using the Store Manager If an item is inventory controlled its on hand amount is updated when you complete a receiving transaction or transfer into your store You can create purchase orders receiving transactions and transfers yourself You can open the documents in the appropriate window modify the information in them and issue or complete them Ordering inventory You can create and issue manual purchase orders using PLUs or vendot s SKUs to identify the items You can use vendor s SKUs to identify items if the vendor s SKUs for the items are defined Once you issue a purchase order it can be converted into a receiving order that you use to record items that you receive into the store s inventory Manual purchase orders using PLU or vendor s SKU After you create a manual purchase order it has a status of pending You must issue the purchase order to make it available to be converted into a receiving order For information about issuing a purchase order see Issuing a purchase order on page 204 In the following steps you must enter information into the Purchase Order Maintenance window For information about the fields in the
342. ndard reports on page 303 and Using inventory reports on page 332 296 Printing a report Generating reports Once you have chosen the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information you must generate the report Once it is generated the report is displayed on your screen and you can review it there or you can print it If the report is linked to the template designer you can also export it or E mail it For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 To generate a report e Inthe report s criteria window click Generate Report The criteria window closes and the report window appears The report window displays the report data in the same format that would be used for the printed report If the Store Manager does not find any data that matches the criteria you choose a dialog box containing a warning message appears and the report window does not appear You remain in the report s criteria window Choose new criteria and generate the report again Tip If the report is presented in a table form with columns and rows you can change the order of the records by clicking the column header For example if the records in the report are listed in alphabetical order by description click the Amount column header to sort the records in order of amount For information about printing exporting or emailing the report see the following sections e
343. nday Exit The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Payroll Parameters Maintenance window Field Description Allow Export of Unconfirmed Clock Time Entries Allow Confirm All for Clock Time Entries Round Clock Time To Display Total Worked Hours Style This field determines if you can export clock in out time entry information that you have not confirmed as accurate to a file for head office Action Click oh the checkbox to allow unconfirmed information to be exported This field determines if you can click Confirm All in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window to confirm all of the clock in out time entries for a week at once Action Click O the checkbox to allow all of the clock in out entries for a week to be confirmed with the Confirm All button Clear the checkbox to disable the Confirm All button on the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window This field defines the increments of an hour an employee s actual work time is rounded up to For example assume an employee actually works 1 hour 20 minutes If you type 15 into this field the Store Manager rounds the employee s work time to 1 hour 30 minutes Action Type a number from 1 60 into the field Type 0 if you do not want the times rounded This field defines how hours are displayed in the Total Worked fields in the Payroll Clock In Out Summary window the Payroll Clock In Out Detail window and on printed payroll reports
344. ndow Click Save Deleting a sticker or label you defined You can delete a custom sticker or label To delete a sticker or label 1 2 3 4 5 6 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Label Parameters Click Designed Labels Definition Click Display All All of the custom price stickers or shelf labels are displayed Wes Price Tags Selection Window Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit Click the sticker or label you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The sticker or label design is deleted Designing and printing stickers and labels Printing the stickers or labels you defined After you create custom stickers or labels you can print them To print stickers or labels you defined 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Label Parameters 3 Click Designed Labels Definition 4 Click Display All All of the custom price stickers or shelf labels are displayed jey Price Tags Selection Window OF xi Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 5 Click the sticker or label you want to print and then click Open 6 Click Print Label A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm printing 7 Click OK 277 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers The Designed Label Maintenance window This wind
345. ndow click Parameters Setup 2 Click Customer Display 3 To determine whether the type of message shown on the POS terminal is fixed or scrolling select an option from the Message Type drop down list 4 If you selected Fixed from the Type drop down list type an alphanumeric string up to 20 characters long in the Fixed Message field 5 Ifyou selected Scroll from the Type drop down list type an alphanumeric string up to 50 characters long in each Scroll Message field 6 To define the message that is displayed when the POS terminal is closed type an alphanumeric string up to 20 characters long in the Closed Message field 7 To define the message that is displayed when there is no cashier signed on at the POS terminal type an alphanumeric string up to 20 characters long in the Sign Off Message field 8 To define the message that is displayed when the POS terminal is locked type an alphanumeric string up to 20 characters long in the Locked Message field 9 Click Save and then click Exit Changing headers and trailers on receipts Changing headers and trailers on receipts You can customize the text that is printed in the header and trailer portions of the customer receipt at the POS terminal You can define up to five lines of header text and five lines of trailer text The header and trailer text is centered on the receipt when it is printed To change the header and trailer text 1 On the Main Menu window cli
346. ndow from the table s selection window The following procedure describes how to add an employee record to the employee table You can apply the same procedure to adding records to other tables in the Store Manager Information about each of the fields in the maintenance windows is provided later in this manual 15 Getting Started 16 To add an employee record 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Administration On the Administration Menu window click Employee Maintenance ie Employee Selection Window Emp ID 1111 First Nname Last Name erson Smith iol x Johnson Pollock r ID 1 WAF 9999 3333 9999 ai Thompson 9999 4444 Green Ford 9999 5555 9999 6666 Blanchard 9999 8885 Landry Jodoin 9999 9999 Jackson 11 rows found Click New 9 Employee Alex Anderson Employee Number First Name Address City State Province Phone Number Employee Discount Cashier Number Price Level Emp Status Region Number Authority Level Display All Query Sort Exit Store Number Last Name _ JAnderson fin Skylar Road JLondon Zip Postal Code JM2M5M5 Ontario ooo 416416 416656 a SSN SIN Sales Person ID Commission Employee Type Force Preset Password Verify Password f234567839 haz o Others oo Vv pe fe lel ES New Save D
347. ned by your selection in the Adj Type drop down list and the Qty Before field No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Available Quantity After Complete Click Complete to complete the adjustment The Qty After fields are automatically Inventory Information filled in with the appropriate quantities This field opens the Inventory Information window The window contains information about the item For more information about the Inventory Information window see Viewing inventory information on page 234 Click the button Controlling inventory packages The X Reference window shown below allows you to define a cross reference as a package or a case instead of just a single item If you sell 1 or 2 of the X Reference items then you are selling 1 or 2 packages When a cashier scans the item at the POS the quantity will automatically display and the price will be calculated accordingly In the example below the cashier does not have to specify a quantity of tennis balls because the quantity is already configured for 12 per package unless the customer is purchasing more than 1 package To access the X Reference window 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click PLU X Reference 3 Click New to create a new cross reference or click Display All to Open an existing one a X Reference New 1 2 12345000011 12345000011 m f 12 000 250 Adjusting on han
348. nformation about defining taxes see Setting up taxes on page 80 8 8 up 8 For more information about itemizers see the description for the Itemizer 1 4 checkboxes above Setting up the product hierarchy Modifying a department You can modify a department after it is defined To modify a department 1 ON I SO BD On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Departments Click Display All The existing departments are displayed in the selection window Click the department you want to modify and then click Open Change the information in the fields as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Deleting a department You should only delete a department if there are no PLUs assigned to it To delete a department 1 2 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Departments Et Departments Selection Window Dept Number Jept Description Group Number 102 SSIS OMEN PANT OMEN TOP 105 SWEATERS 106 INTIMATE APPAREL E TTS ACKETS Wa RENTAL _ Open n22 TAILORED CLOTHING New ACTIVE WEAR Delete 79 row s found Display Al Query Sort Ee Click Display All Click the department you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The department is deleted Configuring the print options To configure the department s printing options 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window cl
349. ng the sell price down to 2 67 If a discount of 20 is applied to the item in addition to the mix match then the discount is also recalculated on the mix match price Therefore 2 97 less 0 59 brings the sale price down to 2 38 If the same promotion and discount scheme is applied to the mix match then the receipt will show the mix match price of the item less the promotion less the discount Another example of a mix match pricing scheme would be an item whose regular price is 6 50 each but is reduced to 5 00 each if the customer purchases 3 or more of the same item In this case the Sell Price field is set to 15 00 the Buy Quantity drop down list is set to or more unit price and the Alt 1 field is set to 3 Setting up promotional pricing Promotions contain special prices that are in effect for a predetermined period of time You can create promotions in the Store Manager You can add new promotions that are effective for the period you choose You can select the items on promotion by PLU or by merchandise types such as department vendor or user flag option To search for a specific promotion by PLU 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click Promotions and then click Promotion Maintenance Click PLU Promotion Lookup Type the PLU in the PLU field Click the Promotions Effective Between radio button to select To and From dates ONA Sad OP ih On the Select Date window select the date and time when the
350. ng transferred to or from You must complete this drop down list before you can save or complete the transfer The selection of stores that appears in this drop down list comes from the Stores table Click the drop down list and select a store from the list This field defines the total number of items that the store expects to receive Type a number into the field This field defines the reason the transfer of items is being performed You can define the selection of reasons that appears in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select a reason from the list 227 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description Out Note PLU XREF Description Expected Qty Received Qty Short Over Receive All None Report This field indicates whether the items are being transferred into or out of your store The entry in this field is based on whether you choose the Transfer in by PLU or the Transfer out by PLU tab in the Store Transfer Selection window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines any notes regarding the transfer Type an alphanumeric string up to 70 characters long into the field This field defines the unique number that identifies the item that is being transferred If you want to use cross reference numbers to identify items instead of PLU numbers you must click Xreference Only in
351. nge that you want to make Click the drop down list and select either Gain Loss or Set Quantity The type of adjustment you choose determines how the Store Manager calculates the new on hand quantity For example if you select Gain from this drop down list the new quantity of the item is determined by adding to the current on hand Bucket Reason This field defines the reason you are performing the adjustment to the item s on hand quantity You can define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list Click the drop down list and select a reason from the list Note This field is for information that is relevant to this item s inventory adjustment Anything you enter is displayed on the report Item This field defines the unique number that represents the item whose inventory you want to adjust Type a PLU number or cross reference number into the field PLU This field displays the PLU number and description of the item Quantity This is the adjustment quantity Type a number that represents the quantity to be added subtracted ot moved In Stock Quantity This field contains the current inventory amount for the item Before No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Available Quantity Before 249 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description In Stock Quantity This field contains the new inventory quantity for the item After The new quantity is determi
352. nnine noie Modifying a batch item s information wicca Deleting a Batch item armine aar ENRE Auditing product price Changes wesc The Retail Price Update Audit window ssssssssssssssssessrsesssressssssesssee Defining a PLU cross reference ienee n i Adding acctoss teterence pienien ien EE EK OEE Modifying across teterence neninn enr aiaa a R R ER Deleting a cross reference wesc Setting up a quantity or level pricing scheme Adding a quantity or level pricing scheme Modifying a quantity or level pricing scheme Deleting a quantity or level pricing scheme Setting up linked 1teMs wo eects Chapter 8 Adding anew linked items a kant dee ER 176 Modifying ailinkeditenn sabion a a a 178 Deletinga linked item neinna a A A a 178 Reviewing mix match pricing schemes sssssssssssssssssssssesssstssssseesssreesssresnsreesssee 179 Viewing a mix match pricing scheme oo 179 The Mix Match Maintenance window cscs 180 Common Mix Match scenarios ssessssssssssssesssssessssesssreessnreessnresnreesns 183 Combining mix match promotion and discount transactions 184 Setting up promotional pricing ssssssssssesssseesssrsesssseessrstssnnteessneesnnntesnneensnnreesnes 185 Addins A Promotlonins Ali Ald catiss R e E 185 Modifying a promotiomserasanenrana e a A AER 189 Deleting A pr ton e o a AR RREN 189 Defining an exception to a PrOMOTION occ 189 Performing Inventory Control Functions Config
353. nt To change the deposit status to complete click Complete To change the deposit status to void click Void This button is only enabled if the pickup status is complete Note A deposit can be voided on the same business day only Click Save and then click Exit 125 Tender Management Processing a safe withdrawal bank deposit You must transfer tender out of the store s safe a safe withdrawal and into the bank a bank deposit When you process a safe withdrawal bank deposit using the Store Manager the tender amounts are removed from the safe s contents Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are eligible for this transaction Note If you are using the non safe option for tender management deposits are made by default into the bank To perform a deposit under the non safe option click Deposit in the Cash Management Menu window For information about the differences between the safe and non safe tender management configurations see Safe and non safe options on page 105 Entering a new safe withdrawal bank deposit 126 A new withdrawal has a pending status until you complete it You can modify the amounts in a pending transaction Pending withdrawal deposit amounts are not subtracted from the safe s contents For information about completing a deposit see Modifying a safe withdrawal bank deposit on page 128 Before you complete the following steps y
354. nt 5 00 Service Charge 0 00 Pickup 03 11 2002 36 18 Txn Type Rgr Txn Txn Date Time Cashier Txn Amount 13 01 10 02 21 43 1111 74 18 COTTON PANT 38 34 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 1111 McCallum Larry 5 00 1 19 99 1 49 99 Pending Transaction Details Report PDT Number Customer 2 KIM KIM Sell Date 01710 2002 Cancel Fee End Bala 0 00 69 19 99 49 99 349 Reporting Pending Transactions By Item Report Illustrated below is an example of a Pending Transactions By Item Report This report lists all matching transactions sorted by department group and category The number of pending transactions associated with the item item group quantity of items to be picked up total item quantity and the extended sale price is displayed for each item department department group and department category ig Pending Transactions By Item Report ioj xj Design On Design Mode Off On File No Save WeTiplete peletmemplate Send nt y Preview Pending Transactions By Item Report Dem Split View PLU Number Description For Pickup PDT Count Quantity Ext Department Category APPAREL 3 4 4 Show Criteria Department Group LADIES APPAREL 3 4 4 Department BLOUSES 3 4 4 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 3 4 4 Total for All Items 3 4 4 em Export 01 23 2002 09 41 AM 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 ltem Transactions To list the pending transactions pertaining to
355. nt functionality 162 Your head office can send your store files containing batches of new PLU information that will be effective on a certain date at a certain time Commonly this new information consists of new prices but it can consist of other information such as taxes You can also create a batch yourself so that a series of price updates can be implemented at once You can view edit and apply the information in the batches using the batch management function Each time the batch management function is used to change the price of a PLU the information is tracked and you can review it using the retail price audit function For more information on the price audit function see Auditing product price changes on page 167 Each batch you receive has a unique batch number consisting of your store number and a sequential number A batch contains a list of PLUs fields current values for the fields from the PLU table and new values for the fields Using price batch management functionality Your head office uses the Configurator to define the fields that can be affected in the batches of updates and determines if you can edit the information at the store level in the Store Manager The batch does not need to contain updated information for all of the fields Applying a batch The files that contain batches of new PLU information have a pending status until you apply them While the files are pending you can edit the information
356. ntenance window To select the employment status for example permanent temporary click the Employee Status drop down list and select an option The selection of employee status is defined in the Code Table Maintenance window To allow a cashier to override the employee discount rate that you entered in the Employee Disc field click the Force Preset Emp Discount checkbox Leave this checkbox blank to override the employee discount rate at the POS terminal Type a region number that defines the location of the store in which the employee works in the Region Number field Select a number from the Authority Level drop down list to allow the employee to perform certain functions Authority levels range from 1 lowest to 5 highest Authority levels can be linked to POS terminal functions and to the Store Manager s windows so that only authorized staff can perform certain functions To assign a password to an employee type an alphanumeric string up to 6 characters long in the Password field The password is used to log on to the POS terminal and the Store Manager To verify the employee s password type the exact same string of characters in the Verify Password field as you did in the Password field When you click Save if the two strings are not the same verification fails and a warning dialog box appear File Maintenance Features This section provides information about entering the basic information that is used b
357. nventory Maintenance window 245 parameters 245 Physical Inventory Selection window 244 pickup from cash drawer completing 112 displaying 112 entering 111 entering new 111 modifying 112 374 pending transaction 111 performing 111 transactions 111 viewing details 113 voiding 113 PLU New window 143 PLU cross reference adding 169 defining 169 PLU extended fields See extended fields and PLUs PLU information exporting 159 PLU Maintenance window 143 152 153 Future Prices parameters 153 Inventory Control parameters 152 Labels parameters 151 User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers parameters 147 148 Vendor SKU parameters 149 PLU price changes viewing 168 PLU Search window 140 using 141 PLU Selection window 143 147 PLUs 142 194 234 256 adding 143 adding linked item 176 applying extended field options 157 assigning extended field options 157 tare weights to 88 taxes to 80 to departments 70 auditing price changes 167 creating 143 creating a price batch 163 cross reference numbers 142 169 adding 169 defining 169 delete 171 modify 171 defining 147 defining extended fields 153 defining fields for global change 161 defining for global change 160 deleting 147 export files creating updates 159 for third party applications 158 exporting information 158 extended fields 153 See also extended fields maintaining 153 fields 140 file export for third party applications 154 finding 141 generating export files 158 global changes
358. o modify a queue of price stickers l 2 3 4 5 6 On the Main Menu window click Labels Maintenance Click Price Stickers Click Display All All the price sticker print queues are displayed Click the queue you want to modify and then click Open Change the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save Tip To delete an item from a queue select the item and click Delete in the Print Queue Maintenance window Deleting a price sticker queue 262 You can delete a price sticker queue To delete a queue of price stickers 1 25 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup Click Label Parameters The Print Queue Selection window appears Printing price stickers 3 Click Display All All the price sticker print queues are displayed if Print Queue Selection Window _ OF x Queue ID Label Type Description Open New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the queue you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The price sticker queue is deleted Printing a price sticker queue After you create a queue of price stickers you can print it You can either print the stickers immediately after you create the queue or you can print a saved queue The steps in this section describe how to print stickers in a queue you created earlier and saved To print price stickers 1 On the M
359. o the box i n Radio buttons Enable an option Radio buttons appear in groups Monitor Terminals each button represents a related option you can only select 1 radio button in each group Click a radio button to enable it A solid dot in the radio button indicates that it is enabled If you click a radio button the other buttons in the group are automatically deselected Window fields Calendar button Opens a pop up calendar window Click the button to open the calendar window Click arrow buttons to select a month then click a date in the calendar Click OK to close the calendar window The date you selected is displayed in the field beside the button 20 Customizing Store Manager This section provides information about customizing the Store Manager application Customization options that affect the entire Store Manager application include system parameters language security and third party applications The first time you use the Store Manager the customization options must be configured afterwards the options are saved and recalled automatically each time the Store Manager application starts You can also customize the order in which the table records are displayed in each of the Store Manager selection windows This section covers the following topics Defining the Store Manager system parameters Changing the text in the Store Manager Using security functions Adding third party application buttons to menu wind
360. oan You can only modify a pending loan Once you have entered the final information for a loan you can complete it For information about completing a loan see Completing a loan on page 109 You cannot modify a completed loan To make a change to a completed loan you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a loan see Voiding a loan on page 110 To modify a pending loan 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe with the loan 3 Click POS Loan The pending completed deleted and voided loans are displayed in the window 4 Click the loan you want to modify and then click Open The POS Loan Safe Maintenance window displays the loan information i Change the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit Voiding a loan You can only void a completed loan and it must be voided on the same Business Day Voided loans ate visible in the POS Loan Selection window They cannot be modified and they do not affect the cashier s or register s system tender amount during balancing of the safe s contents Amounts are subtracted from and added to the safe For information about completing a loan see Completing a loan on page 109 To void a loan 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe with the loan 3 Click POS Loan The pending completed deleted and voided loans are displayed in the window 4 Click
361. odifying 189 Print Options parameters Department New window 75 Print Queue Maintenance window 261 262 264 265 267 parameters 267 268 Print Queue Selection window 261 262 265 267 printing 376 count sheet 240 department 75 inventory count sheets 240 labels See printing shelf labels launch report macro and print 332 price stickers 253 261 263 269 274 See also price stickers delete printing queue 262 modifying print queue 262 options 151 print custom layout 277 print queue 261 price stickers and shelf labels 253 269 print queues price stickers 261 263 shelf labels 264 266 purchase order report 204 receipts customize header and trailer 53 Receiving report 223 reports 297 Safe Content report 136 shelf labels 253 264 266 269 274 See also shelf labels deleting printing queue 266 modifying printing queue 265 options 151 print custom layout 277 printing queue 266 stickers or labels customized 277 stickers or labels you define 278 transfer report 232 printing options balance report 116 processing bank deposit 126 payroll information 353 product hierarchies categories See categories departments See departments groups See groups user flags See user flags PLUs 65 142 setting up 65 product price changes auditing 167 product vendors 63 adding 84 creating records 84 deleting 86 drop down lists 84 modifying 85 PLU information 149 records 84 setting up 84 promotion adding 185 defining a
362. of golf balls of the same color for free 183 Managing Price Look Ups On the Mix Match Maintenance Window the Match PLU checkbox is checked The Match Price and Sell Price fields for the first 2 packages equal 10 00 The Match Price field for the third item equals 10 00 and the Off field is 100 Buy 2 different items equal to 15 00 and get another different item for free In this scenario if you buy 1 package of white golf tees and 1 package of red golf tees you get a package of blue golf tees for free On the Mix Match Maintenance Window the Unique PLU checkbox is checked the Match Price and the Sell Price fields equal 15 00 Buy 1 item and get another item of equal or less value for 25 off In this scenario if you buy 1 golf hat you get 25 off a package of golf balls golf tees or another hat On the Mix Match Maintenance Window the Complete MM checkbox is checked The OP field is gt the second OP field is lt and the Off field is 25 Buy 1 item and get another item of equal or less value for 25 off get an additional item and save 40 get an additional item and save 50 In this scenario if you buy 1 golf hat you get another hat a package of golf balls or tees for 25 off You also get an additional 40 of any other item and another 50 off your next item On the Mix Match Maintenance Window the Complete MM Calculation at Total Time and Discount on Lowest Price checkboxes are checked The first OP fie
363. of changing all the text in a category is very similar to the process for changing one text In the following steps you are required to enter information and make selections in the Translation window For information about the fields in the window see Translation window on page 26 To change the text of all the objects in a category 1 OIL SR OO A RS On the Main Menu window click Administration Click Translation Click the Category drop down list A list of categories appears Click the appropriate category Click Translate Selected Category An alphabetical list of all the text in the category appears in the bottom half of the window Click the first text you want to change and then type the new text into the field on the right side of the window Click the next text you want to change and type the new text into the field Repeat the previous step until you have typed new text for all the text in the category Click Save and then click Exit 25 Customizing Store Manager Changing all the text in the Store Manager 26 You can change the text of all the objects in the Store Manager regardless of their category In the following steps you are required to enter information and make selections in the Translation window For information about the fields in the window see Translation window on page 26 To change the text of all the objects in the Store Manager 1 2 3 On the Main Menu w
364. ominations ate defined for the tender the denomination button is disabled Use the Denomination button on this window to enter amounts by denomination Once in denomination mode the button s label changes to lump sum To define the amount of the selected tender being removed from the safe and placed in the cash drawer type an amount including the decimal places in the Lump Sum Amount field To select a tender click the tender in the Tender field The Total Lump Sums field displays the total of the lump sum amounts that you enter in the Lump Sum Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Note If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount The Total Denominations field displays the total of the amounts that you enter in the Amount field when you enter amounts by denomination Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations are defined for the tender the denomination fields are not available Click the Denomination button in this window to enter amounts by denomination No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To change the loan s status to completed click Com
365. on issued purchase orders The Store Manager maintains this value automatically 235 Performing Inventory Control Functions 236 Last Sold Date This field contains the most recent date on which the item was sold The Store Manager maintains this value automatically Last Returned Date This field contains the most recent date on which a customer returned the item to the store The Store Manager maintains this value automatically Last Ordered Date This field contains the most recent date on which your store issued a purchase order containing this item The Store Manager maintains this value automatically Last Revd Date This field contains the most recent date that you received the item in your store The Store Manager maintains this value automatically Last Vendor ID This field contains the ID number of the vendor that most recently supplied the item to your store The Store Manager maintains this value automatically Last Cost This field contains the amount the vendor charges the store for the item You can define the cost to the store using the Cost field in the Vendor SKU tab of the PLU Maintenance window List of Orders This field generates the List of Orders report The List of Orders report provides information about purchase orders and receiving transactions The List of Orders report is linked to the report template designer You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and lay
366. onal information about the options You can define details for options in the Store Manager For example assume the following field option types options and option details are defined Collectibles field Figurines option type assigned to the Collectibles field Precious Moments option porcelain figurines option details Teddy bears option wooden carved bears option details When you choose the Collectibles field the Precious Moments and Teddy bears options appear in a drop down list Adding extended options and details You can create extended options and option details for the option types your head office created in the Configurator In the following steps you must enter information and make selections in the Extended Field Options Maintenance window For more information about the fields in the window see The Extended Field Options Maintenance window on page 103 To create extended field options and option details 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Extended Field Options Y Extended Field Options Maintenance Loix Option Types Options New Modify Delete Description Description Id 5000 Interest Groups 1 Beanie Babies Candies iI Picture Frames A Greeting Cards Option Details 0 line s Save Details A ie Ew 100 Maintaining extended customer fields 3 Click the option type to which you want to add the option 4 C
367. or User Guide for further information To configure the hourly rate of pay and the automatic calculation of the overtime rate 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Employee Maintenance W On the Employee Selection window click to highlight an employee and then click the Profiles tab Click New to create a new profile or click Display All and then Open an existing profile Type a unique number in the Profile ID field to identify this profile Type a description in the Description field For example Overtime SS Now Type a number in the Overtime Factor field to represent the amount that is multiplied by the hourly wage amount to equal the hourly overtime rate of pay For example if the hourly rate is 5 00 and the overtime factor is 1 5 then the hourly overtime rate of pay is 7 50 8 Click Save Maintaining employee files 9 Click Open to open an employee profile 10 Select Overtime from the Employee Profile drop down list 11 Type the hourly rate of pay in the Hourly Pay Rate field 12 Click Save and then click Exit The Employee Maintenance window The following list of steps describes how to fill out the fields in the Employee Maintenance window aEmployee 1111 j 0 x Employee ID fi 111 Store Number fi First Name Larry Last Name Smith Active Address f0BrodieBwd City Smithville Region Number isd State Province Ontario Zip Postal Code MIMIS Phone Number
368. or sticker Action Click the drop down list and select a font size from the list This field prints the stickers or labels defined in this window You must click Save to save the sticker or label before you can print the sticker or label Action Click the button This field defines how many copies of each sticker or label is printed You must click Save to save the sticker or label before you can define the number of copies Action Type a number into the field This field opens the display window that allows you to preview the stickers or labels you design before you print them Changes you make to the fields in this window are not reflected in the preview until you click Save to save the sticker or label Action Click the button to toggle between showing and hiding the display window This field adds a blank entry line so you can add information to the stickers or labels Action Click the button This field deletes the entry line that is currently selected Action Click the button e To display a sample of the label click Show Sample The Designed Label Maintenance window displays the following additional information fa Designed Labelll sail fe Soe Wormber PAS WWirisae oe 280 Designing and printing stickers and labels Find PLU PLU Zoom Show Ruler These fields search for the preview of the sticker or label for a specific PLU This field is only visible when the preview is vi
369. ore Administration window click run EOD 4 The End of Day function begins You can monitor the process in the Store Status and the XPS Server Message Box When the function is complete the store s status is closed Note If the End of Day function cannot be completed for any reason the following Terminal Admin Exception Handler window appears providing a reason for the failure 51 Managing the POS Terminals Terminal Admin Exception Handler ol x Terminal ID L Action o fi CASHIER SIGNED ON C Retry C Signoff Make sure cashier signoff at register Bypass C Abort i Exit To solve the problem click a radio button in the Action box or click Exit to close the window intermediate the End of Day function 5 Click Exit when the End of Day process is complete Tip You can print a hard copy of the messages that appear in the XPS Server Message Box by clicking Print Log The log is printed on the default printer Changing the customer display 52 You can customize the messages that are shown on the customer display at the POS terminal You can choose the type of message that is displayed and you can define the text that appears In the following steps you must enter information and make selections in the Customer Display Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window See Click Customer Display on page 52 To change the customer display 1 On the Main Menu wi
370. ormation about the fields in the window see Inventory Parameters Maintenance window on page 192 To define inventory parameters 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup The Store Manager Parameters Menu window appeats 2 Click Inventory Parameters The Inventory Parameters Maintenance window appears 3 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 191 Performing Inventory Control Functions 4 Click Save and then click Exit The Inventory Parameters Maintenance window closes You return to the Store Manager Parameters Menu window Inventory Parameters Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for defining the parameters for inventory control functions g Inventory Parameters Setup l To complete the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window 1 Purchase orders receiving transactions transfers and inventory count PLU lists are assigned numbers automatically by the Store Manager To enable modification of a purchase order number ot document number click the Modify PO Doc Number checkbox 2 To allow a PLU to appear multiple times on a purchase order receiving transaction or transfer click the Include Store Num in PO Doc Num checkbox 3 To allow a vendor s SKU to appear multiple times on a purchase order receiving transaction or transfer click the Allow Duplicate Vendor SKU checkbox 4 Ifa PLU you enter into a purchase order receiving transaction or transfer
371. ormation about the item in the transaction line that you highlighted The item in the highlighted line must be inventory controlled For more information about the Inventory Information window see Viewing inventory information on page 234 Click the button 247 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description Complete This field completes the transaction and implements the changes to the on hand quantities of the items To modify the on hand quantity of an item after you complete the transaction you must create a new transaction The transaction s status is complete Click the button New This field adds a blank line to the bottom of the list of selections that you can use to add a PLU to the PLU list Click the button Adjusting the on hand inventory quantities 248 You can adjust the on hand inventory quantities of an inventory controlled item at any time to correct a discrepancy between the actual quantity you have in your store and the on hand quantity in the Store Manager You must perform a manual adjustment for items that are shipped from your store in transfers by the case and for items that you receive into your store through receiving or transfers by the case The items that are transferred or received by the case are not identified by PLU or vendor s SKU in the inventory transaction The Store Manager cannot reflect their movement An item is inventory controlled if you click o In
372. ory report The following is a sample Category report For information about how the data in some of the columns is calculated see Department Report on page 318 You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Category report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template j Department Report O x Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Saye Template Delete Template Department Report By Category Store s 1 Operator G Green Period 2 17 99 To 2 17 99 Category Number Units Net Sales Discounts EARD e GIN 22 a 2000 4 55 60 00 752 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 FASHION 1 32 000 7273 625 95 78 50 0 00 GROCERY 5 10 000 22 73 111 45 13 98 1 25 1 12 0 00 0 00 3 44 000 797 40 1 25 0 16 59 99 7 52 Page 1 of 1 _ Pint _ 2 20 9391 3 29 12 Export i Detail Exit Loss Prevention Summary The Loss Prevention Summary report contains information about the number of times selected transaction types ate processed Once you have generated the Loss Prevention Summary report you can generate the Loss Prevention Detail report The detail report includes information about each transaction including transaction number date and amount The Store Manager compiles the Loss Prevention Detail report based on the sa
373. ote If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount Click Qty and type a quantity for each denomination The Amount field is automatically filled in with the correct value after a second click in the Tender Amount field Click Save and then click Exit Note The Verified By field is automatically filled in by the Store Manager with the operator number of the person that double checked the tender types and amounts To complete a safe withdrawal 1 Click Complete The tender amounts disappear from view to ensure a blind verification by the second user On the Tender Verification Required window a second user must type their User ID and Password in the corresponding fields The second user must then click each tender type and type the same amount in the same order to verify the initial withdrawal After the second user clicks Done verification is complete and the transaction is completed automatically 127 Tender Management Note Tender verification is the only activity that the second user can perform during their subsession No other Store Manager functions can be accessed via the verification process Tip The Amount fields on the left side of the Maintena
374. ou create you must exit the Price Batch Maintenance window You can then apply the batch from the Price Batches Selection window or the Price Batch Maintenance window The Price Batch Maintenance window contains the fields for editing the batches of new PLU information sent to the store in files from your head office 163 Managing Price Look Ups Your head office defines the fields that you can use when you create a batch The fields appear in the Price Batch Maintenance window the same way they appear in the PLU Maintenance window For example the Qty Required field appears as a checkbox in the PLU Maintenance window and as a checkbox in the Price Batch Management window To create a batch 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click Price Batch Management 3 Click New ia Price Batch New 00010000003 03 28 01 10 38 E 03 2801 1038 03 28 01 10 38 MGT eo SsoveNenT Watieel Iter 4 The Batch ID field defines the unique number identifying this file The number consists of the store number and a sequential number No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 5 The Status field defines the status of the file pending applied No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field based on whether you have applied the file Note The changes in the file take effect immediately after you apply it a Click the box beside the Effective Dat
375. ou must define the selections in the Reason Code drop down list if the Reason parameter is set to mandatory Tender verification of non zero tender amounts is required for safe withdrawals if the tenders are marked for verification in the Configurator Verification is enabled in the Configurator by checking the Verify for Bank Deposit checkbox in the Tender Maintenance window Verification by lump sum is performed after each individual entry verification by denomination is performed after clicking Done at the end of a batch of entries To remove funds from a safe it must be configured via the Configurator to allow withdrawals Tender verification is also set in the Configurator to ensure that a second user double checks the type and amount of each tender that is removed from the safe The authority level of the second user must be equal to or higher than the initial user performing the withdrawal To perform a withdrawal from a safe 1 Click Cash Management 2 Click the safe that you want to make a withdrawal from 3 Click Safe Withdrawal Processing a safe withdrawal bank deposit 4 Click New g 2 Safe 2 Safe Withdrawal New 50 00 10 00 5 00 Click each type of tender that you want to withdraw and type the amount of the withdrawal Click the tender once more the amount appears in the Lump Sum Batch field in addition to the Amount field or For any tender with denominations click Denomination N
376. out of the List of Orders report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 Click the button Inventory History This button opens the Inventory History Information window For information about the fields in the window see Inventory History information window on page 236 Click the button Report To generate a report for this item click Report Inventory History information window You can review the item s historical inventory information in this window but you cannot edit the information jg Inventory History 3 O x Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity on Hand Quantity Quantity Transfer Transfer Sold Returned Adjusted Closing Minimum Maximum Ordered Received In Out Period 06 01 02 06 30 02 Do ofo o o w w w f f f a Report Exit The following list describes the headings in the Inventory History information window Period This field contains the date at the start of the period and the end period You can define the type of time period the Store Manager uses to organize the historical information using the Period Type drop down list in the Inventory Parameter Maintenance Window Viewing inventory information e Quantity Sold This field contains the total quantity of the item that the store sold during the period The Store Manager automatically maintains this value e Quantity Returned This fiel
377. ove a field or column 1 Right click on the report window The shortcut menu appears 2 Click Re position on the shortcut menu 3 Click and hold the field you want to move A grey frame appears around the field 4 Keep the mouse button pressed and drag the field to the new position 5 The X and Y boxes display the screen coordinates of the field you are moving as you drag it to its new position 6 Release the mouse button Hide You can show and hide predefined columns of information but you cannot add new columns to the report To hide a column 1 Right click on the report window The shortcut menu appears 2 Click Hide on the shortcut menu The Column Hide window appears 301 Reporting 3 Click the checkbox beside the column you want to hide 4 Click the checkbox beside the column header that corresponds to the column 5 Click OK The Column Hide window closes and the column is immediately hidden Tip To show the column again clear the check mark from the checkbox beside the column and the header Template Designer fields This window contains fields used to design a report template The following table contains descriptions of fields in the report template Field Description Preview Design On Design Off Template Design Mode Template on File Save Template This field opens the Report Preview window The window displays the report as it would appear if it were printed
378. ow To open the Choose PLU and Operation Type window where you can enter a PLU click Insert To delete the selected item from the file click Remove To save the item you just added or modified as part of the file click Save Item Click Insert to add an item to the batch Click Save Item when you are finished entering the information for each PLU Once you have created the batch it has a status of pending Before you can apply the batch you must close the Price Batch Maintenance window For information about applying a batch see Applying a batch on page 163 Editing a batch Your head office uses the Configurator to define the fields that can be included in a batch If the field is marked as store updatable you can edit the information in it before you apply the batch When you are in edit mode the fields appear as they do in the PLU Maintenance window For example the Allow Discount field appears as a checkbox in the PLU Maintenance window and as a checkbox in the Price Batch Management window WARNING If a checkbox field is grey there is no change to the field indicated in the batch If the checkbox is white the option is disabled If the checkbox is checked the option is enabled Selecting a batch You must select and open a batch before you can edit the information in it To select a batch to edit 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click Price Batch Management Click Display
379. ow A package is created as soon as you link an item to the package PLU WARNING If you check the Use Parent field in the Link Item Maintenance window the Store Manager uses the price and description of the package PLU when the package is sold If you do not check the Use Parent field the Store Manager uses the prices and descriptions that you enter in the Price and Description fields on the Link Item Maintenance window for each of the items in the package Setting up linked items To add an item to a package 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click Link Items g Link Items Selection Window iof x Linked PLU Description 12345000013 12345000014 HEAD RADIAL SKIS 12345000013 12345000015 TYROLIA BINDINGS 12345000013 12345000016 SOLOMON SKI BOOT 3 rows found Display All Query Sor Exit 3 Click New jg Link Item New x PLU if O O O O o Oooo O Linked PLU fa 00 Description Coke t t Ci i i i S SC S Quantity si Price 000 Use Parent M Perform PLU D Deparment Tad M Tas Tax09 Taxi3 T Tax2 Tax l Taxi 7 Taxi 4 I Tas Tax I Tadi Taxi5 J Delete Tax4 T Tas Tad2 T Tade l New Save eip 4 To define the PLU that identifies the package of products type a PLU number in the PLU field This PLU must already be set up on the PLU Maintenance window and the Link Item checkbox in the window must be checked For information about creating
380. ow contains the fields used for selecting the information that appears on custom price stickers or shelf labels and how the text appears when they are printed jg Designed Label Tag1 9 Woe Surber SONU EN The following table contains descriptions of the field in the Designed Label Maintenance window Field Description PLU From To These fields define the range of PLUs for which the stickers or labels are printed You must click Save to save the sticker or label before you can define the range of PLUs Action Type a PLU number in the field Doc Number This field defines the electronic document that contains the items the stickers or labels are printed for When you click this radio button a field appears replacing PLU From To You must click Save to save the sticker or label before you can define the electronic document Action Click the radio button and type a document number into the field that appeats P O Number This field defines the purchase order that contains the items for which the stickers or labels are printed When you click this radio button an field appears replacing the PLU From To You must click Save to save the sticker or label before you can define the purchase order Action Click the radio button and type a purchase order number into the field that appeats 278 Designing and printing stickers and labels Field Description Tag Name Layout Description Tag D
381. ow so you can design your own price stickers and labels for the item click Designed Label To open the Print Queue Selection window click Price Sticker You can use this window to send the items price stickers to a print queue Click Shelf Label to send the items shelf labels to a print queue For information about printing the labels in a print queue see Creating a shelf label queue on page 264 151 Managing Price Look Ups 152 The PLU Maintenance window Inventory Control tab This tab is used for defining the minimum and maximum amount of the PLU that can be in the store The PLU PLU Desc Inventory Control and Inventory Information fields are accessible on all tabs in the PLU Maintenance window ia PLU 12345000004 SILK BLOUSE SIZE 10 To complete the Inventory Control tab 1 To include the item in suggested orders click the Include in Suggested Orders checkbox A suggested order contains a list of items whose on hand quantity is below the minimum allowed and a suggested order amount that brings the on hand quantity of the item up to the maximum allowed You can enter the minimum maximum and current on hand quantity into the Minimum Stock on Hand and Maximum Stock On Hand fields in this window A suggested order can be turned into a purchase order For information about suggested orders see Creating a purchase order from a suggested order on page 198 To set the minimum number of the item that is
382. ows Sorting table records in selection windows 21 Customizing Store Manager Defining the Store Manager system parameters You must define the Store Manager general options before you define options for more specific functions To define system parameters 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 On the Store Manager Parameters Menu window click General Parameters 3 On the Security Menu click General Security Vv Add Default Item To define the general company and store information 1 Type the name of the company in the Company field This field is limited to 50 characters This is the name that appears on reports 2 To enable the system to locate the store logo type the full path and file name of the store logo in the Logo field 3 Type the name of the store in the Store Name field This field is limited to 50 characters This is the name that appeats on reports 4 The store s address is split into two sections Type the street portion of the address in the Address 1 field and type the remainder of the address in the Address 2 field These fields are limited to 50 characters each This is the address that appears on reports 22 Defining the Store Manager system parameters To set the server communication parameters 1 You can define the minutes that elapse before the message window used by the server to communicate with the Store Manager is shut down and communication is
383. p from your store through a transfer by case are not added to or deleted from your on hand inventory You must perform an inventory adjustment to have the Store Manager reflect the movement of these items For information about performing an inventory adjustment see Adjusting the on hand inventory quantities on page 248 To create a transfer 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory Click Store Transfer Click the Transfer In By Case tab or the Transfer Out By Case tab Click New Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit ON RS ND 229 Performing Inventory Control Functions Store Transfer by Case window This window contains the fields used for creating store transfers of cases of items in or out of the store The field descriptions follow i Transfer In by Case New a 30010000006 06 03 2002 06 03 2002 Inventory IN Gh Teton The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Store Transfer by Case window Field Description Txn Num This field defines the unique number that identifies the inventory transaction The inventory transaction number sequence is used for purchase orders receiving transactions transfers and inventory count PLU lists No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a number after you save the transfer Doc Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the transfer
384. password employee discount rate status for example full or part time and commission rate The values you enter into an employee s record are used during a Store Manager session for logging in and for security functions They are also used at the POS terminal during transactions such as employee sales Before you create an employee record you must define the selections in the Employee Type Employee Status and State Province drop down lists in the Employee Maintenance window For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 To add or modify an employee s record you must enter information into the Employee Maintenance window WARNING Your head office can also set up employees and send the files to your store As a result you can not only create new employee records and modify or delete them you can also modify and delete the ones sent from your head office 57 Managing Personnel Adding an employee record 58 You need to add an employee record for all new employees If an employee already has a record you can modify it Do not create a new record Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Employee Type Employee Status and State Province drop down lists in the Employee Maintenance window For information about populating drop down lists Populating drop down lists on page 63 To add an employee record 1 2 On the
385. pe a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK You can also use the Previous Business Date and Current Business Date radio buttons to select the report period To define a range of items to be included in the report click the PLU fields and type a range of PLU numbers in the fields You can also use the Category Group Department User Flag 1 6 and the Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria To select the category to which the items belong that you want included in the report click the Category drop down list and select a category from the list For more information about defining categories see Defining categories on page 65 To select the group with items you want included in the report click the Group drop down list and select a group from the list For more information about defining groups see Defining groups on page 67 To select the department with the items you want included in the report click the Department drop down list and select a department from this For more information about defining departments see Defining departments on page 69 The Userflag 1 6 fields define the user flag option that is assigned to the items you want included in the report Click the drop down list and select a user flag option from the list Using s
386. pes the same way you assign options in the Extended PLU Fields window They appear in the Value field list when you click the extended field in the Extended PLU Fields window After you assign extended options to PLUs you must export the information for the third party applications to use it Maintaining PLU extended fields WARNING To export the PLU and extended field information to a third party application one of the options you assign to the PLU must be an export file type You can assign export file types the same way you assign options using the Extended PLU Fields window For information about assigning options to PLUs see Applying extended field options to PLUs on page 157 To export PLU information 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Export Files Generation The export file types that your head office has defined are displayed in the Generate Export Files window t Generate Export Files Iof Xx Export File Description Export Export Testing M Exit Go 5 Click the Export checkbox beside the export type that you want to export 4 Click Go A dialog box appears indicating the file is being exported The dialog box closes when the export is complete The export s status is done 5 Click Exit Tip The file export process can take several seconds to complete To stop the export process in progress click Stop Creating update export files When you
387. pifejif y ee To complete the User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab 1 To define the user flag options to which the item belongs click the User Flags 1 6 drop down list and select a user flag option from the list The Store Manager automatically completes the User Flags field For information about defining user flag options see Defining user flags on page 77 The apply tax 1 4 fields determine the taxes that are applied to the item when the cashier enters it into a transaction Click the Apply Tax 1 16 checkboxes corresponding to the taxes you want to apply to the item If you want to apply taxes to items based on the tenders used to pay for them you can use the Itemizer fields in the PLU Maintenance window For information about the Itemizer fields see The PLU Maintenance window User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab on page 147 For information about defining taxes see Setting up taxes on page 80 To define the itemizers applied to the item click the Itemizer 1 4 checkboxes to assign the IDs to the item You can use up to 4 itemizers to restrict the tenders that a customer can use to pay for the item You do not explicitly set up itemizers you simply assign itemizers to tenders and to items and if they match the item can be purchased with the tender For example if the tender food stamps has itemizer 2 and PLU 456953545 has itemizer 2 a customer can pay for the item with food stamps If PLU 35687458 has itemizer
388. plate This field deletes the template you designed The next time you generate the report the Store Manager rebuilds the default template and uses it to display the report The Template on File box displays No indicating that you are seeing the report in the default template Action Click the button X Y These fields display the coordinates of a field or column you are repositioning relative to the top left corner of the report Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes these fields as you drag a field or column to a new position Previewing a report You can preview a report after you generate it but before you print it so that you can make sure its layout is appropriate In addition the preview window in the Store Manager includes options for changing the orientation of the report from portrait to landscape You do not need to activate the template designer to preview a report but you can only use the pteview option for the reports that have the template designer attached to them To preview a report 1 Click Preview The Report Preview window appears 2 Click Zoom In and Zoom Out to examine the report from the magnification you want 3 Click Exit The Report Preview window closes and you return to the report window You can change the paper orientation of the report by clicking the Orientation drop down list and selecting an orientation from the list The orientation you select is not saved
389. plete To change the loan s status to void click Void This button is only enabled if the loan s status is completed Note A loan can be voided on the same business day only Click Save and then click Exit Performing a loan float Tip The Amount boxes on the left side of the window only display the amounts you enter for the loan You cannot edit these fields directly To enter an amount click the tender row on the left side of the window and enter the amount in the fields on the right side of the window Completing a loan A loan has a pending status until you complete it Completed loan amounts are added to the cashier s ot registet s system amounts and are subtracted from the safe s contents You cannot modify a completed loan but you can void it If you find an error in a completed loan you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a loan see Voiding a loan on page 110 To complete a loan 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the chosen safe 3 Click POS Loan The pending completed deleted and voided loans are displayed in the window 1a 1 Safe1 POS Loan Selection Window Pending 4 Click the loan you want to complete and then click Open The POS Loan Safe Maintenance window displays the loan information Click Complete The loan s status changes to completed 6 Click Exit 109 Tender Management Modifying a l
390. plete the steps below and create a level 1 pricing scheme for PLU 456987268 at 4 55 Preferred customers pay the level 1 price You can repeat the steps below and create a level 2 pricing scheme for the same PLU at 3 99 Gold customers pay the level 2 price Head office can define a different price for an item which would be effective for a defined period at some point in the future This information is updated through a file upload at the end of day If a future price has been set up for an item you can view the future price in the Quantity Level Pricing window To create a quantity or level pricing scheme 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click Qty Level Pricing ja Quantity Level Pricing Selection Window Description New Delete 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 3 Click New Quantity Level Pricing PREFERRED 51 x General Future Price PLU Fa Sti ISSLKXTTE Level 1 Quantity 0 Naw Price 40 50 Description PREFERRED __ Seve Taxi M Tas Tag Tax13 I Delete Tax2 M Tax6 J Tax10 T Tada Exit Tax3 J Tax I Taxt1 T Taxis T Tax4 Tax8 I Taxi 2 J Taxi 6 Note You must open the Quantity Level Pricing window each time you want to view a quantity or level pricing scheme 173 Managing Price Look Ups 174 10 To define the PLU to which you are assigning a quantity or level pricing scheme type a PLU number in the PLU field The
391. plied only when every item is different For example assume a mix match pricing scheme that sells 3 items that normally cost 35 each for 1 00 If you check the Unique PLU checkbox the customer must purchase 3 different items costing 35 to qualify for the special price If you clear the Unique PLU checkbox the customer can purchase 3 of the same item and still qualify for the special mix match price This option specifies that all items in the mix match be the same as user flag 1 This option specifies that user flag 1 is required for the mix match definition to be unique 181 Managing Price Look Ups 182 Field Description Calculation at Total Time Discount on Lowest Price Policy ID Match by Merchandise Type Vendor User Flag 1 Department Dept Group Category Alt 1 9 Buy Quantity Alt 1 9 OP Alt 1 9 Match Price Alt 1 9 Sell Price This checkbox indicates that mix match calculations are processed at the end of a transaction when the Total key is pressed at the POS If left unchecked the mix match is processed as the items are scanned at the POS This checkbox indicates that the discount is given on the lower priced item in the mix match transaction For example buy one item and get another item of equal or lesser value at a discount This field identifies the policy that is part of the mix match If enabled this checkbox indicates that mix match pricing criteria is one
392. pplied to an item or transaction only 1 can be set up to apply tax on tax To make the tax a value added tax embedded in the items price click the Use VAT checkbox To make the tax a value added tax that should be embedded in the item s price and is not click the Add VAT To Item Price checkbox When the cashier enters the item into a transaction the tax amount is calculated and added to the item s price You can define how information about this tax is presented in Sales reports if it is a value added tax It can appear in the tax gross reduction or other reduction section Click the Sales Report Location drop down list and select an option from the list Select No print if you do not want the information to appear on reports You must use the Use VAT or the Add VAT to Item Price checkbox in this window to indicate that the tax is a VAT You can choose to print the tax description the description and the amount or to not print the VAT information on the customer s receipt Click the Print Style drop down list and select a print option from the list You must enable the Use VAT or the Add VAT to Item Price fields in this window to indicate that the tax is a VAT To set a threshold transaction amount below which the tax is not charged type and amount including decimal places in the Threshold Amount field If you do not click either the Use On Item Amount or Use On Differential checkboxes the threshold amount is applied to the
393. print count sheets that can help you perform inventory counts Once you complete an inventory count you can compare the actual quantities to the on hand quantities in the Store Manager and perform manual adjustments to on hand quantities as necessary For information about adjusting on hand quantities after a count see Adjusting the on hand quantities after a count on page 243 Printing a count sheet 240 An inventory count sheet is a list of PLUs descriptions and blank fields The store staff can use the sheets to record the quantity of each item as they perform inventory counts You can enter criteria to determine the PLUs that are included on the count sheet The count sheets do not include the expected on hand quantity of the items To generate a count sheet 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Count Sheet lolx Product Group C Product Hierarchy C PLU Range Primary Vendor C User Flag 1 Shelf Location Range Destination Screen C File Count Sheet Required by 05 27 2005 Exit Reset Criteria Generate Sheet Enter the criteria for the count sheet into the fields Different data entry fields are displayed depending on the product group parameter selected Product Hierarchy PLU Range Primary Vendor User Flag 1 Shelf Location Range If you have set parameters to display the shelf location on the count sheet in the Configurator Transactions gt Inventory gt G
394. r The Txn Date field contains the date on which the safe balance transaction is created No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the system date of the computer it is running on The Business Date field contains the current business date Note that this date can be different than the system date Select the reason that you ate performing the safe balance transaction from the Reason drop down list You define the selection of reasons that appear in this drop down list on the Code Table Maintenance window You can define any notes that you want to record about the transaction Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters in length in the Notes field The Tender field contains the tenders that you can include in the safe balance A tender is actually included in the balance if you enter a value in the corresponding Amount field on this window Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are available for safe balance This field contains a list of the tenders that are eligible No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the tenders that are eligible for deposit To enter a safe balance amount for a tender click the tender and complete the fields on the right side of this window To enter an actual amount for a tender click Actual and complete the fields on the right side of this window The System field indicates the amounts of the t
395. r files from the Configurator 13 parameters 156 315 system defining 22 Parameters Menu window 256 partial order completing transaction 222 receiving 222 223 passwords access to windows 28 373 changing 28 employee 28 payroll 353 clock in out editing employee times 356 357 exporting files 356 parameters 356 reviewing employee times 356 confirming clock in out times 360 exporting clock in out files to head office 361 functions 353 parameters 353 configuring 353 354 Payroll Clock In Out Detail report 314 316 altering appearance 316 compiling 316 Payroll Clock In Out Detail window 357 parameters 358 Payroll Clock In Out Report Criteria window 315 parameters 315 Payroll Clock In Out Summary report 314 315 altering appearance 316 example 316 parameters 315 Payroll Parameters Maintenance window 354 parameters 354 Payroll Summary and Payroll Detail report 292 pending loan transaction 106 Performance Detail report 344 345 altering appearance 345 parameters 344 Performance Report Selection Criteria window 344 345 parameters 344 Performance Summary report 344 example 345 parameters 344 performing administrative tasks 283 cash drawer pickup 111 inventory control functions 191 loan 106 pickup from cash drawer 111 tender management functions 105 performing query in selection window 19 on safe transactions 137 personnel management tasks 57 physical inventory count count sheets 240 performing 240 Physical I
396. r head office defines a file export type they choose fields from the PLU Maintenance window to be included in the file If you assign a file export type to a PLU each time you change the information in any of these selected fields a one line update file is created automatically for use by the third party application For example assume an export file type is defined for use by a third party application and the type definition includes a PLU s description in the file If you modify the description of PLU 456692471 an update file is automatically exported containing the description change The name and path of the update file is defined by your head office using the Configurator 159 Managing Price Look Ups Making global changes to PLUs If there are changes that you want to make to a group of items such as applying a user flag option to all of them or allowing the items to be eligible for an employee discount you can use the global PLU change function To use the global change function to change fields for PLUs you must first define the criteria that identifies the PLUs you want the change applied to then you must define the change Defining the PLUs to be changed You must define the criteria that identifies the PLUs to be changed Only PLUs that match all the criteria you choose are changed To define the PLU criteria 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 2 Click Global Change 3 Click the Change Criteri
397. r store if required For each inventory count you perform you can create and save a list of PLUs You create inventory count PLU lists using the Physical Inventory Define window You can open each PLU list and adjust on hand quantities in the Physical Inventory Maintenance window 243 Performing Inventory Control Functions Creating an inventory count PLU list If you use a count sheet to help you with your inventory you can choose the same criteria in the Physical Inventory Define window so that the PLU list matches the items you counted Once you create a PLU list you can open it and adjust the on hand quantities of the items in it For information about making the adjustment to on hand inventories see Entering new on hand quantities on page 244 In the following steps you must enter information into the Physical Inventory Define window To create a PLU list 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Define APPAREL LADIES APPAREL Click New Enter the criteria for the PLU list into the fields Click Generate Transaction The Physical Inventory Maintenance window displays the PLU list Click Save OV Ue Oe Entering new on hand quantities Once you create a PLU list you can open it and adjust the on hand quantities of the items in it For information about creating a PLU list see Creating an inventory count PLU list on page 244 The Physical
398. rates a PLU For example if you type 2 into this field the Store Manager generates a PLU comprised of a leading character merchant ID 2 character sequence number and check digit Click on the Quick PLU New Item Default drop down list and choose a default option To define the merchant ID number that always follows the leading character in a PLU generated by the Store Manager via the unique PLU generation function type a number up to 5 characters long in the Merchant ID field This number appears in all generated PLUs Leave the field blank if you do not want the merchant ID to appear in the PLUs The check digit follows the sequence number To define the rule that determines the check digit used in the PLUs that the Store Manager generates when you use the unique PLU generation function type an ID number in the Check Digit ID field You should obtain the ID number from yout head office To define the default vendor that is automatically entered into fields when you have not selected a vendor click the Default Vendor drop down list and select a vendor from the list To automatically print price stickers click the Auto Print Price Sticker Labels checkbox To automatically print shelf labels click the Auto Print Shelf Labels checkbox 23 Customizing Store Manager To configure the Cash Safe Management parameters 1 You can set the maximum amount that the cashier or register s actual tender amount can be above ot below the
399. re Number Exit The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Standard Labels Format Maintenance window Field Description Format ID This field defines the unique number that identifies the format Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number Label Type This field defines the type of label sticker or shelf label that can use the format Action Click the drop down list and select a label type from the list Description This field defines the description of the format Action Type an alphanumeric description up to 40 characters long into the field PLU Number This field determines if the PLU is printed on the sticker or label that uses this PLU Description Price Date Code format Action Click o the checkbox to include the PLU in the format This field determines if the PLU s description is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click O the checkbox to include the description in the format This field determines if the PLU s price is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the price in the format This field determines if the date code is printed on the sticker or label that uses this format Action Click o the checkbox to include the date code in the format 257 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers 258 Field Description
400. record 97 departments 75 employee record 60 extended options 102 156 group 69 label and sticker format 256 linked item 178 PLU 147 PLU cross reference 171 price sticker queue 262 promotion 189 quantity or level pricing scheme 175 record from a table 17 report macro 294 shelf label queue 266 sticker or label type 270 store s record 93 tare weight 90 tax 82 user flag option 79 vendor 86 Demographic parameters Customer Maintenance window 98 Department New window General parameters 71 Print Options parameters 75 taxes parameters 73 Department Categories Selection window 37 67 Department Category Maintenance window 65 Department Detail report 319 example 319 Department Group Maintenance window 68 Department Groups Selection window 67 68 Department Maintenance window 15 Depattment report 317 altering appearance 318 Category report 321 data calculation formulas 318 Department Detail report 318 example 318 Group report 320 parameters 317 Department Report Criteria window 317 parameters 317 368 Department Summary and Detail report 292 departments 63 adding 70 assigning PLUs to 70 taxes to 80 toagtoup 70 user flags to 70 assigning taxes 73 cteating 69 70 defining 69 deleting 75 Department report 317 318 See also Department report modifying 75 PLUs 69 print options 75 user flags 77 Departments Selection window 15 19 69 70 75 deposits Configurator verification 126 from sa
401. report 314 management functions 105 138 parameter files 13 pickup from cash drawer 111 quety safe transactions 137 safes See safes withdrawal from safe for bank deposit 126 Tender Detail report 314 foreign tender 314 tender management functions performing 105 Tender report 292 312 example 313 Tender Report Criteria window 312 parameters 313 Tender report data calculation formulas 314 Terminal Admin Exception Handler window 43 45 46 48 50 51 Terminal Administration window 42 43 44 46 47 text changing for all category 25 changing for all objects 26 changing for single object 24 changing in the Store Manager 24 third party applications 34 adding buttons to menu window 34 authority levels 34 export files for extended fields 158 PLUs 154 exporting files 158 third party application buttons adding to windows 34 Transaction List window parameters 137 transactions searching in electronic journals 288 types authority levels 32 transfer creating 229 inventory 224 by the case 229 creating 225 using PLUs 225 report printing 232 Transfer in buy PLU parameters 225 Transfer in by Case parameters Store Transfer Selection window 229 Transfer out by Case parameters Store Transfer Selection window 229 Transfer out by PLU parameters Store Transfer Selection window 225 Transfer Report window 233 Translate Text window 28 translation 28 Translation window 26 individual text 28 U Unique PLU Generation parameters Genera
402. rest Group 1 k Interest Group 2 JPicture Frames Interest Group 3 Plush Toys Locations Save Exit To configure the parameters in the Extended Field Options Maintenance window 1 The Option Types ID field contains the unique number that identifies the option type Your head office uses the Configurator to define option types No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the option type s ID number 2 The Option Types Description contains the description of the option type Your head office uses the Configurator to define option types No action required The Store Manager completes this field with the option type s description 3 The Options ID field contains the unique number that identifies the option Do not type into this field The Store Manager completes this field with the number you typed in the Option ID field in the Extended Field Option window The Extended Field Option window appears when you click New or Modify 4 The Options Description field defines the description of the option You do not type directly into this field The Store Manager completes this field with the description you type into the Description field in the Extended Field Option window The Extended Field Option window appears when you click New or Modify 5 To define the option s details type the details in the Option Details field 6 Click Save Details to save the information that you typed in the Option Det
403. ria The Electronic Journal Viewer This window shows the fields used to search for transactions in the electronic journal files g Electronic Journal Store 1 Register 1 Day 0 Date 5 16 2005 3 Ioj x IIE na d of 221 Complete AUDITS TOTALS RESET TOTALS RESET HRAAAAAAAAAATAAAAAAAAAAAAAAARAAAA AAA AEE Multi Journal Search r Print Method G S g smele Current Transaction Entire Journal File KKK KEAAAKAAAKTEAAA TEAR AT SOFTWARE INSTALL SOFTWARE VERSION AllPRemening Search Direction Search Method TRIVERSITY PC POSU a s SERVER NETBIOS WINSOCK TCP IP ASCTXN Up Include Spaces Down Exclude Spaces EP SIG CPV 9 1 0 0Build792005 5 11 VISA FDATA Search Criteria GENERIC CHEQUE SMART CARD VALUELINK SVC AJB TRANSNET_XMNL NOVA COMM QUEUE CREDIT SOFTWARE LICENSEE LICENSE NUMBER 0 LICENSED TERMINALS 99 J Date f z 5 20 2005 I Time f z 00 00 00 AM E M Cashier Number gt l Transaction Number gt I I Signature Present For Transaction Signature Search For Text Clear Search Stop Close To perform a multi journal search 1 To search an open journal file for transactions that match the search criteria click the Single radio button 2 Click the All radio button to search all journal files 3 To search all journal files from the open journal onward click the All remaining radio button 288 Reading the journal
404. ribes deleting a record in the employee table You can apply the same procedure to deleting records in other tables in the Store Manager 17 Getting Started To delete an employee record 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 On the Administration Menu window click Employee Maintenance 3 On the Employee Selection Window click Display All to display a list of all the records in the table or click Query to initiate a search for a specific record lt Employee Selection Window ini x Emp ID First Nname Last Name Store Salesman Nbr ID 1111 Alex Anderson 1 1212 11115 2222 Steve Smith 9999 2224 22245 3333 Jenny Johnson 99994 3334 33340 cee Paul Pollock 4444 Ted Thompson 5555 Gary Green s9994 7777 _ 7777 0 999 o 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 09 0 Be 6666 Frank Ford 8888 Robert Blanchard 8888 9999 Benoit Landry 9999 1010 Jacques Jodoin 1010 10100 1011 Carl Jackson 1011 o0 Open New Delete 11 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the employee record you want to delete 5 Click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Employee Selection Window You are about to delete this record permanently from the database OK 6 Click OK The employee s record is deleted 18 About the navigation system Performing a query in a selection window Selection windows display selected fields from the
405. rint Export Exit The following table contains the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns follow Column Formula System Total of the tender received reissued refunded Note Reissued and refunded amounts are usually negative Short Over System actual tender in cash drawer Macro The Store Manager assigns each report macto to a button in the Report Macro List Menu window When you launch a macro the reports in it are generated based on the criteria you choose when you define the macro They are not displayed on your screen in the report window 331 Reporting For information about defining the reports in each macro and the criteria for the reports see Defining report macros on page 291 To launch a macro and print the reports defined in it 1 On the Main Menu window click Reports 2 In the Report Menu window click Report Macro 3 Click the button corresponding to the macro you want to run The reports are generated and printed Dialog boxes appear to inform you of the progress of the generating and printing of each report When the macro is finished a dialog box appears informing you that the macro is complete 4 Click OK Using inventory reports You can compile several different reports from the Store Manager that provide information about inventory levels costs sales and profits from inventory controlled items Once you have compiled a report and it is displ
406. rmation about purchasing habits Once you create a customer s record it is available at the POS terminal The cashier can search for the customer s information instead of re entering it Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections in the Customer Type Customer Status and State Province drop down lists For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 In the following steps you ate required to enter information and make selections in the Customer Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Customer Maintenance window Demographic tab on page 98 95 File Maintenance Features To create a new customer record 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Customers f Customer Selection Window iof x Customer Last Name First Name Phone Number E London EEE 1 row s found Display AlI Query Sort Exit 3 Click New 4 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 5 Click Save and then click Exit Maintaining a customer record 96 You can edit the information in a customer s file you create in the Store Manager or one that is created from prompts at the POS A file that contains only information from prompts at the POS terminal has fewer completed fields In the following steps you ate required to enter information and make selections in the Customer Maintenan
407. rocess e xcpt log This log file contains information on errors or general exceptions that have occurred within the application It is mainly intended for debugging purposes e event log This log file is also intended mainly for debugging purposes It contains information on various events occurring within the application or between the application and the server e apply log The apply file log contains operational information from files such as the plu xref and promo files It also logs information which you can view on purchase orders receiving documents inventory adjustments physical inventory and store transfers To view the contents of a log file 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Log Files g Store Manager Deluxe Store 1 5 xi Topics Printer Window Help I lt a Log File Apply Search Go Next Exit 12 40 21 plutxn asc 15406 bytes 73 records applied on Server May 16 12 40 21 plutxn2 asc 922 bytes 0 records applied on Server May 16 12 40 46 Empxtxn asc 457 bytes 4 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 43 bucketmy asc 4 bytes 1 records applied on server 5 1 May 16 12 41 43 category asc 72 bytes records applied on server May 16 12 41 43 custdisp asc 159 bytes records applied on Server May 16 12 41 43 coupon asc 4272 bytes 96 records applied on Server May 16 12 41 43 dept asc 4687 bytes 29 records applied on server May 16 12 41 43 dis
408. rrant that it is error free SAP MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Coding samples Any software coding and or code lines strings Code included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system environment The Code is only intended better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the Code given herein and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code except if such damages were caused by SAP intentionally or grossly negligent Internet hyperlinks The SAP documentation may contain hyperlinks to the Internet These hyperlinks are intended to serve as a hint where to find supplementary documentation SAP does not warrant the availability and correctness of such supplementary documentation or the ability to serve for a particular purpose SAP shall not be liable for any damages caused by the use of such documentation unless such damages have been caused by SAP s gross negligence or willful misconduct Accessibility The information contained in the SAP Library documentation represents SAP s current view of accessibility criteria as of the date of publication it is in no way intended to be a binding guideline on how to ensure accessibility of software products SAP specifically disclaims any liability with respect to
409. rs or labels This field is only active if you click Current Format ID in this window If you do not click the radio button this field displays the ID number of the format you defined for the item in the Labels tab of the PLU Maintenance window For information about defining formats for stickers or labels see Creating label and sticker formats on page 255 Action Click the drop down list and select a format from the list This field sends the queue to the printer Action Click the button 268 Designing and printing stickers and labels Field Description New This field adds a blank entry line to the queue Action Click the button Delete This field deletes an item from the queue Action Click the button Designing and printing stickers and labels You can design custom price stickers and shelf labels that you can print using a standard printer You must first define a sticker or label type then define the information and how it will appear on the sticker or label type WARNING You can only design custom price stickers and shelf labels if you click o Allow Price Label Design in Back Office in the Label Parameters Maintenance window For information about the fields in the Label Parameters Maintenance window see General Label Parameters Maintenance window on page 259 Creating new types of stickers and labels You can design a new type of price sticker or shelf label by defining its size
410. rt see Printing a transfer report on page 232 Click the button 228 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Inventory Information This field opens the Inventory Information window The window contains information about the item in the line of the transfer that you have highlighted The item in the highlighted line must be inventory controlled For more information about the Inventory Information window see Viewing inventory information on page 234 Click the button Complete This field completes the transfer You cannot modify a transfer after you complete it The transfer s status becomes complete For information about completing a transfer see Completing a transfer on page 232 Click the button Void This field voids the completed transfer You cannot void a transfer until you have completed it For information about voiding a transfer see Voiding a transfer on page 233 Click the button Transferring inventory in and out by the case You can use the transfer by case function to record the receipt of items in your store that are shipped in cases only When you create a new transfer it has a status of pending For information about completing a transfer by case see Completing a transfer on page 232 In the following steps you must enter information into the Inventory Transfer by Case window Items that you receive into your store or shi
411. rting Defining This section provides information about the reports you can print from the Store Manager including descriptions of the windows used to define report criteria and descriptions of the information the reports provide This section covers the following topics e Accessing the reports e Defining report macros e Compiling a report e Printing a report e Exporting a report e Emailing a report e Using the report template designer e Using standard reports e Using inventory reports To access the Reports menu 1 On the Main Menu window click Reports 2 Click the icon that represents the report you want to access 3 Complete the field information in the window as required report macros You can create up to ten macros to automate the generation and printing of reports from the Store Manager For each macro you can define a sequence of reports and their report criteria The Store Manager assigns the macro to a button on the Report Macro Menu window When you want to print the reports in the sequence click the button For more information about running the macro to print the reports see Macro on page 331 g P P 8 291 The following is a list of the reports you can assign to a macro and the date type and report type criteria available for each Report Name Item Movement Sales and Sales Analysis Sales Tax Non Merchandise Tender Payroll Summary and Payroll Detail Department
412. rtment When you create a department you must assign it to a group You must define a group before you can assign departments to it After you have defined a department you can assign PLUs to it You can also further separate a department with user flags To add a department 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Departments 9 Departments Selection Window lel ES Dept Number Dept Description Group Number OMEN PANT 100 OMEN TOP 100 105 SWEATERS 100 nos PACKETS o et RENTAL 2 fag ACTIVEWEAR 20 Open Delete 79 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit 3 On the Departments Selection window click New Wd 4 On the Department New window click the General tab Setting up the product hierarchy 10 11 12 13 14 WARNING Some options that you can define in the Department Maintenance window are also defined on an item by item basis in the PLU Maintenance window If you click the Use Department checkbox in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window the tax itemizer discount return and scale item options you define in this window are used for the item If you leave the Use Department checkbox clear the options you define in the PLU Maintenance window are used for the item PE E New Iof x General Taxes Print Options Department Dept Group x Preset Amount o oo Min Price 0 00 Add Amt Desc Force Pres
413. s Weekdays Sun Mon Tue Wed Thr Fri Sat Average Period Transactions Z Net Sales Z Items Net Sales Items 08 304M 09 00AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 09 00AM 09 30AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 09 30AM 10 00AM 1 00 37 50 32 49 38 99 1 00 37 50 32 49 1 00 10 00AM 10 30AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 10 30AM 11 00AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 00AM 11 30AM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 30AM 12 00PM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00PM 12 30PM 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 a Print Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario Page 4 of 6 2 19 9910 05 56 Export The following table contains the formulas used to calculate the data in some of the columns Column Formula of total transactions Number of transactions during time increment total number of transactions number of days of total net sales Net sales during time increment total net sales numbet of days of Total Items Sold Number of items sold during time increment total items sold number of days Average net sales Net sales during time increment numbet of transactions during time increment number of days Average Items Number of items sold in time increment number of transactions during increment number of days 329 Reporting POS Balance The Balance report contains information indicating if a
414. s and phone number or you can create the customer s record in the Store Manager You can enter more information about the customer if you create the file in the Store Manager Regardless of how the customer s file is created it is available both at the POS terminal and in the Store Manager This section discusses creating a customer s record in the Store Manager Your head office can use the Configurator application to determine the customer information that the cashier can enter or review at the POS terminal Once you have created a customer record you can track specific characteristics such as buying habits and you can use extended fields Extended fields are customized fields that you can define to contain a type of information and then attach to a customet s record For information about extended fields see Maintaining extended customer fields on page 99 Before you create a customer record you must define the selections in the Customer Type Customer Status and State Province drop down lists For information about populating drop down lists see Populating drop down lists on page 63 To add or modify a customer s record you must enter information in the Customer Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Customer Maintenance window Demographic tab on page 98 Creating a new customer record When you create a customer record you can enter demographic information and some info
415. s are e Buy any 2 items of the same price and get the third same priced item for free e Buy 2 of the same item and get the third of the same item for free e Buy 2 different items to total a specified dollar amount and get another different item for free e Buy 1 item and get another item of equal or lesser value for 25 off e Buy 1 item and get another item of equal or lesser value for 25 off get an additional item and save 40 get an additional item and save 50 For more information on the above examples see Common Mix Match scenarios on page 183 It is also possible to combine a mix match sale with promotions and discounts For examples of a combined transaction involving promotions discounts and mix matches see Combining mix match promotion and discount transactions on page 184 For instructions on how to set up promotions see Setting up promotional pricing on page 185 Viewing a mix match pricing scheme You can review the mix match pricing schemes that your head office sets up To review a mix match pricing scheme 1 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management 179 Managing Price Look Ups 2 Click Mix Match a Mix Match Selection Window 10 REVLON OFFER 9 TENNIS PACKAGE 3 for 1 00 2 3 1 50 7 for 1 00 BUY ONE GET ONE FREE Any 3 for 15 1 3 for 12 for 9 99 EN S PANTS SPECIAL 41BLUE SHIRT SPECIAL HIRT AND TIE Click Display All The existing mix matches are listed in
416. s in the fields You can also use the Category Group Department User Flag 1 6 and the Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria 2 To select the category to which the items belong that you want included in the report click the Category drop down list and select a category from the list 3 To select the group with items you want included in the report click the Group drop down list and select a group from the list 4 To select the department with the items you want included in the report click the Department drop down list and select a department from this 5 The Userflag 1 6 fields define the user flag option that is assigned to the items you want included in the report Click the drop down list and select a user flag option from the list 6 To specify the supplier of the items you want included in the report click the Vendor drop down list and select a supplier from the list 7 To include items with a negative quantity on hand in the report click the Negative Available Quantity Only checkbox 8 To generate a full or compact report click either the Full Report or Compact Report radio button A compact report shows only one line of information specific to only 1 Bucket Using inventory reports 9 Ifyou choose to generate a compact report you have the option of displaying In Stock Quantity for any or all of the Buck
417. s record You can delete a store s record To delete a store s record 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Stores Click Display All The store records are displayed in the window Click the store whose information you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The store s record is deleted 93 File Maintenance Features 94 The Store Maintenance window The fields in this window are used for creating records that contain information about other stores 9 Store 1 olx Store Number T Store Name BBC Wer o Address R23ABC Pace City forono District Number I i is State Province 1 Zip Postal Code Mee Contact 1 Daisy Smith Contat JBonnieJones Account Number fh23456 Phone j416 852 8585 Fax J 416 852 8595 Email Address ey Web Site OOOO Save Delete Exit New To set the parameters in the Store Maintenance window 1 To assign an identification number to a store type the number in the Store Number field 2 To assign a name to a store type the name in the Store Name field 3 To record the number and street portion of the store s address type the address in the Address field 4 To record the city portion of the store s address type the address in the City field 5 To define the ID number of the district where the store is located type a number in the Dis
418. s this field but you can edit the information in it Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field Required by This field represents the date by which the physical inventory count must be completed Click the button beside the field to open the pop up calendar window Click a date and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field Note This field defines any notes regarding the transaction You can enter any information about the adjustment up to 20 characters This information is displayed in the Inventory Adjustment Report Origin This field indicates the origin of the transaction electronic document manual No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 246 Adjusting on hand inventory quantities Field Description PLU XREF This field defines the unique number that identifies the item Type a number into the field Description This field defines the item s description Retail Price Qty Actual Qty Current Qty Variance Extended Variance Report Inventory Information No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field indicates the item s retail price You define the retail price in the Retail Price field in the PLU Page 1 tab of the PLU Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this fiel
419. select the user flag options 4 To define the new vendor that you are assigning to the PLUs click the Vendor ID drop down list and select a vendor from the list 5 To define the new format for price stickers that you are assigning to the PLUs click the Price Sticker drop down list and select a format 6 To define the new loyalty programs that the PLUs are eligible for type the ID numbers into the Loyalty ID fields A PLU can be eligible for up to 4 loyalty programs Obtain the loyalty program ID numbers from your head office Your head office sets up loyalty programs outside the Triversity software 7 To allow the PLUs to be eligible for discounts click the Allow Discount checkbox Your head office uses the Configurator to define discounts 8 To allow the PLUs to be eligible for employee discounts during employee sale transactions click the Allow Employee Disc checkbox For information about assigning employee discount rates to employees see Maintaining employee files on page 57 9 Ifthe PLUs are under inventory control click the Inventory Controlled checkboxes 10 Click the Min Stock checkbox and select one of the following three radio buttons e Change e Qty Change e New Qty 11 To include the PLUs in suggested orders click Include in Sugg Order checkboxes 12 Click the Max Stock checkbox and select one of the following three radio buttons e Change e Qty Change e New Qty Using price batch manageme
420. ser flags and send the files to your store You can modify or delete the ones created by your head office as well as the ones you define Defining categories Categories are highest in the product hierarchy Categories contain groups The Category table has a selection and a maintenance window You can add modify or delete category records in the Store Manager You must create categories before you can assign groups to them To add or modify a category you must enter information into the Department Category Maintenance window 65 File Maintenance Features 66 Adding a category After you have defined a category you can define groups and assign them to the category To add a category 1 2 3 6 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance Click Department Categories Click New je Department Category FASHION Iof x Category Number New Save Category Description Delete Exit ddi On the Department Category Maintenance window type a number in the Category Number field that identifies the category In the Category Description field type a description of the category up to 40 characters long Click Save and then click Exit Once you have defined a category you can define and assign groups to it Modifying a category You can modify the description of a category after it is defined To modify a category 1 2 3 4 S On the Main Menu window c
421. server in your store The information that your head office downloads to your store is stored as records in tables It is used by both the Store Manager and the POS Xpress You can use the Store Manager to add information to tables at the store level Although the Store Manager is a store level management tool and theConfiguratotr is a head office tool they can both add or modify the information in some common tables WARNING B ecause your head office is not notified of the changes that you make to the common tables using the Store Manager it is very important that your head office clearly define the areas for which you ate responsible at the store To avoid entering conflicting information your store or your head office should update the information in each table You can use the Store Manager ssecurity function to restrict access to tables in the Store Manager For information about security Using security features on page 28 Both the Store Manager and the Configurator can update the following tables e Employee e Category e Group e Department e Tare weight e ID Code e Vendor e Store e User flag PLU e PLU cross reference e Quantity and level pricing e Link items e Promotion e Taxes 12 About the Store Manager Parameter files from the Configurator Your head office must download three sets of parameters so that the Store Manager can function properly They are e Register paramet
422. shape and the margins that determine its printable area Once you have created a new type of sticker or label you can define the information and how it appears For information about defining the contents of the sticker or label see Designing a new sticker or label on page 274 To add or modify a sticker or label type record you must enter information into the Design Label Definition window For information about the fields in the window see Design Label Definition window on page 272 Adding a new type of sticker or label You can create ne w types of s tickers or labels In the following steps you must enter information into the Design Label Definition window For information about the fields in the window see Design Label Definition window on page 272 To create a new sticker or label type 1 On the Main Menu window click Parameters Setup 2 Click Label Parameters 269 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers 270 3 Click Designed Labels Layout Definition Open New Delete 2 rows found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click New 5 Complete the fields in the window as appropriate 6 Click Save and then click Exit button Modifying a sticker or label type You can modify the characteristics of a sticker or label type you define In the following steps you must enter information into the Design Label Definition window For information about the fields in the window see
423. sible Action 1 Click the PLU drop down list and select a PLU from the list 2 Click Find PLU This field changes the magnification of the preview in the display window The value you enter into this field represents the percentage of magnification For example if you enter 75 into this field the Store Manager displays the preview at 75 of maximum size This field is only visible when the preview is visible Action Type a number into the field This field determines if a ruler is visible in the display window This field is only visible when the preview is visible Action Click o the checkbox to display the ruler in the display area 281 Printing Shelf Labels and Stickers 282 Journals and Journal Files This section describes the process of opening and reading journal files and log files Reading the journal files All transactions performed at a POS terminal are captured electronically in journal files You can open the journal files and view each transaction using the Electronic Journal Viewer Viewing the journal electronically allows you to use search functions to find specific transactions and eliminates bulky paper journals Setting up the electronic journal You must set up the path information where the electronic journal is saved before you can view journal files using the Electronic Journal Viewer Note that the Electronic Journal Viewer can also be run stand alone at your head office In the
424. system amount during balancing Type a dollar amount including decimals in the POS Balance Threshold field If you require the cashiers and registers to balance exactly leave this field blank If the difference is larger than the threshold the cashier or register is not balanced The balance transaction cannot be completed until the actual amount and the system amount are balanced to within the threshold Your head office uses the Configurator to define whether balancing is performed by a cashier or a register 2 You can set the maximum amount that the safe s actual tender amount can be above or below the system amount during balancing Type a dollar amount including decimals in the Safe Balance Threshold field If you require the safe to balance exactly leave this field blank If the difference is larger than the threshold the safe is not balanced The balance transaction cannot be completed until the actual amount and the system amount are balanced to within the threshold 3 To enable the EOD Pickup button on the POS Balance Maintenance window click the Enable EOD Pickup checkbox The EOD Pickup button creates and completes a pickup to safe transaction for the tenders in the POS balance transaction Click the Retrieve System Amounts on Pickup checkbox Click the Hide System Amounts Blind Pickup checkbox Click the Issue Warnings on Over the Limit Pickups checkbox eo OW OND SP Under Mandatory Reasons click each checkbox
425. t 5 Click the second column of the drop down list and type a value Departments Selection Window Dept Number Enter Search Criteria Dept Description Display Al Search Clear Exit Bil E3 lel E 19 Getting Started 6 Click Search The Store Manager searches the records in the table and displays the matching records in the selection window Completing the fields in a window To add or modify the information stored in a table you must enter information into or make selections from the fields in the Store Manager windows The windows contain several different types of fields that are used differently The table below describes the different types of fields and information and shows you how to use them Field How to use it Buttons Initiate actions New Click a button to initiate the action Checkboxes Enable or disable an option Allow Discount V Click a checkbox to enable or disable an option Checkboxes toggle between being checked option is enabled and being cleared option is disabled Drop down lists Contain a predefined list of options you select one UserFlag No v Click the arrow to open the list of options Click an option to select it Once you select an option it is displayed in the list Fields Require you to type information into them Group Number Use the keyboard to type a string or number up to a predetermined number of characters int
426. t The receiving transaction has a status of partial until you complete it Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Tip You can see the quantity of an item that your store has already received by highlighting the line containing the item and clicking Detail on the Receiving window To receive a partial order 1 Create a new receiving transaction or open an existing pending or partial transaction 2 Complete the fields as appropriate for the items and quantities you receive 3 Click Partial The partial receiving transaction is saved Completing a receiving transaction A receiving transaction has a status of pending or partial until you complete it You cannot modify a receiving transaction after you complete it To complete a receiving transaction 1 Create a new receiving transaction or open an existing pending or partial transaction 2 Click Complete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to complete the receiving transaction 3 Click OK The dialog box closes The receiving transaction s status changes to complete Printing a Receiving report You can print a receiving report containing the information from the receiving transaction displayed in the Receiving window The Receiving report is linked to the report template designer You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Receiving report To print a receiving report 1 Create a new recei
427. t You cannot modify a completed balance but you can void it If you find an error in a completed balance you must void it and create a new one To complete a safe balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe that you are attempting to balance 3 Click Safe Balance 4 Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window 131 Tender Management 5 Click the balance you want to complete and then click Open The Safe Balance Maintenance window displays the balance information 6 Click Complete and then click Exit Modifying a safe balance You can only modify a pending balance Once you have entered the final information for a balance you can complete it For information about completing a balance see Completing a safe balance on page 131 You cannot modify a completed balance If you need to make a change to a completed balance you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a balance see Voiding a safe balance on page 132 To modify a pending safe balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe that you are attempting to balance 3 Click Safe Balance 4 Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window 5 Click the balance you want to modify and then click Open 6 Change the fields in the window as appropria
428. t and create a new one In the following steps you ate requited to enter information into the Purchase Order Maintenance window For information about the fields in the window see Purchase Order Maintenance window on page 199 To modify a purchase order 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory The Inventory Menu window appears 2 Click Purchase Orders 3 Click Display All The existing purchase orders are displayed in the selection window 4 C ick the purchase order you want to modify and then click Open A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm if you want to identify the items by PLU or vendor s SKU Click a radio button in the dialog box The Purchase Order Maintenance window appears 6 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 7 Click Save and then click Close 197 Performing Inventory Control Functions 198 WARNING You can delete a purchase order by clicking Delete on the Purchase Order Selection window only if you have a sufficient authority level You can define the minimum authority level required to delete a purchase order using the Delete Inventory Transaction Authority drop down list in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window For information about defining inventory options see Configuring the inventory parameters on page 191 Creating a purchase order from a suggested order The Store Manager can create a purchase order for you containing items whose c
429. t have to close the Store Manager to update the journal viewer but you should close the Electronic Journal Viewer The following procedure describes the update process that is based on running the application using Windows Explorer and having the external application in the default location If the file is not in the default location you can use the Windows Explorer Find utility to locate it Once you have updated the viewer you can select and open the new journal file For information about selecting and opening a journal file see Opening a journal file on page 287 285 Journals and Journal Files To update the Electronic Journal Viewer 1 Open Microsoft Windows explorer Open the Program Files Sales Journal viewer folder 2 Double click ejp exe The EJProcessor application is launched and begins processing automatically i EJProcessor OR x Found 0 previous day journal files Found 1 current day journal files Saving journal filenames to the database Archiving 0 files Retrieving signatures from 00010100txn Retrieving signatures from 0001 p500 txn EUProcess d Auto Close Setup Process 3 Click Close when processing is finished 286 Reading the journal files Opening a journal file You can open a journal file if it is visible in the Journal Search window For a journal to be visible in the Journal Search window the directories you specify in the Journal Setup window must contain the
430. t information e Internet Document htm e Power Soft report psr e Microsoft Excel comma separated values csv e dBase I dbf e bBase lll dbf e Microsoft Excel Data Interchange dif e Microsoft Excel Work Sheet xls e SQL Syntax sql e Microsoft Multiplan Format xls e Text Tab separated values txt e WKS Lotus 123 wks e WK1 Lotus 123 wk1 e Windows Meta File wmf e Clipboard Once you have compiled a report by selecting report criteria and generating the report you can export it Only users with the appropriate authority level can use the Export button You must have a user authority level of 5 the highest in order to view the Export button otherwise it will be greyed out and disabled For information on assigning user authority levels see Defining the Store Manager system patameters on page 22 To complete the following steps the compiled report must be visible on your screen in the report window To export report data to a file 1 In the report window click Export 2 Complete the fields in the Export Report Data window with the appropriate information including file location file name and file type 3 Click Save The report s data is exported to the file you defined Tip To include the report header information such as report title and store number in the data exported to the file you must click Include Column Heading in the Export Report Data window
431. t the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount To define the amount of the selected tender type an amount including the decimal places in the Lump Sum Batch field To select a tender click the tender in the Tender field The Total Lump Sums field displays the total of the lump sum amounts that you enter in the Lump Sum Amount field No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field The Total Denominations field displays the total of the amounts that you enter in the Amount field when you enter amounts by denomination Your head office uses the Configurator to define denominations for a tender If no denominations are defined for the tender the denomination fields are not available Click the Denomination button in this window to enter amounts by denomination No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field To change the balance status to complete click Complete To change the balance status to void click Void This button is only enabled if the pickup status is complete Note A balance can be voided on the same business day only Click Save and then click Exit Depositing tenders into the safe Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are eligible to be deposited Entering a new deposit into the safe A new deposit has a pendin
432. t the store level can modify any of the PLU s information You cannot at the store level change the setting in this checkbox You can change the PLU s retail price if this checkbox is checked and the Allow Price Upd checkbox on this window is also checked If the Allow Price Upd checkbox is not checked you can change any of the PLU s information except for the price Your head office uses the Configurator to define whether PLUs can be updated If you are defining a new PLU in the Store Manager this checkbox is checked by default to enable PLU updates No action is required The Allow Price Upd checkbox indicates if you at the store level can modify the PLU s price You cannot at the store level change the setting in this checkbox In order for you to be able to change the PLU s price the Allow PLU Upd checkbox in this window must be checked Your head office uses the Configurator to define whether prices can be updated If you are defining a new PLU in the Store Manager this checkbox is checked by default to enable price updates No action is required The Local Price Chg field indicates if you have changed the retail price of the PLU at store level No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a checkbox when you change the PLU s retail price If a store has the ability to change the Department setting associated with a PLU the Allow Dept Upd checkbox will be checked Note that this fe
433. t to record about the transfer Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters in length in the Notes field Click the Amount field beside each tender type and type the amount of each tender that is being transferred Note that you must click in the same amount field a second time after typing the amount in the field To define the amount of the selected tender type an amount including the decimal places in the Lump Sum Batch field To select a tender click the tender in the Tender field Note If the sum of the Lump Sum Amount column falls within the warning threshold set in the Configurator a message displays warning you that the amount entered is too high You can choose to continue until the total amount reaches the rejection threshold then you must re enter a smaller amount Click Save and then click Exit Balancing the safe Balancing the safe Balancing ensures the amount of tender in the safe matches the amount of tender that should be in the safe based on the completed loans pickups withdrawals and deposits that have been performed Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are eligible to be balanced The Store Manager calculates the system amount of a tender that should be in the safe and you enter the actual amount The Store Manager compates the two figures and determines if the safe is balanced You can define the maximum amount that the system and actual tender amounts can diff
434. tandard reports 7 To specify the supplier of the items you want included in the report click the Vendor drop down list and select a supplier from the list For more information about assigning a vendor to a PLU see Maintaining PLUs on page 142 8 To group the report data by category group department and vendor click the checkboxes in the Group By section of the window and then click the drop down lists and select an option from each list 9 To generate the report based on the above criteria click Generate Report For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Tip To find a PLU click in the PLU field and press the F12 key The PLU Search window appears Item Movement Report The following is a sample Item Movement Report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Item Movement report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template ig ltem Movement Report Item Movement Report Report Type 5 Best seller by quantity Period 12 16 2001 01 31 2002 Units Sold Ordering No 01 16 2002 10 294M 1111 McCallum Larry Store 1 e To show or hide the criteria used to generate this report click the Show Hide Criteria toggle button 305 Reporting Sales The Sales Report lists items and summary sales information You c
435. te 7 Click Save and then click Exit The Safe Balance Maintenance window closes Voiding a safe balance 132 You can only void a completed balance Voided balances are visible in the Safe Balance Selection window but they cannot be modified To void a safe balance 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe that you are attempting to balance 3 Click Safe Balance 4 Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window 5 Click the balance you want to void and then click Open The Safe Balance Maintenance window displays containing the balance information 6 Click Void The balance s status changes to voided 7 Click Exit Balancing the safe Viewing the details of a safe balance You can review the information you entered into a balance transaction regardless of its current status Voided balances remain visible in the Safe Balance Selection window To view the details of a balance 1 2 3 4 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the safe that has the balance details that you want to view Click Safe Balance Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window Click the balance you want to review and then click Open The Safe Balance Maintenance displays containing the balance information The Safe Balance Maintenance window This window contains the fields
436. te Exit 4 Click the option that you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The option is deleted from the user flag 79 File Maintenance Features Setting up taxes When you define departments and PLUs you can assign the taxes that are charged to the customer when items are sold at the POS terminal You can define the characteristics of up to 16 taxes and you can assign taxes 1 4 to items in the Store Manager Your head office can use the Configurator to assign taxes 5 16 to items if necessary You can define standard types of taxes and step taxes Step taxes result in the customer paying a different tax rate based on the price of the item To set up a step tax you must define price ranges and the corresponding tax rate for each range WARNING Your head office can also set up taxes and send the files to your store As a result you can create new taxes modify or delete them and you can also modify and delete the ones sent from yout head office Adding a tax You can set up a maximum of 16 taxes To set up a tax 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Taxes 3 Click New a Tax New MEE Apply Tax to SubTotal 0 00 E 4 On the Tax Maintenance window click the General tab 5 Tax ID is the unique number that identifies the tax Type a number between 1 and 16 in the Tax ID field 6
437. tenratiesteassn dass Configuring the print Options wees Defining user Mags senisesse Creating a new user flag option 0 Modifying a user flag Option wee Deleting a user flag option Setting UP tAX S veces Adding a tax enen nane A A T A TERO sane anges Modifying Atak rieren na n e a A ERO REEE Deleting a stax dis titan EE EREE O E ee Ane Tax Maintenance Print Options tab ssssssssssssssressssesessssesssseessrrsessrsens Setting up Step Lakes senses nel tele a nei A RRR ERN 83 Setting up product Vendors sisirin iina EE EAA NE Adding a veidot irern nna AE I E R a aa Modifying a vendor s information cscs Deletitina vendor inion e shin sven N RER NEG The Vendor Maintenance Window wesc Setting Up tare weights cnc edie didnt na R n n nAn Adding a tate weight 4 iieseiiiss Aedisieatdnartaen ang oa na Modifying a tare weight Deleting a tare Weight ccc The Tare Weight Maintenance window Entering another store s information Adding anew Stole aarteen cited ERE RRE E Chapter 6 Viewing a store s information veces 92 Modifying a store s infOrMation ssss sssssssssssssssssessssesssstesssreennsnetsnsstosnnressnsre 93 Deleting astore s r cord oaen ie nR ANE R A E NEER 93 The Store Maintenance window sssssssssessssresssrsesssrsessnsesssnresssreessssees 94 Seting up CustOMers aan E EE E A aries 95 Creating a new customer record ssssssssessssssessssreessrtesssstesssreessntesssresnreesss 95 Maintain
438. that a PLU in this department can have type an amount in the Max Price field To allow an item in this department to be sold for a 0 price click the Allow Zero Price checkbox Type a description of the amount in the Add Amt Desc field This description is printed on the customer s receipt This field is limited to 50 characters To determine the additional amount that is charged when a PLU in this department is purchased type an amount including the decimal places in the Add Amount field For example a bottle deposit is charged whenever a customer purchases soda pop Leave this field blank if you do not want to assign an additional amount 71 File Maintenance Features 72 15 16 17 18 19 20 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 To assign a minimum authority level that a cashier needs to sell an item in this department click the Auth Level drop down list and select a level from the list The lowest authority level is 1 the highest is 5 You can assign authority levels to cashiers in the Employee Maintenance window To determine on which menu this department appears at the POS terminal type a menu identification number in the Menu No field Menus are defined by your head office in the Configurator You can obtain the menu identification number from your head office Type a 0 in this field if you do not want the department to appear on a menu The prompt ID defines the prompt s
439. the Sort Maintenance window to enable sorting For information about configuring sort options see Configuring the sort options on page 36 Sorting table records in selection windows To sort based on a column 1 Ona menu window click a button to open a selection window 2 Click the header of the column by which you want to sort the records The records change order For example in the File Maintenance Menu window click Department Categories to open the Category Selection window The Category table s records are sorted by category number Wes Department Categories Selection Window Catagory Number E a FASHION SO GROCERY aaa a SHOES amp ACCESSORIES Bodar Display All Query Sort Exit 3 Click the Description column header to sort the records alphabetically by description ile Es We Department Categories Selection Window Description eo CARD GOODS Open New Delete Sarahi Display All Query Sort Exit Sorting using the Specify Sort Columns window If you clicked the Save Sort Order or Save Sort by User ID checkboxes in the Sort Maintenance window the sort order you select in the following steps is saved and used the next time you open the selection window 37 Customizing Store Manager To perform a sort 1 2 38 On a menu window click a button to open a selection window The selection window appears Click Sort Set Sort Order Dr
440. the following Terminal Admin Exception Handler window appears providing a reason for the failure 9 Terminal Admin Exception Handler ioj x Terminal ID fi CASHIER SIGNED ON C Retry Signoff M ake sure cashier signoff at register Bypass C Abort To solve the problem you can click a radio button in the Action box or you can click Exit to close the window and then abort the Close Terminal function 5 Click Exit when the Close Terminal process is complete Tip You can print a hard copy of the messages that appear in the XPS Server message box by clicking Print Log The log is printed on the default printer 48 Opening and closing the store Opening and closing the store You can open the store or run the End of Day function to close the store in the Store Manager Opening the store The store s status must be closed before you initiate the Open Store function To open the store 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Store Administration ja lel E 9 Store Administration Temna OO O O T 01 CASHIER 5555 Store Status F tore is opened rm Store Administration Open Store End Of Day XPS Server Message i Se a Exit 3 On the Store Administration window click Open Store The Open Store function begins You can monitor the process in the Store Status and the XPS Server Message Box When the function is
441. the Departments Selection window Departments Selection Wi lel Es Dept Number Jept Description Group Number 102 SKIRTS OMEN PANT OMEN TOP nO5 SWEATERS HOG INTIMATE APPAREL 107 LEGWEAR ACKETS a RENTAL oen M22 ALORED CLOTHING New 123 ACTIVE WEAR Delete 79 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit The following is the Department Maintenance window t Department DRESSES Ol x Department ltemizer Dept Number fi 01 Description DRESSES Group Number fi 00 Group Desc WOMENS Add nl Amount 0 00 Add nl Amt Desc Tai M Preset Amount 0 00 Max Price J 0 00 bora z Force Preset Min Price J 0 00 Menu No jo Positive Dept IV Allow Retums IV Print Reg Retai PromptID JO PLU Required 7 Allow Rtn w o Rept V Print SRP i Auth Leve O Lowest Allow Zero Price Allow Sell IV Print Slip gl Qty Desc J Allow Quantity JV AllowExchange V Slip Buffered il Auto Disc ID jo Oty Required P AllowLayaways M Slip Advance jo Tare Weight jo Allow Decimal Qty Allow Discount V Slip Total Line jo Cost Required Allow Empl Disc ofValidations O New Scale Item E Gen Coupon Ej Save So a R N ar Delet Loyal ID 1 0 Loyal ID 2 0 Loyal ID 3 0 Loyal ID 4 0 2e Adding a record to a table You can add records to a table by entering information into the fields in its maintenance window You can open the maintenance wi
442. the PLU field and press F12 The PLU Search window appears 336 Using inventory reports Inactive PLU report The following is a sample Inactive PLU report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Inactive PLU report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template Inactive PLU Report olx Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Vempiate Delete Template Inactive PLU Report Store 1 Operator D Thomas Inactive Since 5 5 9 PLU Number PLU Description Last Sold Sold Net Sales Qo 2222 BOXES TOP 0 000 0 00 5 5 99 09 08 57 337 Reporting Current Inventory 338 The Current Inventory Report lists the current quantities of items and buckets in the store their retail price the quantity sold the closing current inventory on hand and the amount of money received from the sales of the item Current Inventory Report Selection Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Current Inventory Report ia Current Inventory Repor LADIES APPAREL To complete the fields in the Current Inventory Report Criteria window 1 To define a range of items to be included in the report click the PLU fields and type a range of PLU number
443. the PLU you want to modify and then click Open The PLU Maintenance window appears with the Page 1 tab active and displaying the PLU s information Change the information in the fields in the window Click the Save and then click Exit Deleting a PLU You can delete a PLU To delete a PLU 1 2 3 4 5 On the Main Menu window click PLU Management Click PLU Maintenance Click Display All The PLUs are displayed in the PLU Selection window ja PLU Selection Window B x PLU Description Vendor ID 2221 2 WIDE TIE 20 00 1114 21 SPEED IRONHORSE BIKE 296 99 3331 ANTIBIOTICS 25 00 3331 ASPRIN 5 99 2222 B D OXFORD WHITE 16 34 39 99 1118 BASIC TOWEL 5 00 2222 BELT 30 00 2223 BLACK PANTS 12 99 2223 BLACK PANTS MEN S 9 99 2222 BLUE JEANS 50 00 2223 BLUE PANTS MEN S 12 99 2222 BLUE SHIRT 4 99 2222 BLUE SOCKS 0 99 4441 BREAD 1 99 72 row s found Display All Query Click the PLU you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion Click OK The PLU is deleted The PLU Maintenance window User Flags Taxes amp Itemizers tab This tab contains the fields used for defining a PLU s information 147 Managing Price Look Ups 148 The PLU PLU Desc Inventory Control and Inventory Information fields are accessible on all tabs in the PLU Maintenance window sited U
444. the actual quantity of the item you receive is displayed in the Ext Cost field in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field represents the total cost of the items you ate receiving The total cost is based on the values in the Extended Unit and the Cost Price fields in this window No action required The Store Manager completes this field 216 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Seq Labels Count Ordering Num Designed Label Price Sticker Shelf Label Report Inventory Information Complete This field indicates the line that is highlighted in the receiving transaction The information in the Pkg Size Retail Price Ext Retail Cost Price Ext Cost Sequence No Labels Printed and Ordering No fields contain the information for the line that is highlighted in the receiving transaction No action required The Store Manager completes this field This field indicates how many price stickers and shelf labels you have sent to queues for printing You can send price stickers or shelf labels to a queue by clicking Price Label or Shelf Label in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field contains a unique number that is used to track the item during order receive and transfer transactions You define the order number in the Ordering No field in the PLU Pa
445. the button 217 Performing Inventory Control Functions 218 Field Description Void This field voids the completed receiving transaction You cannot void a transaction until you have completed it For information about voiding a receiving transaction order see Voiding a receiving transaction on page 224 Click the button Details This field opens a detail screen which contains information about the item in the line of the receiving transaction that you have highlighted The information in the detail window cannot be edited Click the button Partial This field saves the items and information you have added to the receiving transaction but does not complete the transaction You can open the receiving transaction again and add additional items to it The Revd TD field displays a total of the item received For information about receiving a partial shipment see Receiving a partial order on page 222 Click the button Tip To find a PLU click in the PLU XREF field and press the F12 key The PLU Search window appears Receiving inventory by case You can use the receiving by case function to record the receipt of items in your store that do not have a cotresponding purchase order and that are shipped in cases only When you create a new receiving by case transaction it has a status of pending For information about completing a receiving by case transaction see Completing a receiving
446. the field to open the pop up calendar Select a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field If you want to include balance information for the entire store on the report click the radio button If you want to include information for all the store s registers on the report click the radio button 330 Using standard reports Field Description Register If you want to include information for just 1 register on the report click the radio button Generate Report This field generates the report based on the criteria in the window For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Action Click the button Balance report The following is a sample Balance report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Balance report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template les Report Template Generator OLX Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Balance Detail Report By Store Store 1 Balance Date 2 17 99 to 2 19 99 Tender CASH VIS CHEQUE 32 00 CREDIT NOTE REDEEMED 0 00 Total sig RWulte mate ee it ek ERIE a tilt S 610 00 gan ta 257 12 Pian ie Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario 2 19 99 11 03 35 4 P
447. the loan that you want to void and then click Open The POS Loan Safe Maintenance window displays the loan information 5 Click Void The loan s status is void 6 Click Exit Viewing a loan s details 110 You can review the information you entered into a loan transaction regardless of its current status Voided loans remain visible in the POS Loan from Safe Selection window To view the details of a loan 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the safe with the loan 3 Click POS Loan The pending completed deleted and voided loans are displayed in the window 4 Click the loan you want to review and then click Open The POS Loan Safe Maintenance window displays the loan information Performing a pickup Performing a pickup A pickup is the removal of tender from a cashier s drawer during the day Usually a pickup is performed for security reasons so that a cash drawer does not contain large amounts of currency Your head office uses the Configurator to define the tenders that are eligible to be picked up to define if pickup transactions are processed by the cashier or by the register and to set a threshold amount beyond which transactions cannot be processed until a pickup is performed When you complete a pickup transaction using the Store Manager the amount picked up is automatically added to the actual amount when the cashier or register balances and is added to the safe s contents
448. the number of packages being ordered based on the values you enter into the Required Qty field and the number in the Pkg Qty field If you order an odd number of items the Store Manager calculates the number of packages required to fill the order For example if you enter 7 into the Required Qty field and there is a package size of 6 then 2 packages are ordered The second package is ordered to accommodate the seventh item No action required The Store Manager calculates the number of packages required and completes the field This field defines the total number of the items you are ordering The total number is based on the package size and the package count No action required The Store Manager calculates the number of items and completes this field 201 Performing Inventory Control Functions Field Description Cost Price Extended Cost Retail Price Ext Retail Dept Gross Mrg Seq Order Number Report 202 This field defines the cost to the store of the item you are ordering The item s cost is defined in the Cost field in the Vendor s SKU Maintenance window or the PLU Maintenance window The cost for the number of the item you are ordering is displayed in the Extended Cost field in this window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field represents the total cost of the items being ordered The total cost is based on the values in t
449. the safe 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate Safe 3 Click Safe Deposit The pending completed deleted and voided deposits are displayed in the window 4 Click the deposit you want to complete and then click Open The Safe Deposit Maintenance window displays the deposit information 5 Click Complete and then click Exit Modifying a deposit into the safe 122 You can only modify a pending deposit Once you have entered the final information for a deposit you can complete it For information about completing a deposit see Completing a deposit into the safe on page 122 You cannot modify a completed deposit If you need to make a change to a completed deposit you must void it and create a new one For information about voiding a deposit see Voiding a deposit into the safe on page 123 To modify a pending deposit 1 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management 2 Click the appropriate Safe 3 Click Safe Deposit 4 Click Display All The pending completed deleted and voided deposits are displayed in the window 5 Click the deposit you want to modify click Open The Safe Deposit Maintenance window displays the deposit information 6 Change the fields in the window as appropriate 7 Click Save and then click Exit Depositing tenders into the safe Voiding a deposit into the safe You can only void a completed deposit Voided deposits are visibl
450. the window 5 Click Save and then click Exit 104 Tender Management This section provides information about managing the tender in your store It also describes tender management functions using the safe option The Store Manager can include tender management options that involve the store s safes or it can include tender management options that do not involve the safes Your head office also uses the Configurator to determine whether the safes are involved in tender management functions The tender management options involve the cashier s drawer and the store s safes and include pickups balancing transferring and deposits You can also track the contents and balance the store s safes This section covers the following topics e Performing a loan e Performing a pickup e Balancing a cashier s drawer e Depositing tenders into the safe e Performing multiple safe procedures e Processing a bank deposit e Balancing the safe e Viewing the contents of the safe e Viewing detailed safe transactions Safe and non safe options There are two tender management configurations safe and non safe Your head office uses the Configurator to determine whether your Store Manager includes the safes during tender management Using the safe option during tender management allows you to balance the safes perform a bank deposit to the safes and view the contents of the safes in addition to standard tender management functions
451. this document and no contractual obligations or commitments are formed either directly or indirectly by this document This document is for internal use only and may not be circulated or distributed outside your organization without SAP s prior written authorization Table of Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Getting Started About the Store Manager ic icccccsscssssicsssssscssssessenesosssesesersesossonedesnsssseansaetesecsegraniers 11 The Store Manager and Configurator association s sssssssssrssssssessssressrese 12 Parameter files from the Configurator wuss Ab ut the navigation syste Minnan ER Main MENU Pire eene S A TEE AE Sid Party Software Menu sivsasassesasscccsasvissssvaassccsnisiessestectesseinnescevecenverie Relationship between tables and windows Adding a record to ata ble cossisestiss sasicsescenesespansseasnsvrasancateavasesecsesuesesacuseetieny Modifying a record ini a table cccccsscisssssccassassssasssssssssenscsseeassssscaivseieassscazetees Deleting a r cotd from a table siete scccsssasstewscastevessstecnspnnesdesdentnteceneevee s Performing a query in a selection window Completing the fields in a window wesc Customizing Store Manager Defining the Store Manager system parameters s sssssssssrssssrtessrresssrreserrresssre 22 Changing the text in the Store Manager occ 24 Changing a text for a single obj Ct sssissssirssssesssistrsirerrirsissisisisniossssissssess 24 Changing the text for a
452. tify items The field descriptions follow 18 Transfer In by PLU New o y 00010000005 06 03 2002 06 03 2002 E gl Alaa The following table contains description of the fields in the Store Transfer by PLU window Field Description Txn Num This field defines the unique number that identifies the inventory transaction The inventory transaction number sequence is used for purchase orders receiving transactions transfers and inventory count PLU lists No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with a number after you save the transfer Doc Number This field defines the unique number that identifies the transfer You can modify the document number if you click Modify PO Doc Number in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window The Store Manager automatically completes this field but you can edit the information in it Type a number into the field Status This field indicates the current status of the transfer Pending The transfer has not been completed and can be modified Complete The transfer is complete and cannot be modified Void The transfer has been completed and then voided No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 226 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Origin This field indicates if the transfer is based on an electronic document from your head office or if you create it No action required T
453. tion types available in the criteria window Action Click the button This field generates the report based on the criteria in the window For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Action Click the button 323 Reporting Loss Prevention Summary report The following is a sample Loss Prevention Summary report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Loss Prevention Summary report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 This sample report uses the default template ja Loss Prevention Summary Report Ot xi Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Save Template Delete Template Loss Prevention Report Summary Store s 1 Operator G Green Period 2 17 99 To 2 17 99 Transaction Type of Txns Amount Item Voids Discounts 2 2 117 55 Print Export Details Dolly World 10 Wonder Blvd Toronto Ontario Page 1 of 1 2 19 9909 53 04 Loss Prevention Detail 324 The Loss Prevention Detail report provides detailed information about each of the transactions of the type you select in the criteria window The Store Manager compiles the Loss Prevention Summary and Loss Prevention Detail reports based on the same criteria To compile the Loss Prevention Detail report 1 Select criteria and generate t
454. tment Report You can use the report template designer to alter the appearance and layout of the Inventory Adjustment Report For information about the template designer see Using the report template designer on page 300 Inactive PLU The Inactive PLU report provides summary information about PLUs that have been inactive for the period beginning on the date you define You can also define the items included on the report 335 Reporting Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria window This window contains fields used to select the criteria that the Store Manager uses to gather information for the Inactive PLU report g Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria ioj x Inactive Since Wie E Sold Between 07 01 2001 01 31 2002 PLU Category HARD GOODS Group l Deparment l User Flag 1 User Flag 2 l User Flag 3 User Flag 4 User Flag 5 l User Flag 6 Vendor l Clear Criteria Generate Report Exit To complete the Inactive PLU Report Selection Criteria window 1 To specify the period during which the items you want to include in the report must be inactive click the button beside the Inactive Since field to open the pop up calendar Select a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the field The period runs from the date you enter into this field to the current date 2 To report the number of items sold during a defined range of dates click the bu
455. to the field This field defines the total number of items that the store expects to receive The actual quantity received must match the number you enter into this field if you click Receive Quantity Match Hash Quantity in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Type a number into the field This field indicates the origin of the receiving transfer purchase order electronic document manual Action No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the unique number that identifies the item you are receiving Type a number into the field If you click By PLU Xref in the Select Display Type dialog box you must enter the item s PLU or cross reference number If you want to use cross reference numbers only you must click Xreference Only in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window This field defines the item s description No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the quantity of the item the store expects to receive If the transaction is based on an issued purchase order the number in this field is from the Extended Unit field in the Purchase Order Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field This field defines the quantity of the item the store actually receives If you click Receive Discrepancy Number Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window and the number in
456. transaction on page 223 In the following steps you are required to enter information into the Receiving by case window For information about the fields in the window see Receiving by Case window on page 219 WARNING Items that you receive into your store through a receiving by case transaction are not added to your on hand inventory You must perform an inventory adjustment to have the Store Manager reflect the receipt of these items For information about performing an inventory adjustment see Adjusting the on hand inventory quantities on page 248 To create a receiving by case transaction 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory Ordering receiving and transferring inventory 2 Click Receiving g Receiving Documents Selection Window ioj x Receiving Transactions Receiving by Case Document P O Number Vendor ID Vendor Name Transaction Receive Date Number Date Super Vendor 03 14 2002 1 row s found Display All Query Sort Exit Click the Receiving by Case tab Click New Complete the fields in the window as appropriate Click Save and then click Exit Oe e pa Receiving by Case window This window contains the fields used for creating receiving transactions ig Receiving New Mi Txn Number Status Pending Txn Date 06 03 2002 Document Num jpoo10000002 Vendor H Receive Date 06 03 2002 P O Number OoOo i yO Ship Type o Receiving Type DOO Discr
457. trict Number field 6 To select the state or province portion of the store s address click the State Province drop down list and select and option You define the selection of states and provinces that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For more information about populating the drop down list see Populating drop down lists on page 63 7 To record the zip code United States or postal code Canada portion of the store s address type the zip postal code in the Zip Postal Code field 8 To record the name of the first contact person in the store type a name in the Contact 1 field 9 To record the name of the second contact person in the store type a name in the Contact 2 field 10 To record the store s account number type a number in the Account Number field 11 To record the store s phone number type a phone number without hyphens or brackets in the Phone field You can type up to 10 characters 12 To record the store s fax number type a phone number without hyphens or brackets in the Fax field You can type up to 10 characters 13 To record the store s email address type the address in the Email Address field 14 To record the store s web site address type the address in the Web Site field Setting up customers Setting up customers You can gather a customer s information at the POS terminal by prompting the cashier to enter the customer s name addres
458. tton beside the Sold Between field to open the pop up calendar Select a date in the calendar and click OK Alternatively type a date into the Date fields 3 To define a range of items to be included in the report click the PLU fields and type a PLU number into the fields You can also use the Category Group Department Userflag 1 6 and the Vendor fields to define items to be included in the report You can choose multiple criteria The report only includes items matching all criteria 4 To select the category to which the items belong that you want included in the report click the Category drop down list and select a category from the list 5 To select the group with items you want included in the report click the Group drop down list and select a group from the list 6 To select the department with the items you want included in the report click the Department drop down list and select a department from this 7 The Userflag 1 6 fields define the user flag option that is assigned to the items you want included in the report Click the drop down list and select a user flag option from the list 8 To specify the supplier of the items you want included in the report click the Vendor drop down list and select a supplier from the list 9 To generate the report based on the above criteria click Generate Report For more information about generating reports see Generating reports on page 297 Tip To find a PLU click in
459. ty Setup window In addition you can ensure that uset s with an inappropriate authority level do not gain access to an active Store Manager session that has been left unattended This is achieved by setting the appropriate password and automatic logoff parameters in the General Parameter Setup window There are six levels of authority Level zero is the lowest level five is the highest level Level six is used to lock access to the window or function regardless of the user s authority If an employee has an authority level lower than the level that you assign to a window or function the window s button or the function is not visible to them in the menu windows You assign an employee an authority level in the Employee Maintenance window when you set them up but you can change that level at any time For information about changing an employee s authority level see Changing a user s authority level on page 33 WARNING If the Backdoor Window Security Only parameter is turned on only the backdoor user has access to security maintenance otherwise you must have an authority level of five to view and update the information in the Worksheets Security Setup window If you have an authority level less than five the Worksheets Security Setup window is not visible in the Store Manager Parameters Setup Menu window To restrict access to a window 1 On the Main Menu click Parameters Setup 29 Customizing Store Manager
460. type a date in the Birthdate field 8 To record the first line of the customet s address type the address in the Address 1 field 9 To record the second line of the customet s address type the address in the Address 2 field 10 To record the city portion of the customer s address type the name of the city in the City field 11 To record the state or province portion of the customet s address click the State Province drop down list and select an option You define the selection of states and provinces that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For more information about populating the drop down list see Populating drop down lists on page 63 12 To record the zip United States or postal code Canada type the code in the Zip Postal field 13 To record the country portion of the customer s address type the country name in the Country field 14 To record the customer s primary telephone number type the phone number without hypens or brackets in the Phone 1 field 98 Maintaining extended customer fields 15 To record the customer s alternate telephone number type the phone number without hypens or brackets in the Phone 2 field 16 To assign a type to the customer click the Type drop down list and select an option You define the selection of customer types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window For more information about populating the
461. u want the report period to be for today s date click the Current Business Date radio button 2 Ifyou want the report period to be for yesterday s date click the Previous Business Date radio button 3 To select a range of dates for the report period click Period and type a date range in the fields or click the button beside the fields and select a date from the pop up calendars Click OK To include tender information for the entire store click the By Store radio button To include tender information for a single register click the Register radio button To include tender information for a group of registers click the Register Group radio button To include tender information for all registers click the All Registers radio button To include tender information for a single cashier click the Cashier radio button SOS 20 seal OV HON ae To include tender information for all cashiers click the All Cashiers radio button 10 You can select which currency the tender amounts ate displayed in Click the Local Currency radio button if you require the report to display the amounts in your local currency Click the Tender Currency radio button if you require the report to display the tender amounts in the currency in which the customers used to pay for their merchandise 11 To generate the Tender Report click Generate Report Tender Report The following is a sample Tender Report t Tender Report Mm x
462. uery to locate price change information about a specific PLU or for records matching other criteria The Retail Price Update Audit window This window contains fields that display information about changes made to prices using the Store Manager The information in these fields is for reference only and cannot be edited g Retail Price Update Audit The following table contains descriptions of the fields in the Retail Price Update Audit window Field Description PLU This field contains the PLU whose price was changed Date Time This field contains the date and time the PLU s price was changed Cashier This field contains the employee number of the person who made the change to the PLU s price Old Price This field contains the employee number of the person who made the change to the PLU s price New Price This field contains the PLU s new price If the PLU was deleted in the PLU Maintenance window the new PLU price is 0 00 Defining a PLU cross reference Field Description Pending This field indicates that the price change is pending The price change takes effect when you apply the batch For information about using the price batch management function to change a PLU s price see Using price batch management functionality on page 162 The checkbox is clicked V if the price change is pending Batch ID This field contains the unique number that identifies a batch This field is compl
463. unction is complete the POS terminal status is open Note If the Open Terminals function cannot be completed for any reason the following Terminal Admin Exception Handler window appears providing a reason for the failure m Terminal dmin Exception Handler Terminal ID_ a Action fi CASHIER SIGNED ON C Retry C Signotf Make sure cashier signoff at register Bypass Abort Exit 46 Monitoring and controlling the POS terminals To solve the problem click a radio button in the Action box or you can click Exit to close the window and abort the Open Terminal function 5 Click Exit when the Open Terminal process is complete To close all POS terminals in the store 1 On the Main Menu window click Administration 2 Click Store Administration S Terminal Administration OF x Terminal ID B 1 0T CASHIER 5555 Store Status Store is opened m Terminal Administration Monitor Terminalfs Open Terminals Open All Terminals Close Terminals Close All Terminals XPS Server Message Exit Go 3 On the Terminal Administration window click Close Terminals 4 The Close Terminal function begins You can monitor the process in the XPS Server Message Box When the function is complete the POS terminal status is closed 47 Managing the POS Terminals Note If the Close Terminal function cannot be completed for any reason
464. ure the Store Manager s payroll options before you prepare or export the clock in out information These options determine if you must confirm clock in out times before export or if you can export without confirming the times For information about configuring the options see Configuring payroll parameters on page 353 Editing clock in out times 356 You can review an employee s clock in out times and edit them if necessary j gt y WARNING An employee must be assigned to your store in their employee record or they do not appear in any of the clock in out windows Before you complete the following steps you must define the selections that appear in the Reason Code drop down list To review an employee s clock in out times 1 On the Main Menu window click Payroll 2 Click Clock In Out Adjustment The Payroll Clock In Out Summary window contains summary information for all employees S Payroll Clock In Out Summary iof x Week Start of Week 02 15 99 End of Week 02 21 99 Confirm All Export Date of Export 00 00 00 Export Segt Not Exported Export Total Worked psss E Green Phs MN N Store s Total Worked Hours Jo hrs New Open Exit i 3 Click Start of Week or End of Week to locate the appropriate week s information 4 Click the employee whose time you want to review in detail and then click Open Preparing clock in out information for export If
465. uring the inventory parameters s ssesssssrssssssesssrsesssresssrreessrrtesssresnrressnre 191 Inventory Parameters Maintenance Window occ 192 Linking a vendor s SKU to a PLU siesisisirisienrianienii iiinis 194 Vendor s SKU Maintenance window oceans 195 Ordering receiving and transferring iNVENtOLY occ sees eesti 196 Ordern Inventory inoa aati rE E E RE 196 Manual purchase orders using PLU or vendor s SKU ow 196 Modifying a purchase Ofdet w ccccscccesseessesseseseessesessessssessssessesseneees 197 Creating a purchase order from a suggested oder s ssssssssssssssss 1 198 Purchase Order Maintenance Window occ 199 Issuing a purchase Ordet sisihan n 204 Printing a Purchase Order report ssssssssssssssssssssssesssseesssseessreessssresssne 204 Voiding a purchase Ofdet sesrennnacensoic nnee 205 Duplicating a purchase Ofer o cccccccesceessesseesesseessesssessesssseseeneees 206 Creating an order guide for licensee transactions wo 206 Viewing displayed information about the ordet wees 209 Entering an order from an order guide wesc 209 Receiving INVENTOLY ernennen aa a ae a 211 Converting purchase orders into receiving ordets uss is 211 Receiving inventory by PLU or vendor s SKU nsssssssssssssssssrsssssseesss 211 Receiving window senenn E E O OR dans 213 Receiving inventory DY CaS sensis narn 218 Receiving by Case window ivvisicscisisscscscoccrsatscscvssconeeveceneceviarnverinisenss 219 Recetving a partial order nandai aaa A EEA 222
466. urrent on hand amount is below the minimum acceptable on hand amount The Store Manager only includes items in the suggested order that you have not already placed on another order After you create a purchase order from a suggested order you can modify and issue it For information about modifying a purchase order see Modifying a purchase order on page 197 For information about issuing a purchase order see Issuing a purchase order on page 204 To generate a suggested order and create a purchase order 1 2 On the Main Menu window click Inventory Click Suggested Orders A dialog box appears asking you to confirm how you want to create the order Select Suggested Order Type AllPLUs C Deparment C Vendor OK Click a radio button If you click Department you must select a department from the corresponding drop down list Click OK The dialog box closes The Suggested Order Statistics window appears Suggested Order Statistics 0 New Suggested Orders 0 New Updated Orders 0 New PLUSXREF line items OK 0 Updated PLUSXREF line items Click OK A purchase order is generated Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Purchase Order Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for creating purchase orders 00010000013 Super Vendor order type 1 jg Purchase Order P 0 00010000013 03 14 2002 00 00 0000 03 14 2002 30 days 25 000
467. ve the case number you enter into the Case Number field in this window Type a number into the field 231 Performing Inventory Control Functions 232 Field Description Short Over Receive All None Report Inventory Information Complete Void This field indicates whether there is a discrepancy between the actual quantity of cases shipped or received and the quantity expected Type a number into the field This field determines the default number that the Store Manager enters into the Quantity Received field in this window You can change the value from the default entry made by the Store Manager This field is only available if you click Allow Receive All for Receiving and Transfers in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window Click All to automatically enter the expected quantity into the Quantity Received field Click None to automatically enter 0 into the Quantity Received field This field generates a Transfer report and displays it in the report window on your screen For more information about the Transfer report see Printing a transfer report below Click the button This field is not available in the Store Transfer by Case window This field completes the transfer You cannot modify a transfer after you complete it The transfer s status becomes complete For information about completing a transfer see Completing a transfer below Click the button This field voi
468. ventory Control in the PLU Maintenance window Each completed adjustment transaction appears in the Inventory Adjustment Report Store Manager tracks each adjustment transaction with a sequence number consisting of a Tlog generated transaction number and register number The register number always appears as 255 for Store Manager In the following steps you must enter information and make selections in the Inventory Adjustment window For information about the fields in the window see Inventory Adjustment window on page 249 To adjust the on hand inventory quantity of an item 1 On the Main Menu window click Inventory 2 Click Inventory Adjustment 3 Complete the fields in the Inventory Adjustment window as appropriate 4 Click Save and then click Exit Tip To adjust the on hand inventory for another item immediately click New in the Inventory Adjustment window Adjusting on hand inventory quantities Inventory Adjustment window This window contains the fields used for adjusting inventory quantities B Inventory Adjustment E loj Adi Type Bucket AVAILABLE To pee Reason TRANSFERSIN M Complete Note f his is an inventory i FT Quantity Oty Before Qty After In Stock Quantity AVAILABLE j The following table contains description of the fields in the Inventory Adjustment window Field Description Adj Type This field allows you to select the type of inventory cha
469. ver information 363 transferring inventory 224 viewing records 92 Store Administration window 43 49 51 store close function 51 Store Maintenance window 93 setting parameters 94 Store Manager about 11 changing all text 26 changing text 24 for all category 25 for all objects 26 for single object 24 closing store 49 customizing 21 39 defining system parameters 22 different versions 11 employee maintenance 57 open store function 49 opening new store 53 end of day function for cleaning up system 53 final clean up function 53 opening store 49 records for other stores 91 security functions 12 28 Store Manager Deluxe 11 Store Manager menu windows 3rd Party Software menu 14 Main Menu 14 Store Manager Parameters Menu window 13 store open function terminal admin exception handler 50 Store Transfer by Case window 230 patameters 230 Store Transfer by PLU window 225 parameters 226 Store Transfer Selection window 225 Transfer in by Case parameters 229 Transfer in by PLU parameters 225 Transfer out by Case parameters 229 Transfer out by PLU parameters 225 Store Transfer window patameters 226 381 store s information deleting 93 modifying 93 viewing 92 Stores Selection window 92 93 suggested order purchase order 198 creating a purchase order from 198 Suggested Order Statistics window 198 supplemental customer attributes maintaining 99 system cleaning up for new store 53 parameters defining 22 printing stickers and labels 2
470. ving transaction or open an existing pending or partial transaction 223 Performing Inventory Control Functions Click Report The Receiving report is displayed in the report window ra Receiving Report x Preview Design On Template Design Mode Off Template On File No Gave lemplate Delete Tiemplate Receiving Report by PLU SKU Document Number 00010000038 Transaction Number 5 Origin Manual Store 1 Transaction Date 5 21 99 Receiving New Store Receive Date 5 21 99 15 55 49 PO Number Ship Via ON Discrepancy 45454 Vendor 1 Phone Status L Fax Note Vendor SKU Cost i Back Item PLU XREF Description teeny puny Short Reason Order Retail CHAIR 0 000 0 000 5 000 Damaged Print Export Exit 5 21 99 16 00 44 Click Print A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the printing Click OK The Store Manager prints the report on the printer defined as the default printer and the report remains displayed on your screen in the Report window Voiding a receiving transaction A voided transaction remains visible in the Receiving Selection window and you can open it to see the information in it but you cannot modify it To void a receiving transaction 1 2 Open a pending or partial transaction Click Void A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm you want to void the receiving transaction Click OK The receiving transaction is void
471. w 171 Inventory Count Sheet window 241 inventory counts 240 count sheets 240 PLU list 244 Inventory History Information window 236 patameters 236 Inventory Information window 234 patameters 234 Inventory Menu window 196 Inventory Parameters Maintenance window 191 parameters 192 Inventory Parameters Menu window 191 inventory reports See reports inventory and inventory inventory transfer 224 by case 229 by PLU 225 226 completing 232 creating 225 printing report 232 voiding 233 issuing a purchase order 204 item movement 303 Item Movement Criteria window 296 Item Movement report 292 303 example 305 patameters 304 Item Movement Report Criteria window 296 304 parameters 304 317 J journal seatching for transactions 287 selecting 285 journal files 283 adding new 285 EJProcessor 286 Electronic Journal Viewer 283 Multi Journal Search parameters 288 Printing Method parameters 289 Search Criteria parameters 289 seatching 288 updating 285 286 Electronic Journal Viewer window patameters 288 multi journal search 288 opening 287 printing method parameters 289 reading 283 Search Criteria parameters 289 seatching 283 288 selecting journals 285 setting up 283 setting up electronic journal 284 third party applications 285 EJProcessor 286 viewing 283 journal files See a so electronic journal Journal Search window 284 285 287 371 L Label Parameter Details Maintenance window 253 254 parameters 254 Label Param
472. wing a balance s details You can review the information you entered into a balance transaction regardless of its current status Voided balances remain visible in the POS Balance Selection window To view the details of a balance 1 2 3 On the Main Menu window click Cash Management Click the appropriate safe Click POS Balance The pending completed deleted and voided balances are displayed in the window Click the balance you want to review and then click Open The POS Balance Maintenance window displays the balance information POS Balance Maintenance window This window contains the fields used for performing a balance transaction ia 1 Safe1 POS Balance Txn 5 Pending 06 08 01 11 32 cere E DEnGominshan cea ae Ae To complete the POS Balance Maintenance window 1 The Txn Num field defines a unique number that identifies the balance transaction This number is a counter that reflects the number of tender management transactions for example pickups and balances that have been performed This is not the transaction number that is recorded on the TLog The number in the T Log Num field in this window is recorded as the transaction number in the TLog No action is required The Store Manager automatically completes this field with the next available number when you save the transaction The T Log Num field defines the unique number that identifies the balance transaction in the TLog
473. x user flags Tip You can name a user flag by clicking the UserFlag No drop down list and selecting the flag then typing a name into the UserFlag Name field The name can be up to 10 characters long To add a user flag option to a user flag 1 On the Main Menu window click File Maintenance 71 File Maintenance Features 78 2 Click User Flags 9 User Flags Maintenance Iof x UserFlag No 1 UserFlag Name 2 Summers Summeritems 3 Fal o ffalutumitems ooo winter Winter items From the User Flags Maintenance window click the UserFlag No drop down list and select a user flag from the list The existing options for the user flag are displayed in the lower part of the window Click New A blank line is added to the bottom of the window Click the Code ID field and type a code ID number The Code ID must follow sequentially the Code ID of the option above it If there are no other options defined for the user flag type 1 into the Code ID field Click the Code Name field and type a short name for the option up to 10 characters long The code name appears in drop down lists when you apply the options in the PLU Maintenance window and the Promotions Maintenance window Click the Description field and type a description for the option up to 20 characters long The description appears in drop down lists when you apply the options in the PLU Maintenance window and the Promotions Maintenance window
474. xit 85 File Maintenance Features Deleting a vendor You can delete a vendor s file You should not delete a file if you have selected the vendor in any fields To delete a vendor s file 1 Onthe Main Menu window click File Maintenance 2 Click Vendors 3 Click Display All The existing vendors are displayed in the selection window s Yendor Selection Window iof x Vendor Id Vendor Name Vendor T Toronto Importer Open New Delete 1 rows found Display All Query Sort Exit 4 Click the vendor whose file you want to delete and then click Delete A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the deletion 5 Click OK The vendor s file is deleted 86 Setting up product vendors The Vendor Maintenance window This window contains fields used for creating vendor records je Vendor Iof x Account Number 1895623 Email Address J Vendor Discount 25 Terms es Web Site Joo newclothesplus com Vendor ID fi 23 Vendor Name JN ew Clothes Plus Address fi 05 Dolly Blvd City Toronto State Prov JON Zip Postal M 9P 3V3 Vendor Type importer Phone ja 6 596 5321 Fax ja 6 596 8654 Contact 1 George Black Phone J 416 596 9745 Fax Contact 2 J Phone Fax Order Lag Days 7 Min Order 4 00 Note J Order Days Delete MondayJ Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Exit To set the Vendor Maintenance window param
475. y completes this field Order Type This field defines the type of purchase order you ate creating If you click Order Type Required in the Inventory Parameters Maintenance window you must complete this drop down list before you can issue the purchase order You can define the selection of order types that appear in this drop down list in the Code Table Maintenance window Click the drop down list and select an order type from the list Vnd Terms This field defines the vendor s payment terms You define the vendor s payment terms using the Terms field in the Vendor Maintenance window No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field Transmit This field indicates whether the purchase order has been issued No action required The Store Manager automatically completes this field 200 Ordering receiving and transferring inventory Field Description Note This field defines any notes regarding the purchase order Type an alphanumeric string up to 40 characters long into the field Min Order This field contains the minimum dollar amount that must be ordered from the Over Min Order PLU XREF Description Required Qty Pkg Qty Pkg Count Extended Units vendor The data in this field is for information only If the items on the purchase order total less than the amount in this field the order can still be processed No action required The Store Manager automatically complet
476. y other functions and windows in the Store Manager Basic information you can enter includes definitions of the categories groups departments and user flags used to classify items selections in drop down lists tax rates product vendors and customer files This section covers the following topics Populating drop down lists Setting up the product hierarchy Setting up taxes Setting up product vendors Setting up tare weights Entering another store s information Setting up customers Maintaining extended customer fields Populating drop down lists In many of the Store Manager s windows you must make selections from drop down lists For several of these boxes you must define the selections that appear If you do not define selections the box s drop down lists remain empty You can define selections for the following drop down lists Clock In Out Adjustment Reasons Payroll Clock In Out Detail window Clock In Out Display Worked Hours Type Payroll Parameters Maintenance window Customer Status Customer Maintenance window Customer Type Customer Maintenance window Employee Status Employee Maintenance window Employee Type Employee Maintenance window Province State Codes Employee Maintenance window Store Maintenance window Vendor Maintenance window Customer Maintenance window Vendor Types Vendor Maintenance window Reason Code all tender management maintenance windows Adjustment Reason
477. ying 85 query drop down list 19 in selection window 19 searching in a table 17 select 14 sorting options by column header 36 377 setting 36 sort order 37 store creating 92 tables 12 updating 12 vendor 84 register parameters 13 relationship between POS Manager and the Configurator 12 Store Manager and the Configurator 12 tables and windows 14 report See also reports Average Hourly Sales 329 altering appearance 329 data calculation formulas 329 example 329 Balance 330 altering appearance 331 data calculation formulas 331 example 331 parameters 330 Balancing Short Over 293 Category 321 example 321 Current Inventory 338 example 339 Department 317 altering appearance 318 Category 321 Department Detail 318 example 318 Group 320 parameters 317 Department Detail 319 example 319 Department Summary and Detail 292 Gross Profit 340 altering appearance 343 example 343 parameters 341 Group 320 example 320 Hourly Sales Summary 327 altering appearance 328 data calculation formulas 328 example 328 parameters 327 Hourly Sales Summary and Average 293 Inactive PLU 335 altering appearance 337 example 337 parameters 336 Inventory Adjustment 293 332 altering appearance 335 inventory reports 332 compiling 332 Currenty Inventory 338 378 Gross Profit 340 Inactive PLU 335 Inventory Adjustment 332 List of Orders 236 Performance Detail 344 Performance Summary 344 Transfer 232 233 Item Movement 292 303 parameters 30
478. ype the customet s area code and telephone number 13 Click the Name field and type the customer s name 14 To sort the pending transactions by category click the Dept Category drop down list and select a category from the list For example apparel 15 To sort the pending transactions by group click the Dept Group drop down list and select a group from the list For example ladies apparel 16 To sort the pending transactions by department click the Department drop down list and select a department from the list For example blouses 17 To sort the pending transactions by PLU cluck the PLU field and type the PLU number in the field 18 To generate the Pending Transactions Report click Generate Report Pending Transactions Report Illustrated below is an example of a regular Pending Transactions Report This report lists all matching transactions and displays summary information for each of them such as the transaction name status number days overdue sell date pickup due date customer data total transaction amount and the balance ig Pending Transactions Report ioj x Design On Design Mode Off On File No Save emplete pelete mermplate Preview Pending Transactions Report Split View Overdue by days PDT Name PDT Status 1 30 31 60 61 90 over 90 Sell Date Pickup Due Customer Customer Show Criteria AY 4 Active 0110 02 03 11 02 2 KIM KIM LAYAWAY 3 Active 01 1
479. ype the full name of the third party applications executable file in the Program Name field To locate the third party applications executable file type the full path and name of the file in the Program Path field You can set the default state in which the third party applications window opens Click the Maximized Regular or Minimized radio button To set the minimum authority level that an employee needs to launch the third party application click the Authority drop down list and choose an option from the list To designate the third party application as the open and active application click the Enabled checkbox Leave the checkbox clear and the Store Manager remains active when you launch the third party application Click Save and then click Exit 35 Customizing Store Manager Sorting table records in selection windows You can change the order in which a selection window displays a table s records so that it displays information in an order that is useful to you There are two ways to change the sort order used in a selection window by using the Specify Sort Columns window and by clicking the column header in the window Both options base their sorting on the values in the window s columns Configuring the sort options Before you can click a column header to change the sort order you must enable sorting In addition to save a sort order you define with the Specify Sort Columns window you must configur
Download Pdf Manuals
Related Search
Related Contents
Human Factors Critique of the AgaMatrix User manual Juwel 65 series elo HealthRider HREL3226.0 User's Manual Tourne-disque stéréo automatique - Audio Accucell 6 Manual 鋳物薪ストーブ Baumatic BWC305SS Manual JF PRISMA 4000 - Fundidora del Norte SA Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file